Binder1 PDF

V12 Generator systems
120 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

• Configuration: To BS ISO 8528-1.
• Installation: Fixed.
• Mounting type: Fully resilient.
• Mounting: With a base frame.
- Accessories: Lifting points.
• Engine and alternator connection:
- Coupling: Manufacturer's standard.
- Assembly: With flange.
140 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE ANCILLARIES

• Electrical equipment: Required.
- Operating voltage: 24 V d.c.
- Earth polarity: Negative.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the generator system.
• Prime mover and alternator size: Take into account connected loads including ancillaries,
harmonics and transient operation.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers'
literature. Include:
- General arrangement drawings.
- Control diagrams.
- Prime mover and alternator data.
- Power output curves.
- Generator system efficiency at 50%, 75% and 100% full load.
- Start up temperature (minimum).
- Fuel and lubricating oil characteristics and consumption, as outlined in BS ISO 3046-1.
- Minimum run time without fuel and lubricating oil tank replenishment.
- Calculations for performance of acoustic enclosures and silencers.
- Maintenance access dimensions.
- Details of plinths and anti-vibration mountings.
220 PERFORMANCE OF GENERATOR SYSTEMS

• Prime power output (0.8 lagging power factor): 2250kVA.
- Limited-time running power (0.8 lagging power factor): 110% of continuous power when
used for 1 h in every 12 h.
• Emergency standby power (0.8 lagging power factor): 2500kVA.
• Electrical characteristics: 400 V, 50 Hz a.c, 3 phase, 4 wire, star connected with neutral
terminal.
• Site criteria: Land use.
• Operation: Parallel operation with the low voltage incoming connection and other
generators.
• Start-up mode: Automatic.
• Full load acceptance: Yes.
- Start-up time to full load acceptance (maximum): 10 s.
225 PERFORMANCE OF INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS

• Standard: To BS ISO 8528-1.
• Semi-automatic start-up mode: Required.
• Performance class: G3.
Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

240 GENERATING SYSTEMS FOR SAFETY SERVICES

• Standard: To BS 7698-12.
• Performance class: G3.
250 SERVICE CONDITIONS

• Environment: Inside.
• Ambient temperature: 40°C.
• Altitude (above sea level): 30M.
• Humidity (RH): 60%.
• Other site conditions: no other adverse conditions.
260 SYSTEM MODE OF OPERATION

• Details: System configuration to afford dual operation i.e. standby power and
peaklopping/prime mover functionality, with all necessary controls, switchgear monitoring
systems etc to enable peak-lopping, G59 synchronisation and parallel operation both with
mains and with alternate generator set.
265 GENERATOR SYSTEMS OPERATING IN PARALLEL

• Synchronization: Automatic.
270 FUEL AND OIL CONSUMPTION

• Fuel consumption (maximum): Submit proposals for standby and prime mover
operation.
• Oil consumption (maximum): Submit proposals for standby and prime mover
operation.
280A CONNECTING GENERATORS TO THE PUBLIC SUPPLY NETWORK

• Standard: To Energy Networks Association G59/1.
The Generator system shall be provided with a full complete fully operational G59
synchronisation system for operation in parallel with the utility mains (NIE). All necessary
equipment components cabling interconnections etc as necessary to form a full and
complete system shall be provided and installed.
Additionally the contractor shall ensure inclusion of a sum in the amount of £2000.00 for
the necessary application to NIE relating to the G59 parallelling
290A PROTECTION
The following shall be incorporated within the distribution switchgear associated with the
generator system.
- Overcurrent/Short Circuit
- Restricted Earth fault/nvd
- Neutral earthing contactors
- Reverse power
Reverse kVAr (mainly for parallel operation mode)

PRODUCTS
310 GENERATOR SET

• Standards:
- Prime mover: Internal combustion engines, to BS ISO 8528-2 and BS 5514-6..
- Governor: To BS 5514-4.
- Alternator: To one of BS 5000-3, BS ISO 8528-3 or BS EN 60034-22.
- Automatic voltage regulator: To BS 4999-140.
- Control panel: To BS ISO 8528-4.
• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of preferred suppliers and Manufacturers.
- Product reference: Submit proposals.
340 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES Two generator sets will be installed to the Generic
Ward Block Building. Each set will be capable of supporting the full building load therefore
the generator system shall be considered as N+1 .
• Standards: To BS ISO 8528-2 and BS 5514-6.
• Type: Compression engine.
• Manufacturer: FG WIlson or Catapillar or Equal or Approved
- Product reference: P2250P1/P2500E1.
• Number of cylinders: 16.
- Total displacement: 61L.
• Rated speed: 1500 rpm.
• Overspeed protection: To BS 5514-6.
• Air/ fuel intake: Turbo-charged.
• Air filters: Replaceable dry element type.
• Fuel filters:
- Type: Replaceable paper type preceded by fuel polishing system - refer to section S40
of this specification.
- Filtration: To remove contaminants larger than 10 µm.
• Oil filters: Replaceable full flow type.
• Crankcase oil heater: Thermostatically controlled.
• Oil reservoir tank: To maintain the required oil level in the sump.
- Reservoir capacity: 5 L.
- Oil level monitor: Required.
- Drain valve: Locate to provide gravity oil removal and easy maintenance.
- Used oil container: Provide.
• Cooling system: Air.
- Coolant heater: Required.
- Radiator: Engine mounted.
Protective guard: Required .
- Drain valve: Locate to provide easy maintenance.
- Fan: Engine driven and mounted .
• Engine starting method: Electric starter motor, 2 starter circuits per set .
- Starter lockout: Whilst engine is running .
• Accessories: Air intake manifold heaters and Glow-plugs .
345 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

• Engine start battery: Nickel cadmium to BS EN 60623.
- Capacity: Sufficient to crank engine 3 times at 0°C without recharging.
- Charger: Main powered.
- Lockable isolator: Required.
- Location: Proprietary battery holder attached to engine.
• Battery and charger for control panel: Required.
- Capacity: Sufficient to enable control panel to function for 48 hours following mains
failure.

350 GOVERNOR
• Type: Electronic.
• Manufacturer: System manufacturer.
• Mode of operation: To enable engine to operate continuously at rated speed from no-load
to the rated full electrical load.
• Adjustments:
- Acceleration rate;
- Load gain;
- Maximum speed;
- Speed droop; and
- Stability.
370 ALTERNATORS GENERALLY.

• Standard: To one of BS 5000-3, BS ISO 8528-3 or BS EN 60034-22.
• Type: Asynchronous.
• Excitation: Self excited.
• Overspeed withstand: 120% rated speed.
• Underspeed withstand: 95% rated speed.
• Short-circuit withstand capability (minimum): 3 times full-load short-circuit current for 5 s.
• Thermal classification to BS EN 60085: H.
• Ingress protection to BS EN 60034-5: IP32.
• Anti-condensation heater: Required.
• Protection: MCCB with over current and earth fault inverse definite minimum time lag relay.
• Output cable terminal boxes: Removable lid and side covers.
- Outgoing cable entry: Top.
380 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATORS

• Type: Automatic.
• Grade: 2.
380A SYNCHRONISATION
The Generator system shall be provided with a full complete fully operational G59
synchronisation system for operation in parallel with the utility mains (NIE). All necessary
equipment components cabling interconnections etc as necessary to form a full and
complete system shall be provided and installed.
Additionally the contractor shall ensure inclusion of a sum in the amount of £2000.00 for
the necessary application to NIE relating to the G59 parallelling

450 CONTROL PANEL Each generator will be provided with its own control panel and output
circuit breaker to be located within the generator room.
• Configuration: Group controls, alarms and indicators in common control panel.
• Controls:
- Alarm reset;
- Automatic/ manual switch;
- Emergency stop;
- Frequency adjust;
- Key operated start/ stop switch;
- Lamp test;
- Load bank test;
- Mains failure simulation;
- Maintenance bypass;
- Mute alarm;
- Return to mains operation; and
- Voltage adjust ±5%.
• Indicators:
- Electrical:
- Ammeter with phase selector switch;
- Battery voltage;
- Frequency meter;
- Generator synchronised;
- kW·h meter;
- Power factor meter with phase selector switch; and
- Voltmeter with phase selector switch.
- Prime mover:
- Coolant temperature gauge;
- Fuel gauge;
- Oil pressure gauge; and
- Tachometer.
- Status:
- Coolant heater on;
- Emergency stop activated;
- Generator in use;
- Generator ready;
- Generator off-load indication ;
- Generator on-load indication ;
- Hours run meter;
- Mains available indicator;
- Mains failure indicator; and
- Oil heater on.
• Alarms:
- Visual:
- Battery charge failure;
- Battery low voltage;
- Cooling fan failure;
- Engine overspeed;
- Engine start failure;
- Engine underspeed;
- High oil temperature;
- Low fuel; and
- Low oil pressure
- High Exhaust Temperature

- Low Coolant Level

- Neutral Earthing Contactor Failure
- Audible: Common alarm with mute button.

- Remote generator system alarm: BMS point to be provided.
470A DAY TANKS

• Capacity: Sufficient for 8 h continuous operation at full load, the day tank will accept a
diesel fuel supply from the generator bulk diesel storage tank without the need for the
generator to shutdown during the re-fuelling process. The generator must be capable of
running at full load for 200 hours.
• Location: Mounted within the generator room to afford maximum use of gravity feed.
• Fuel transfer: Gravity fed.
• Low level indicator and alarm: Required.
• Fittings:
- Drain valve;
- Fill pipe and cap;
- Isolating valve;
- Tank level indicator; and
- Vent pipe.
480 DRIP TRAYS

• Type: Removable.
• Overflow outlet pipe: Run to a location where a container can be fitted below the pipe
outlet.
• Capacity: 1.5 times the oil capacity of the prime mover sump.
485 EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS

• Type: Red 40 mm mushroom head, hand operated.
- Key to reset: Required.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Production reference: Submit proposals.
• Operation: To shut down the generator system immediately on activation.
• Mounting: Pedestal mounted.

490 LOAD BANKS Load bank connections will be incorporated into the main generator
switchboard, refer to main electrical LV schematic 1005885-BSXX(61)0002
• Type: Permanent resistive load.
• Product reference: Contractor's choice.
• Rating: 100% rated output of generator system.
• Enclosure:
- Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP44.
- Anti-condensation heater: Thermostatically controlled..
• Arrangement: Switch in equal load steps controlled from the generator system control
panel.
- Number of load steps: 5.
• Forced air cooling with run on timer: Required.
• Selective load control and load indicator: Required.
- Load step size: 10%.
495 GENERATOR SET FACTORY INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

• Notice before inspections: 21 d.
• Test equipment calibration certificates: Submit.
• Witnessing: Arrange for factory testing to be witnessed by the contract administrator and 3
colleagues.
• Testing: To BS ISO 8528-1.
- Type: Acceptance tests and Functional tests.
498 GENERATOR SET ACCEPTANCE TESTS

• Location: At manufacturer's works with electrical load and At manufacturer's works using
test-bed switchgear. Client and the Client's Consultant Engineer to be present. The
contractor will include for all expenses including travel and hotels to allow the client witness
testing to take place..
• Checks:
- Group CA;
- Group CB;
- Group CC; and
- Group CD.
• Measurements:
- Group MB;
- Group MC;
- Group MD;
- Group ME;
- Group MF;
- Group MG;
- Group MH;
- Group MJ; and
- Group ML.
• Acceptance test report: To BS ISO 8528-6.
• Results: Submit.
499 GENERATOR SET FUNCTIONAL TESTS

• Location: On site.
• General inspection to BS ISO 8528-6: Required.
• Measurements to BS ISO 8528-6: Required.
• Functional test report to BS ISO 8528-6: Required.

FABRICATION
550A CUSTOM EXHAUSTS

• Exhaust: In accordance with BS 5854. Generator exhausts for both generator sets will be
routed through the building from Level 1 Mezzanine level to Roof Level 7 to discharge to
atmosphere. The exhausts will be routed in a dedicated riser cupboard but the manufacturer
must ensure that all necessary features are included in the exhaust design to prevent the
following;
• noise transfer out with the exhausts
• exhaust leaks in the event of deterioration of the outer or inner surface of the exhaust
• blockages due to nesting birds at Acute Services Block roof level
• Type: Natural draught, .

• Material: Galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
• Fittings:
- Adaptors;
- Bends;
- Firestop plates;
- Flexible coupling;
- Flue collector boxes;
- Ridge terminal and adaptors;
- Storm collars and flashings; and
- Wall brackets.
• Exhaust silencers
- Type: Baffle.
560 FABRICATION PROPOSALS

• Design: Complete the design of the generator system.
• Prime mover and alternator size: Take into account connected loads including ancillaries,
harmonics and transient operation.
- General arrangement drawings.
- Control diagrams.
- Prime mover and alternator data.
- Power output curves.
- Generator system efficiency at 50%, 75% and 100% full load.
- Start up temperature (minimum).
- Fuel and lubricating oil characteristics and consumption, as outlined in BS ISO 3046-1.
- Minimum run time without fuel and lubricating oil tank replenishment.
- Calculations for performance of acoustic enclosures and silencers.
- Maintenance access dimensions.
- Details of plinths and anti-vibration mountings.
EXECUTION
620 INTERRUPTIONS TO EXISTING SUPPLIES

• Notice before interruption: 14 d.
• Connection to existing switchgear: Submit proposals.

630 INSTALLING GENERATOR SYSTEMS

• System: Install to provide access for maintenance without having to remove connections
and accessories.
• Fuel pipelines: Connect to generator system.
• Safety guards and stone guards: Install.
640A INSTALLING EXHAUSTS

• Location:From the generator room at Level 1 Mezzanine Level to the final exhaust exit above
Level 7 (roof level).
• Arrangement: Position to minimize noise levels and prevent exhaust gases entering the
building through the exhaust riser, riser doors, doors, windows or ventilation systems.
650 INSTALLING CONTROL PANELS

• Location: Remote free standing.
655 INSTALLING EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS

• Location: Integral within generator system control panel.
670 INSTALLING DRIP TRAYS

• Location: Under parts of the generator system where fuel or lubricant leakage may occur.
COMPLETION
910 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING GENERALLY

• Operation of control panel: Verify.
• Cold start-up test: Record start-up time with generator idle for 24 h before.
• Notice before commencing tests (minimum): 2 weeks.
940 TESTING GENERATORS OPERATING IN PARALLEL

• Synchronization controls: Verify.
• Load sharing: Verify.
• Operation of controls: Verify.
• Start-up and shutdown: Verify.
950 PADLOCKS AND KEYS

• Locking mechanism: Five lever.
• Material: Brass.
• Quantity: Submit proposals.
• Padlock keys: Two for each padlock.
• Padlock identification: Stamp padlock describing its function.
960 DOCUMENTATION
• Operation and maintenance instructions: Submit.
• Record drawings: Submit.
970 SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

• Indicator lamps: Supply 2 of each type used.
• Filter elements: Supply one set.
980 LABELLING
• Rating plate: To BS ISO 8528-5.

990 MAINTENANCE
• Servicing and maintenance: Undertake.
- Consumables: Provide.
• Duration: Until 12 months after Practical Completion.
- Maintenance interval: 3 months.

V20
High voltage distribution systems

V20 High voltage distribution systems
To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions
GENERAL The contractor shall engage the services of a HV specialist authorised

person status to carry out the design development grading studies and HV network
certification as is a requirement for this site. Provide and install a full complete fully
operational HV distribution system to serve the complete requirements of the project.
The Contractor will joint and connect HV cabling to HV cable loops as identified in the Acute
Services Block Enabling Works as built drawings.
110 HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GENERALLY.

• High voltage connection: Existing.
• Switchgear:
- Ring main units, as section V21;
- Switchboards, as section V21; and
- Switchgear assemblies, as section V21.
• Transformers: 2 no. 6.6-11kV/400V 2500kVA.
• Cabling: Thermosetting insulation cables, as section V24.
- Accessories:
- Cable bands, as section Y63;
- Cable cleats, as section Y63;
- High voltage cable terminations, as section V24;
- Underground concrete cable protection covers, as section V24; and
- Underground cable marker tape, as section V24.
• Containment: Cable ladders, as section Y63 and Plastic ducts for underground cables, as
section V24.
- Accessories: Cable cleats, as section Y60 and Protective covers, as section Y60.
• Building works:
- Fire stopping systems, as section P12;
- Access and inspection chamber systems, as section P30;
- Holes, chases, covers and supports, as section P31; and
- Plinth and bund systems, as section P33.
150 PRE-DESIGN SURVEYS AND DATA COLLECTION OF EXISTING HIGH VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
• Surveys and data collection: Data logging and Thermal video imaging survey.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the high voltage distribution system.
literature.

220 GRADING STUDY

• Scope: Complete (including existing, if any) high voltage distribution system.
- Qualifications of study author: Full member of the Institution of Electrical Engineers.
• Fault calculations: Include fault impedance, and short circuit, asymmetric and symmetrical
fault current analysis.
• Protective devices: Coordinate the selection and adjustment of protective device settings to
achieve discrimination throughout the fault level range. Grade so that a fault on any
outgoing branch circuit is cleared by the switching device installed in the faulted branch
circuit without affecting the other outgoing branch circuits. Demonstrate discrimination
using time-current coordination curves with single line diagrams, in the study report.
• Manufacturers' details and recommended settings: Include in study report.
• Study report: Submit.
230 DATA LOGGING OF EXISTING HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

• Objectives: To verify the existing consumption of the hospital network and to determine the
capacity available to the project.
• Property values to be recorded:
- Active energy (kW·h);
- Active power (W);
- Active power demand (W);
- Apparent power (V·A);
- Apparent power demand (V·A);
- Current demand (A);
- Daily active power profile;
- Frequency (Hz);
- Phase currents (A);
- Power factor;
- Reactive power (V·A(r));
- Voltage between phases (V);
- Voltage between phases and neutral (V); and
- Voltage characteristics of electricity supply from public network in accordance with BS
EN 50160.
• Sampling:
- Start date and time: TBC and subject to programme.
- Period: 31 days.
- Interval: 30 minute.
• Connection to existing switchgear: Submit method statement.
- Timing: Out of hours.
- Format: CD of data log and Electronic Spreadsheet.
250 THERMAL VIDEO IMAGING SURVEYS OF EXISTING HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

SYSTEMS
• Thermal imaging personnel: Specialist thermographer.
• Plant to be surveyed: Existing HV switchboards.
• Special conditions: Active Site.
• Measurements: As Specialists recommendations.
• Method statement: Submit.
• Report content: Document and provide images for plant inspected. Include prioritized
recommendations for remedial work.
• Report: Submit.

EXECUTION
620 INSTALLING HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

• Layout: Position cabling and equipment to provide safe and easy access for operation and
maintenance.
COMPLETION
910 TESTING AND INSPECTION

• Testing and inspection results: Submit.
940 DOCUMENTATION
950 MAINTENANCE
- Duration: Until 12 months after Practical Completion.

V21
High voltage switchgear

V21 High voltage switchgear
PRODUCTS
310 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR GENERALLY

• Standards: To BS EN 62711-200, BS EN 60694 and IEC 60466.
320 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS Initially switchgear will operate on a 6.6 kV medium
voltage private network and switchgear ratings will reflect the current carrying capacity
required to operate on a 6.6kV network. After an indeterminate period of time it is
intended that the network voltage will be increased to 11kV and all installed equipment and
distribution infrastructure must be capable of accepting the changed network voltage
without alteration, including CT's.
Incoming cables will be connected to Ring Main Units installed within the Acute Services Block
in a location identified on Drawing 1005885-BSXX(60)4003. Ring Main units (RMU's) will be
provided by two different manufacturers and will be rated at 600A to allow for the 6,600 Voltage
range initially used on the private medium voltage network.
The Acute Services Block Medium Voltage 6.6kV / 11kV switchboard shall be installed
within a dedicated switchroom on the West side of the building at Level 1 Mezzanine plant area.
All installed switches shall be capable of operation from a remote switching panel located
outside the room. The remote switching panel will be provided by the same manufacturer
as the 11kV switchgear, when not in use leaving the HV switches in 'local' mode will
prevent unauthorised use of the remote switching panel. The remote panel shall be locked
with the same type, style and designation of padlock used throughout the HV system within
the Hospital HV network.
Once energised and works or operations involving HV switching will require switching
programs, permits to work, limitations of access and valid approved risk assessment to be
presented to Health Estates prior to approval of works.
The remote switching panel will be clearly labelled for all connected 11kV switches and
will include status indicators for all 11kV switches. A mimic panel which details the local
status settings of the switchgear shall be provided within the main control room
• Type: Cubicle .
• Manufacturer: Refer to schedule of preferred manufacturers and Suppliers.
• Access: Front.
• Switchgear arrangement: Submit proposals.
• Voltage rating: 6.6-11 kV.
• Prospective rated short circuit current (1 s): 250MVA
• Terminals: Suitable for the dry connection of copper and aluminium conductors.
• Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard.
- Accessories: Padlock and key cabinets.
• Service conditions: Normal indoor.
• Functional units: High voltage circuit breakers.
• High voltage busbars: Required.
• Transportation or installation restrictions: None.
• Accessories: Manufacturer's standard.

330 RING MAIN UNITS A ring main unit shall be provided adjacent to the building HV
switchgear which will connect the building to the external HV ring. It should be noted that
the HV ring currently operates on a medium voltage of 6600V. This will be upgraded to
11,000 Volts (11kV) therefore all switchgear provided must be capable of operating on dual
voltage
• Manufacturer: Each Ring main unit shall compromise switchgear provided by more than
one manufacturer. The Client has approved ABB, Lucy and Group Schneider .
- Product reference: Submit proposals .
• Ring switches: High voltage switch-disconnectors.
• Outgoing feeder device: High voltage circuit breakers
- Protection relay: Required
• Transportation or installation restrictions: None.
340 HIGH VOLTAGE EARTHING SWITCHES

• Standard: To BS EN 62271-102.
• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers and Suppliers.
• Circuit interrupting medium: Sulfur hexafluoride to BS EN 60376.
• Number of poles: 3.
• Rated voltage: 12 kV.
• Rated insulation levels:
- Short time power frequency: 32 kV.
- Lightning impulse: 70 kV.
- Rated frequency: 50 Hz.
• Rated current: 630 A.
• Rated short time withstand current: 50 kA .
• Short circuit making current: Manufacturer's standard.
• Switch class: E2.
• Operating mechanism: Independent power
345 HIGH VOLTAGE FUSES GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: AS Switchgear Manufacturer.
• Rating: 630 A

350 HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERALLY

• Surge arrestors: Required.
• Rated insulation level:
• Rated frequency: 50 Hz.
• Rated short time withstand current: 50 kA .
• Rated operating sequence: CO-15-CO .
• Rated break time: Manufacturer's standard.
• Circuit breaker class: M2
• Operating mechanism: Independent power.
• Type of operation: Remote.
• Method of installation: Withdrawable
• Integral earthing switch: Submit proposals.
• Minimum degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: To BS EN 60529, IP42
• Mechanical interlocking: Captive key exchange type with square faced key and
alphabetical or numerical coded operating face.
• Intertripping: Open low voltage circuit breaker when HV circuit breaker opens.
• Protection:
- Overcurrent: Submit proposals.
- Earth fault: Submit proposals
• Remote control and monitoring unit: Sulfur hexafluoride gas pressure.
- Functions:
- Remote control and circuit-breaker position indicators.;
- Short circuit indication; and
- Sulfur hexafluoride gas pressure
380 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS GENERALLY

• Rated short time withstand current (1 s): 50 kA.
• Switch class: M2.
• Operating mechanism: Independent power.
• Integral earthing switch: Submit proposals.

410 HIGH VOLTAGE BUSBARS GENERALLY

• Standard: To BS 159.
- Approval: ASTA certified.
• Manufacturer: Refer to schedule of preferred Manufacturers and suppliers.
• Material: Copper.
• Insulation medium: Manufacturer's standard.
• Extendable: Each end
• Rated frequency: 50 Hz.
420 AMMETERS AND VOLTMETERS

• Manufacturer: As Switchgear Manufacturer.
421 FREQUENCY METERS

422 PHASE METERS AND POWER FACTOR METERS

423 WATTMETERS
430 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

• Type: Digital electronic
• Accuracy classification:
- For use with protective equipment: High.
- For use with measuring equipment: High.
• Primary rating: Submit proposals
• Secondary rating: Submit proposals
• Rated short time current: Match the circuit in which the current transformer is installed.
• Test links: Provide for connection of calibration instruments and meters.

440 DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION METERING EQUIPMENT

• Manufacturer: As Switchgear Manufacturer
- Product reference: Submit proposals
• Display type: Light emitting diode (LED).
• Minimum degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: To BS EN 60529, IP42.
• Metering functions:
Active Energy (kW-h)
Active Power(kW)
Frequency (Hz)
Maximum Active Power Demand (kW)
Phase Currents (A)
Power Factor
Pulsed Output (kW-h)
Reactive Power (kVA/r)
Voltage between Phases (V)
Phase voltages (V
Phase currents (A))
• Mounting: Recessed into switchgear
450 ELECTRONIC COMBINED CURRENT AND VOLTAGE SENSORS

• Standards: To BS EN 60044-3, BS EN 60044-7 and BS EN 60044-8.
• Product reference: Submit proposals.
• Type: Cast resin encapsulated.
• Accuracy classification: High.
- For use with protective equipment:
- For use with measuring equipment:
• Primary voltage: 12 kV
• Primary current: Submit proposals
460 INDICATOR LAMPS

• Manufacturer: Submit proposals
• Lamp type: Cluster LED with bezel. Standardize.
• Lens colour: To BS EN 60073.
• Lamp mounting: Recessed.
• Common lamp test facility: Required.
• Access for lamp replacement: Externally from front.

480 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR TRIPPING UNITS

• Battery capacity: Adequate to supply the standing load for 3 h on loss of a.c. supply. After
3 h, capable of tripping the circuit breakers 10 consecutive times.
• Enclosure: To BS EN 62208.
- Material: Steel .
- Minimum degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: To BS EN 60529, IP42
- Lockable hinged door: Required.
- Mounting: Floor
- Finish to enclosure and supporting framework: Match high voltage switchgear
- Colour: Match high voltage switchgear
• Incoming supply protection: Miniature circuit breaker to BS EN 60898.
• Charger type: Constant voltage current limiting.
• Battery type: Sealed nickel cadmium to BS EN 60622
• Output:
- Type: Direct current (d.c.).
- Voltage: Submit proposals
• Digital voltmeter: Required.
• Indicator lamps:
- Mains supply healthy.
- Mains supply failed.
- Charger failed.
- Float charge.
- Boost charge.
- Low voltage.
- High voltage.
- Positive and negative earth fault alarms.
- Low electrolyte (vented cells only).
• Common fault relay contact: Required.
- Type: Volt free.
• Vented battery labelling: Describe the treatment required following contact with the
electrolyte and warn of the explosion risk caused by naked flames.
• Remote monitoring facility: Include for provision and installation of remote monitoring
facility. Connection via IT infrastructure. Signal cable and IT switching equipment to
Suppliers recommendations. Installation at remote location to be incorporated within
proposals
490 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

• Manufacturer: Switchboard manufacturer.
• Type: Cast resin encapsulated.
• Accuracy classification: Submit proposals .
• Primary voltage: 12 kV
• Secondary voltage: 110 V.

• Locking mechanism: Six lever.
• Material: Plastics coated steel.

496 PADLOCK AND KEY CABINETS

• Type: Wall mounted metal.
- Finish: Match switchgear.
FABRICATION
510 SWITCHGEAR GENERALLY

• Switchgear: Factory built.
• Free standing switchgear: Provide lifting bolts within reinforced top frame.
• Insect proofing: Cover assembly openings with non-combustible and non-corroding insect
proof mesh.
515 PROPOSALS
• Content: Include the following:
- Overall dimensions.
- Degree of ingress protection.
- Mounting and fixing details.
- Builders work requirements including details of cast in rails.
- Fault level and rated short circuit characteristics.
- Functional unit details.
- Details of paint systems and colour finishes.
- Door swings.
- Access panel details.
- Schedule of labels.
- Dimensioned general arrangement drawings, plans elevations and sections.
- Shipping sections.
- Cable gland plate details.
- Routing of cables within assembly.
- Arrangement of busbars, connections and supports.
- Internal controls, instrument and meter diagrams.
• Proposals: Submit before fabrication.
530 CUSTOM ENCLOSURES

• Mounting: Floor standing.
• Material: Steel
• Type of accessibility to BS EN 62271-200: Type A.
• Minimum degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: To BS EN 60529, IP42
• Minimum degree of mechanical protection to BS EN 62262: to BS EN 62262, IKI0.
• Incoming cable access: Top entry
• Outgoing cable access: Top entry
• Finish to enclosure and supporting framework: Corrosion resistant paint
- Colour: Submit proposals.
• Earthing conductor: Copper to BS EN 13601.

590 FACTORY INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

• Notice before inspecting and testing: 28 days
• Inspections:
- Fabrication: Inspection required
- Assembly completed, busbars exposed and functional units assembled: Inspection
required.
• Testing: In accordance with BS EN 62271-100 and BS EN 60694.
- Factory testing of completed assembly: Required
- Routine tests: Required.
- Special tests: .
colleagues.
• Test and inspection reports: Submit.
EXECUTION
610 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING SWITCHGEAR

• Standards: In accordance with manufacturers' or fabricator's instructions and type test
certificates.
• Alterations: Submit records of alterations made to assemblies.
620 INSTALLATION GENERALLY

• Transportation, off-load and installation: Submit method statement.
• Fixing equipment: Fix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
- Fasteners: Zinc electroplated.
• Assembly: Line and level panels in accordance with manufacturer's or fabricator's
instructions.
- Interconnect busbars.
- Connect earthing conductor to system main earth terminal.
- Replace fittings removed for transport.
- Clearance (minimum): 1000 mm front and rear.
640 CONNECTIONS
• Incoming high voltage cables: Connect to switchgear.
650 INSTALLING METERING EQUIPMENT

• Digital metering equipment: Connect to building management system.
COMPLETION
910 CLEANING AND GENERAL INSPECTION

• Dust and debris: Remove.
• Completed installation: Inspect in accordance with BS EN 60694 and switchgear
manufacturer's or fabricator's instructions.
• Labelling: Verify.
• Fuse ratings: Check and confirm.
• Enclosure earthing: Verify.
• Cables terminations: Inspect.
• Reports: Submit.

915 LABELLING
• Name plates in accordance with BS EN 60694: Provide.
• Equipment identification labels: circuit references
• Anti-condensation heaters: Provide caution notices advising against accidental switching
off.
• Standby power: Provide danger warning notices stating that assemblies may be energized
from more than one source.
• Indicator lamps: Label each lamp describing its function.
• Fuses, terminal blocks and other assembly components: Label describing their purpose.
• Spare fuses: Label, describe their rating.
• Cabinets for padlocks and spare keys: Label.
920 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

• Notice before testing and commissioning: 28 days
• Testing generally: In accordance with BS EN 60694 and BS EN 62271-200
• Earthing: Check and verify.
• Protective device settings: Configure to match the grading study.
• Voltage test: In accordance with BS EN 62271-100.
• Insulation resistance tests: Carry out for:
- Ancillary trip and alarm wiring with any fuses and remote connections removed (500 V
d.c.).
- Anti-condensation heaters (500 V d.c.).
• Operation of alarm and trip devices: Check and verify.
• Indicators: Verify correct operation.
• Intertripping: Verify correct operation.
• Anti-condensation heaters: Check and confirm correct operation.
• Enclosure access interlocks: Check and confirm correct operation.
• Gas tightness of gas filled compartments: Verify.
• Condition of gas in gas filled compartments: Determine in accordance with BS EN 60480.
• Inspection and test results: Submit.
930 SPARE TOOLS

• Tools: Supply the tools necessary for maintaining the equipment, including racking handles
and a torque spanner.
• Tool cabinet: Include name plate, labelled shelves and non-lockable door.
- Dimensions: Size for storing racking handles, special tools, spare lamps, spare fuse
links and other equipment necessary for satisfactory assembly and operation.
- Location: Separate wall mounted, with finish to match switchgear

• Quantity: Provide a padlock for each locking point on the HV switchgear.
950 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATES

• Certificates of calibration for meters and instruments: Submit.

• Manufacturer's recommended spares: Supply one set.
• Spare fuses: Two of each type and rating used.
• Operating handles for circuit breakers and switches: One per device.

V24
High voltage cabling

V24 High voltage cabling
PRODUCTS
310A HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES GENERALLY

• Materials:
- 6.6 kV and 11 kV, underground industrial and commercial connections: In accordance
with ENA ER G81-5.
• Bonds electrical power cable terminations: To BS 7197.
• Proposed high voltage cables: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and
manufacturer's literature.
• Spare capacity (percentage of current carrying capacity): 25%.
• Cable sizes not stated: Submit proposals and calculations.
330 THERMOSETTING INSULATION CABLES

• Manufacturer: Prysmain or equal approved.
• Voltage designation: 6.35/ 11 kV.
• System category: A.
• Number of cores: 3.
• Conductor: Stranded copper.
• Insulation: Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE).
• Screen: Copper tape.
• Armour material: Aluminium alloy.
• Oversheath: Medium density polyethylene (MDPE).
- Thickness: To BS 6622.
- Colour: Red.
• Semi-conducting layer on oversheath: Not required .
340 LOW SMOKE THERMOSETTING INSULATION CABLES

• Manufacturer: Prysmain or equal approved.
• Voltage designation: 6.35/ 11 kV.
• System category: A.
• Number of cores: 3.
• Conductor:
- Material: Copper.
- Type: Shaped and Stranded.
• Insulation: Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE).
• Protection: Armoured.
360 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS

• Impregnated paper insulation cables: To BS 7888-4.2.
- Type: Tape.
• Extruded insulation cables: To BS 7888-4.1.
- Indoor: Submit proposals.
Outdoor: Submit proposals.

380 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE CABLE PROTECTION COVERS

• Type: Peaked.
• Size:
- Length: 914 mm.
- Width: 280 mm.
Thickness at outer edge: 50 mm.
390 PLASTICS DUCTS FOR UNDERGROUND CABLES

• Standard: To ENA TS 12-24.
• Accessories: Proprietary duct plugs, Draw-ropes.
400 PROTECTION TAPES FOR BURIED ELECTRICITY SUPPLY CABLE

• Standard: To ENA TS 12-23.
• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
- Product reference: Contractor's choice.
410 MANHOLES
• Access chambers: As section P30.
• Inspection chambers: As section P30.
EXECUTION
610A INSTALLING HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES

• 6.6kV-11kV Underground cable networks for development: In accordance with ENA ER
G81-6.
• Execution: Controlled by authorised persons and undertaken by competent persons.
- Evidence of authorisation: Submit.
- Evidence of competence: Submit.
- Permit to work procedure and method statements: Submit.
• Preparation: Store cables above 5°C for 24 h before installation.
• Installation temperature (minimum): 5°C.
• Cables: Install in one length.
• Cable pulling: Do not overstress. Prevent kinks and twisting of the cable.
- Installation method: Submit proposals.
620 EXCAVATIONS
• Excavations next to existing underground services: In accordance with HS(G) 47.
- Method statement: Submit.
• Existing underground services: Expose and identify.
635 INSTALLING THERMOSETTING INSULATION CABLES

• Installation: In accordance with BS 6622 Appendix C.
• Stress relief: Slide semi-conducting sleeve over exposed insulation.
640 INSTALLING LOW SMOKE THERMOSETTING INSULATION CABLES

• Installation: In accordance with BS 7835 Appendix C.
• Stress relief: Slide semi-conducting sleeve over exposed insulation.

650 CABLES IN TRENCHES

• Base: Newly prepared bedding.
- Material: Sand.
• Multiple cables in same trench: Set 150 mm apart.
- Cable formation within trench: Space cables apart by a minimum distance of half the
cable diameter.
• Manholes: Provide manholes, draw pits and jointing chambers.
• Cables below roads and hard standings: Duct and derate if longer than 10 m. Extend ducts
1 m beyond hard standing.
• Cable identification and protection: Underground concrete cable protection covers.
660 INSTALLING PLASTICS DUCTS

• Installation: In accordance with ENA TS 12-24.
• Location and colour coding: In accordance with NJUG 'Guidelines on the positioning and
colour coding of underground utilities' apparatus'.
• Duct formation within trench: Submit proposals.
• Gradient (maximum): 1:20.
• Duct bends: Suitable for cable bending radii.
• Duct alignment: Check before installing cables.
• Duct cleaning: Clean duct run before installing cables.
• Draw ropes: Install draw ropes in ducts.
- Type: Corrosion resistant, minimum breaking strength 550 N.
• Duct ends: Plug and seal with proprietary duct plugs.
670 CABLES IN DUCTS

• Cable installation from cable drums: Submit method statement.
680 PROTECTION TAPE FOR BURIED ELECTRICITY SUPPLY CABLE

• Installation: In accordance with ENA TS 12-23.
690 INSTALLING HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS

• Straight cable length before and after joint (minimum): 1 m.
• Spacing between joints (minimum): 2 m.
• Joint identification: Label as follows:
- Date installed.
- Contractor's name.
- Circuit reference.
- Cable type and size.
COMPLETION
910 CABLE TESTING AND INSPECTION

• Cleating and bending radii of cables: Verify and confirm that they are in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
• Cable terminations: Verify and confirm that they are in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
• Continuity and polarity: Verify.
• Insulation test: Submit results.
• Sheath test: Submit results.
• Pressure test:
- Paper insulated cables: To BS 6480.
- Thermosetting insulation cables: To BS 6622.
Results: Submit.

920 DOCUMENTATION
• Record drawings: Submit. Show route, depth, cable types and sizes, ducts lengths and
sizes, joint locations, joint and service phasing.

V30
Low voltage distribution systems

V30 Low voltage distribution systems
GENERAL
110 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GENERALLY

• Connection to low voltage supply: New, as section V11.
• Switchgear: Cubicle switchboards, as section V31.
• Cable type: LSZH singles, as section V32 and Multi-core XLPE/ SWA/ LSZH, as section
V32.
• Rewireable installation: Required.
• Concealed installation: Throughout with exception of in plant spaces. Sub mains to be
installed to dedicated containment routes as indicated in drawing series 1005885(65).
• Containment:
- Cable baskets, as section Y63;
- Cable ladders, as section Y63;
- Cable trays, as section Y63;
- Rigid conduit, as section Y60; and
- Trunking or ducting, as section Y60.
• Accessories:
- Cable cleats, as section Y63 ;
- Transient over-voltage surge suppression devices for mains power supplies, as section
Y67; and
- Underground concrete cable protection covers and protection tapes for underground
cables, as section V32.
• Completion:
- Electrical identification: As section V80 .
- Testing and inspection: To BS 7671 and Section V39.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the low voltage distribution system.
• Spare capacity throughout the low voltage distribution system: 20% of current carrying
capacity.
• Scope: Provide electrical supplies to equipment requiring power.
literature.
• Switchgear drawings: To BS EN 61082-1.
215 SURVEYS AND DATA COLLECTION

• Type: Electrical property measurement.

220 GRADING STUDY

• Scope: Complete low voltage distribution system.
- Qualifications of study author: Member of the Institute of Electrical Engineers (IEE/IET).
• Fault calculations: Include fault impedance, and short circuit fault current analysis.
• Protective devices: Coordinate the selection and adjustment of protective device settings to
achieve discrimination throughout the fault level range. Grade so that a fault on any
outgoing branch circuit is cleared by the switching device installed in the faulted branch
circuit without affecting the other outgoing branch circuits. Demonstrate discrimination
using time-current coordination curves with single line diagrams, in the study report.
• Manufacturers' details and recommended settings: Include in study report.
• Study report: Submit.
- Format: Final report to be presented as a PDF document + 3 paper copies..
EXECUTION
420 INSTALLING LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

• Layout: Position cabling and equipment to provide safe and easy access for operation and
maintenance.
430 ELECTRICAL PROPERTY MEASUREMENT

• Objectives: To ascertain the load profile of the site and assessment of effect on project .
• Property values to be recorded:
- To monitor voltage characteristics of electricity supply from public network in accordance
with BS EN 50160;
- To record daily active power profile;
- Voltage between phases and neutral (V);
- Frequency (Hz);
- Power factor;
- Active power (W);
- Active power demand (W); and
- Apparent power demand (V·A).
• Sampling:
- Start date and time: TBC subject to programme.
- Period: 31 day.
- Interval: 30 minutes.
• Connection to existing switchgear: Submit proposals.
- Timing: TBC subject to programme.
- Format: Electronic spreadsheet and PDF.
450 CONNECTION TO THE INCOMING SUPPLY

• Customer's installation: Connect to the incoming point of supply.

COMPLETION
920 DOCUMENTATION
- Number of copies: 3 + electronic.
925 SURVEYS AND DATA COLLECTION

• Type: Electrical property measurement.
930 MAINTENANCE

V31
Low voltage switchgear

V31 Low voltage switchgear
To be read with Preliminaries/ General guidance
PRODUCTS
310 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR GENERALLY

• Switchgear: Factory built.
• Free standing switchgear: Provide lifting bolts within reinforced top frame.
• Neutral terminations: Match current carrying capacity of phase conductor.
• Insect proofing: Cover assembly openings with non-combustible and non-corroding insect
proof mesh.
320 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS

• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of Manufacturers and Suppliers.
• Distribution board and consumer unit type tests: Fully type tested.
- Evidence of certification: Required.
• Enclosure:
- Material: Metal.
- Finish: Powder coated.
- Colour: Manufacturer's standard.
• Locking mechanism: Cylinder locks with a standard key type.
• Incoming device:
- Type: Switch-disconnector.
- Rating: As Circuit schedules.
- Poles: 2 Pole and 4Pole.
• Busbars and connections: Fully shrouded.
- Position within enclosure: Locate in same position relative to protective device for each
pole.
• Neutral and earth bars: Individual terminal for each outgoing circuit.
• Outgoing devices:
- Type: As Circuit schedules.
- Poles: 2 and 4.
- Quantity: As Circuit schedules.
• Spare current carrying capacity (minimum): 20%.
• Spare ways: As circuit schedules, fit with spare devices and blanking plates.
• Identification:
- Neutral and earth bar terminals: Label with the outgoing circuit reference.
- Cable terminations: Label with circuit reference, with push-on plastics markers.
• Accessories:
- Digital multi-function metering equipment;
- Indicator lamps;
- Padlock and key cabinet;
- Residual current monitoring devices; and
- Safety matting.

330 CUBICLE SWITCHBOARDS

• Switchboard type tests: Fully type tested.
- Evidence of certification: Required.
• Short-time withstand current (1 s): 75kA.
• Enclosure: Custom enclosure .
• External design type: Multi-cubicle.
• Intended location: Indoors.
• Mobility: Stationary.
• Internal separation: To BS EN 60439-1 National Annex.
- Form: 4 type 5.
• Busbar and connections: Required.
• Incoming device: W (withdrawable).
- Type: Circuit breaker.
- Poles: As Circuit schedules.
• Outgoing devices: W (withdrawable).
- Type: As Circuit schedules.
- Quantity: As Circuit schedules.
• Spare current carrying capacity (minimum): 20%.
• Spare ways: Fit with blank plates.
• Auxiliary circuits: W (withdrawable).
• Terminals: Suitable for the connection of copper and aluminium conductors.
• Service conditions:
- Pollution degree category: 2.
- EMC environment: A.
- Special conditions: None.
• Anti-condensation heater and thermostat: Required.
• Full length internal copper earth bar: Required.
- Size: 50 mm x 6 mm.
• Mounting arrangement for Electricity Distributor's metering equipment: Separate.
• Identification:
- Neutral and earth bar terminals: Label with the outgoing circuit reference.
- Cable terminations: Label with circuit reference, with push-on plastics markers.
• Accessories:
- Automatic transfer switching equipment (ATSE);
- Control and protective switching devices;
- Digital multi-function metering equipment;
- Indicator lamps;
- Padlock and key cabinet;
- Residual current monitoring devices;
- Safety matting; and
360 PROTECTIVE DEVICES GENERALLY

• Operation:
- Power factor: Continuously monitored.
- Handles: Removable only when switch is in the OFF position.
- Locking: Provide for padlocking in the OFF position.
- Rated duty: Uninterrupted.

365 CIRCUIT BREAKERS- ACB

• Door interlocks: Prevent enclosure doors being opened while circuit breakers are closed.
• Properties:
- Short-circuit breaking capacity: 75kA.
- Utilization category: A.
- Interrupting medium: Air.
- Design: Moulded case.
- Operating mechanism: Independent power operation.
- Isolating type: Required.
- Provision for maintenance: Maintainable.
- Method of installation: Withdrawable.
- With RCD: No.
- Mechanical interlocking: Captive key exchange type with square faced key and
365A CIRCUIT BREAKERS- MCCB

• Door interlocks: Prevent enclosure doors being opened while circuit breakers are closed.
• Properties:
- Short-circuit breaking capacity: 36 kA.
- Utilization category: A.
- Interrupting medium: Air.
- Design: Moulded case.
- Operating mechanism: Independent power operation.
- Provision for maintenance: Maintainable.
- Method of installation: Plug in.
- Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: 42.
- With RCD: No.
- Mechanical interlocking: Captive key exchange type with square faced key and
367 'J' - TYPE FEEDER PILLAR FUSES

• Standards: To BS EN 60269-1 and BS 88-5.
• Properties:
- Short-circuit breaking capacity: As Circuit schedules.
370 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS

• Properties:
- Sensitivity: 30 mA.
- Time delay: Adjustable.

375 SWITCHES, DISCONNECTORS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS AND FUSE

COMBINATION UNITS .
• Properties:
- Short-time withstand current (1 s): 75kA.
- Utilization category: AC-23A.
- Operation: Frequent (category A).
- Operating mechanism: Independent manual operation..
- Electrical interlocking: Open motor starter when switch opens.
- Terminals: Suitable for the connection of copper and aluminium conductors.
• Enclosure: Within cubicle switchboard.
- Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: 42.
- Material: Manufacturer's standard.
- Finish: Manufacturer's standard
380 TRANSFER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT (TSE).

• Standard: To BS EN 60947-6.1.
• Classification:
- Short circuit capability: PC.
- Method of controlling transfer: ATSE.
• Properties:
- Method of operation: Electromagnetic.
- Operating sequence: .
- Operating mechanism: Interlocked to prevent simultaneous connection to both normal
and alternative supplies.
- Utilization category: AC-33B.
- Operation: Frequent (category A).
385 CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE SWITCHING DEVICES

• Standard: to BS EN 60947-6.2.
• Properties:
- Method of operation: Electromagnetic.
- Method of control: Automatic.
- Reset after overload: Local manual resetting.
- Rearming after short-circuit: Manual via a circuit breaker.
- Utilization category: AC-44.

390 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT

PROTECTION
• Properties:
- Sensitivity: 30mA.
- Time delay: 50-70ms.
400 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

• Standard: To BS EN BS EN 60947-2
• Properties:
405 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES

• Breaking range and utilization categories:
- General applications: gG.
- Motor protection: gM.
• Properties:
410 CARTRIDGE FUSES

- Type: I.
• Properties:
415 FUSE LINKS

420 BUSBARS
• Standard: To BS EN 13601.
• Approval: ASTA certified.
• Material: Hard drawn high conductivity copper.
• Cross section: Rectangular with radiused edges.
• Enclosure:
- Material: Sheet steel.
- Finish: Powder coated

430 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

• Accuracy classification: 0.05%.
• Type: Cast resin encapsulated split ring.
• Primary rating: 50 A.
• Secondary rating: 5 A.
• Rated short time current: Match the rating of the circuit in which the current transformer is
installed.
• Test links: Provide for connection of calibration instruments and meters.
435 DIGITAL MULTI-FUNCTION METERING EQUIPMENT

• Manufacturer: Schneider or equal approved.
• Display: LCD.
• Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: Match assembly enclosure.
• Metering functions:
- Voltage between phases and neutral (V);
- Frequency (Hz);
- Power factor;
- Active power (W);
- Apparent power (V·A);
- Active power demand (W);
- Apparent power demand (V·A);
- Peak current demand (A);
- Peak active power demand (W);
- Peak apparent power demand (V·A); and
- Pulsed output (kW·h).
• Mounting: Recessed into switchgear assembly.
440 INDICATOR LAMPS

• Lamp type: Clustered LED with bezel. Standardize lamp type.
• Lens colour: To BS EN 60073.
• Lamp mounting: Recessed.
• Common lamp test facility: Required.
• Access for lamp replacement: Externally from enclosure front.

• Locking mechanism: Six lever.
• Material: Plastics coated steel.
450 PADLOCK AND KEY CABINETS

• Type: Wall mounted metal construction.
- Finish: Match switchgear enclosure.

460 RESIDUAL CURRENT MONITORING DEVICES

• Warning method: Audible and Visual Alarms.
465A SAFETY MATTING Provide along full lengths of accessible elevations of switchboards.
Ensure no overlapping (trip hazards)
• Thickness (minimum): 6.5 mm.
• Width (minimum): 900 mm.
• Length (minimum): Match low voltage switchgear assembly.
470 SWITCHGEAR TRIPPING UNITS

• Manufacturer: Switchgear Manufacturer.
• Enclosure: To BS EN 62208.
- Material: Combination of insulating and metallic.
- Method of fixing: Floor standing.
- Intended location: Indoor.
- Mechanical protection to BS EN 62262: IK08.
- Rated insulation voltage: Submit proposals.
- Lockable hinged door: Required.
- Finish to enclosure and supporting framework: Match switchgear enclosure.
- Colour: Match switchgear enclosure.
• Incoming supply protection: Miniature circuit breaker to BS EN 60898.
• Charger type: Constant voltage current limiting.
- Operating temperature range: -10°C to 45°C.
• Battery type: Sealed nickel cadmium.
• Output:
- Type: d.c. (direct current).
- Voltage: 110 V.
• Digital voltmeter: Required.
- Mains supply healthy.
- Mains supply fail.
- Charger fail.
- Float charge.
- Boost charge.
- Low voltage.
- High voltage.
- Positive and negative earth fault alarms.
- Low electrolyte (vented cells only).
• Common fault relay contact: Volt free.
• Vented battery labelling: Describe the treatment required following contact with the
electrolyte and warn of the explosion risk caused by naked flames.
480 MOUNTING FRAMEWORK COMPONENTS

• Framing: Metal channel to BS 6946
- Finish: Hot dip galvanized.

490 ENCLOSURES FOR PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES GENERALLY.

• Manufacturer: Switchgear Manufacturer.
• Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP54.
• Material: Steel.
• Finish: Match Switchgear
• Colour: Match Switchboard.
FABRICATION
510 CUSTOM ENCLOSURES FOR CUBICLE SWITCHBOARDS

- Type of material: Combination of insulating and metallic.
- Method of fixing: Free standing mounting frame.
• Mechanical protection to BS EN 62262: IK09.
• Rated insulation voltage: Submit proposals.
• Incoming cabling access: Top entry.
• Outgoing cabling access: Top entry.
• Finish to enclosure and supporting framework: Corrosion resistant paint.
• Doors and panels
- Doors:
- Form: Right angle return construction with rounded edges and corners, concealed
hinges and internal gaskets.
- Swing: 180°.
• Circuit breaker door interlocks: Prevent enclosure doors being opened while circuit
breakers are closed.
• Stays: Fit to outdoor assemblies.
• Hardware: Corrosion-resistant lever type handles with latching mechanism, able to
withstand explosive forces from fault conditions.
• Locks: Cylinder. Standardize key type.
• Fixing of removable panels: Captive, corrosion resistant knurled thumb screws.
• Cable entries and internal routing:
- Cable entries: Provide for incoming and outgoing cabling.
- Gland plate gaskets: Match the assembly's degree of ingress protection.
- Single core cables: Use non-ferrous plates. I
• Internal cable zones: Sufficient to allow cabling to be neatly routed and terminated.

515 PROPOSALS
• Content: Include the following:
- Protection against electric shock.
- Form of internal separation and details of busbar and terminal shrouding.
- Builder's work requirements and plinth details.
- Fault level and rated short circuit characteristics.
- Functional unit details.
- Details of internal and external paint systems and colour finishes.
- Door swings.
- Access panel details.
- Dimensioned general arrangement drawings, plans, elevations and sections.
- Shipping sections.
- Gland plate details.
- Routing of cabling within assembly.
- Busbar arrangements, links and supports.
- Internal controls, instrument and meter wiring diagrams.
540 LAYOUT
• Phase sequence: Set-out phase sequence for phases L1, L2, and L3, from left-to-right, top
-to-bottom, and back-to-front when viewed from the front of the assembly.
• Fuseholders: Mount such that fuses can be withdrawn towards the operator and away from
live parts.
• Heights of components (from finished floor level to underside of component):
- Equipment requiring operation or maintenance: 500-1600 mm.
- Instruments: 1200-2000 mm.
- Emergency switching devices: 800-1600 mm.
• Busbars and connections:
- Supports: Insulated.
- Identification: Provide 25 mm wide colour bands to busbars at 500 mm intervals with a
minimum of one band in each compartment.
- Future extensions: Pre-drill busbars for future extensions and extend busbar droppers
into spare functional unit locations.
560 WITHDRAWABLE DEVICES

• Mounting: Mount within assembly on a withdrawable carriage with racking gear for insert
and withdrawing.
• Gear to positively fix devices in the following positions: Connected, test-and-isolated,
disconnected.
• Interlocking: Interlock to prevent devices being inserted or withdrawn unless in a tripped
condition.
- Closure: Prevent devices being closed unless in either the connected or test-and-
isolated position.
• Discharge of stored energy: Automatic by racking operation.
• Labelled automatic shutters: Locate over exposed connections.
- Padlock facility: Required in the closed position.

580 FACTORY INSPECTIONS

• Notice before inspection and testing: 21 d.
• Equipment for inspection and testing: All switchgear assemblies.
• Factory inspections:
- Fabrication: Inspection required.
- Assembly completed, busbars exposed and functional units assembled: Inspection
required.
- Factory testing of assembly: Inspection required.
EXECUTION
620 INSTALLING SWITCHGEAR GENERALLY

• Switchgear cubicles: Arrange in modular form to facilitate future extension.
• Clearance (minimum):
- Front access switchgear: 1000 mm in front of switchgear.
- Rear access switchgear: 1000 mm in front of and behind switchgear.
• Fixing equipment: Fix independently of wiring installation with zinc electroplated fasteners.
- Indoor equipment: Fix using internal lugs.
- Outdoor equipment: Fix using external lugs.
• Extension boxes: Provide where necessary.
• Gland plates: Non-ferrous for single core cables.
• Close coupled switchgear: Interconnect.
- Cable type: LSZH singles, as section V32 or Multi-core XLPE/ SWA/ LSZH, as section
V32.
- Containment: Manufacturer's enclosure and Trunking and ducting, as section Y60.
640 INSTALLING METERING EQUIPMENT

• Digital metering equipment: Connect to building management system.
650 INSTALLING CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

• Identification details: Mount current transformers so that polarity markings and name plate
details are easily viewed in situ.
660 FRAMEWORK FOR MOUNTING MULTIBOX ASSEMBLIES

• Arrangement and fixings: Submit proposals.
• Treatment to cut metalwork, fasteners and fixings: Zinc-rich paint to BS 4652.
- Paint thickness: At least that of original layer.
670 INSTALLING SAFETY MATTING

• Front access equipment: Install safety matting in front of the equipment.
• Rear access equipment: Install safety matting in front of and behind the equipment.
• Installation: Fix securely to the floor.
- Location: install to access areas of switchboards, section boards and distribution
boards in plant areas. Ensure no matting overlaps occur.
COMPLETION


920 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF SITE-ASSEMBLED SWITCHGEAR

• Notice before testing and commissioning: 7 d.
• Switches and circuit breakers: Vacuum clean.
• Protective devices settings: Configure to match the grading study.
• Routine testing and commissioning: Submit results.
• Switchboard monitoring: Continuous for 30 minutes following first energizing.
• Additional inspection and testing:
- Check levelling and alignment of assembly.
- Check operation of instruments and metering devices.
- Check and adjust tightness of busbar connections and supports
- Check tightness of bolted connections.
- Check busbar joints with ductor resistance measurements.
- Check earth connections at compartments, switches and earth electrodes.
- Check clearance of live parts from direct contact.
- Check polarity and phase sequence of protective devices.
- Check operation of protective devices using secondary and primary current injection.
- Manually operate protective devices.
- Carry out earth fault protection simulation tests.
- Check functional operation of circuit breakers.
- Check operation of switch tripping devices.
930 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF SWITCH TRIPPING DEVICES

• Tripping function: Verify correct operation.
• Indicators: Verify correct operation.

• Manufacturer's recommended spares: Supply one set.
• Operating handles for circuit breakers and switches: One per device.
940 SPARE TOOLS

• Tools: Supply the tools, necessary for maintaining the equipment, including racking
handles and a torque spanner.
• Tool cabinet: Include name plate, labelled shelves and non-lockable door. Size for storing
racking handles, special tools, spare lamps, spare fuse links and other equipment
necessary for satisfactory assembly operation.
- Location: Separate wall mounted, with finish matching switchgear.
950 SPARE FUSES

• Spare fuses:
- Quantity (minimum): 5% of each type and rating used.
960 PADLOCKS AND SPARE KEYS

• Quantity per item of switchgear: 2.
• Keys for switchgear door locks: Supply 2 of each key type.

970 LABELLING
• Switchgear terminals: To BS EN 60445.
• Anti-condensation heaters: Provide caution notices advising against accidental switching
off.
• Standby power: Provide danger warning notices stating that assemblies may be energized
from more than one source.
• Indicator lamps: Label each lamp describing its function.
• Fuses, terminal blocks and other assembly components: Label describing their purpose.
• Spare fuses: Label, describe their rating and associated outgoing ways.
• Cabinets for padlocks and spare keys: Label.


V32
Low voltage cabling

V32 Low voltage cabling
To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.
PRODUCTS
310 CABLES GENERALLY

• Approval: British Approvals Service for Cables (BASEC) certified.
• Proposed selection of low voltage cables: Submit drawings, technical information,
calculations and manufacturer's literature.
• Conductor sizes (minimum):
- Sub main cables: See sub-main cable schedule
- Lighting final circuits: 2.5mm2 & 4 mm².
- Power final circuits: 4 mm².
- The contractor will also refer to the Distribution board schedules and sub-main cable
schedule for the correct size of all cables within the project.
- Spare capacity (percentage of current carrying capacity): 25%.
• Cable sizes not stated: Submit proposals and calculations.
- Format: Amtech.
315 CABLES, CORDS AND CONDUCTORS IDENTIFICATION

• Identification: Throughout cable length.
• Colour identification of cores: To BS 7671.
• Phase rotation: Identify with the coding L1, L2 and L3.
316 FLEXIBLE CABLES AND CORDS IDENTIFICATION

• Phase rotation: Label with the coding L1, L2 and L3.
330 FLEXIBLE CORDS

• Manufacturer: Prysmian or equal approved.
• Light duty PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cords (LD PVC/ PVC cord, H03VV-F):
- Construction: To table 26.
- Sheath colour: White.
• Ordinary duty PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cords (PVC/ PVC cord, H05VV-F):
• Ordinary duty 90ºC PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cords (HR PVC/ PVC cord,
H05V2V2-F):
- Sheath colour:White.
340 INDUSTRIAL FLEXIBLE CORDS

• Heavy duty, heat resisting EPR insulated and sheathed flexible cords (HD HR rubber cord,
H07BB-F):

350 PVC INSULATED CABLES FOR SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL GEAR

• Single core type CK flexible heat resisting cables (single core tri-rated):
360 SINGLE-CORE HEAT RESISTING INSULATING CABLES

• Heat resisting rubber insulated cable (HR rubber singles, H07G-U):
370 THERMOSETTING INSULATED CABLES

• Rigid thermosetting insulated single core cables (LSZH singles, H07Z):
- Construction: To table 3a.
• Thermosetting insulated and sheathed single core cables (LSZH/ LSZH singles):
• Thermosetting insulated and sheathed cables with circuit protective conductor (LSZH/
LSZH with CPC):
390 INSULATED AND SHEATHED ARMOURED CABLES

• Rated voltage: 600/ 1000 V.
• Conductors: Copper.
393 THERMOSETTING INSULATED AND LSZH SHEATHED ARMOURED CABLES

• Type: Multi-core XLPE/ SWA/ LSZH.
• Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene.
420 FIRE RESISTANT, INSULATED AND SHEATHED CABLES

• Approval: LPCB certified.
• Screen: Copper tape.
430 FIRE RESISTANT, INSULATED AND SHEATHED ARMOURED CABLES

• Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene.
• Fire resistance category: F3.
460 INSULATING TAPE

• Standards: To BS EN 60454-1.

465 UNDERGROUND CABLE MARKER TAPE

• Material: Polyethylene.
• Size:
- Width: 150 mm.
- Thickness: 0.1 mm.
- Format:
- Background colour: Yellow.
- Text colour: Black.
475 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE CABLE PROTECTION COVERS

• Type: Peaked.
• Size: 914 mm.
• Width: 305 mm.
• Thickness at outer edge: 40 mm.
480 CABLE ACCESSORIES

• Cold-pour resin compound: To BS 7933-1.
• Heat-shrink joints: To BS 7933-2.
• Glands: To BS EN 50262.
• Terminations for mineral insulated cables: To BS EN 60702-2.
EXECUTION
610 CABLE INSTALLATION GENERALLY

• Timing: Do not start internal cabling until building enclosure provides permanently dry
conditions.
• Preparation: Store cables above 5°C for 24 hours before installation.
• Installation temperature (minimum): 5°C.
• Cable pulling: Do not overstress. Prevent kinks and twisting of the cable.
• Cables passing through walls: Sleeve with conduit or pipeduct. Bush at both ends.
• Cables surrounded or covered by insulation: Derate.
• Jointing: At equipment and terminal fittings only.
620A CABLE ROUTES

• Cables generally: Conceal within building fabric and ceiling voids
- Concealed cable runs to wall accessories: Run vertically from the accessory.
• Exposed cable runs: Submit proposals.
• Distance from other services running parallel: 150 mm minimum.
- Heating pipes: Position cables below.
640 CABLES IN VERTICAL TRUNKING AND DUCTS

• Supports: Pin racks or cleats at each floor level or at 5 m vertical centres, whichever is
less.
• Heat barriers: Required.

650 CABLES IN ACCESSIBLE ROOF SPACES

• Cables running across ceiling joists: Cable tray, as section Y63.
660 CABLES ON CABLE SUPPORTS

• Position: Place cables side by side.
• Fastenings: Enable any cable to be individually removed.
680 CABLES IN TRENCHES

• Base: Newly prepared bedding.
• Multiple cables in same trench: Set 150 mm apart.
- Cable formation within trench: Space cables apart by a distance of half the cable
diameter.
• Trefoil cable groups and protective conductors: Bind at 1 m intervals.
• Cables below roads and hardstandings: Install within duct and derate cable if longer than
10 m. Extend ducts 1 m each side of hard standing.
• Cable identification and protection: Underground concrete cable protection covers and
underground cable marker tape.
700 INSTALLING CABLE DUCTS

• Duct formation within trench: Ducts will connect to draw pit positions installed as part of the
Enabling Works package. The Contractor must coordinate with the 'as built' drawings
provided by the enabling works team and connect ducts accordingly once the locations
have been proved and confirmed by the Contractor onsite..
• Gradient (maximum): 1:20.
• Duct bends: Suitable for cable bending radii.
- Location: maximum 30m apart in straight runs. .
• Duct alignment: Check before installing cables.
• Duct cleaning: Clean duct run before installing cables.
• Draw ropes: Install draw ropes in ducts.
- Type: Corrosion resistant, minimum breaking strength 550N.
• Duct ends: Plug and seal with proprietary duct plugs.
710 CABLES IN DUCTS

• Cable installation from cable drums: Submit method statement.
• Single core trefoil cable groups and protective conductors: Install within a single duct and
bind at 1 m intervals.
720 CABLES IN CONDUIT AND TRUNKING

• Cable installation: Install cables so that they are orderly and capable of being withdrawn.
• Single core wiring: Arrange using the loop-in method.
• Cables within trunking: Tie at 2 m intervals for cables of the same circuit reference. Label
ties with circuit reference number at 10 m intervals.
• Cables in vertical conduit: Provide cable clamps in accessible conduit boxes at 10 m
intervals.

730 INSTALLING MINERAL INSULATED COPPER SHEATHED CABLES

• Installation: In accordance with BS 6207-3.
• Bending: Do not corrugate sheath. Straighten and dress cables neatly.
• Moisture damage to the insulation: Prevent.
• Temporary seals: Provide for cables when cut.
• Cables concealed within walls:
- Termination of cable: Within enclosure in ceiling void or another accessible position.
- Containment for cable tails: Heavy gauge galvanized conduit.
• Fastening to fabric:
- Bare cables: Bare copper P-clips.
- Sheathed cables: LSZH covered copper P-clips.
• Testing: Test each length immediately after fastening. Repeat test 24-48 h later.
740 INSTALLING ARMOURED CABLES

• Galvanized steel guards: Provide where cables are vulnerable to mechanical damage.
• Earthing: Bond armour to equipment and main earthing system.
• Connections to apparatus: Moisture proof, sealed glands and shrouds.
750 INSTALLING FLEXIBLE CORDS

• Cords: Grip securely at connections. Where cord grips do not form an integral part of the
accessory or equipment, provide separate proprietary cord grips.
760 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING

• Preparation: Cut cable ends immediately before jointing or terminating.
- Cables left unconnected for more than 24 h: Seal to prevent moisture ingress.
• Cable stripping:
- Length of exposed cores and conductors: Minimize. Leave no exposed conductor after
termination.
- Strands: Do not damage when stripping cable cores. Twist together. Do not reduce
number. Secure at terminations.
• Joints and terminations: Use qualified cable jointers, using jointing materials, components
and installation techniques recommended by the cable manufacturer and the jointing
accessory manufacturer.
• Tooling certificate: Submit before installing connectors.
• Cable glands: Provide in accordance with BS 6121-5.
• Cold pour resin and heat shrink joints: Provide in accordance with BS 6910-2.
• Plastics sheathed cables: Seal with proprietary shrink-on end caps.
• Bolted terminal connections to equipment and switchgear without integral cable clamping
terminals: Compression or solder type lugs, of correct bore.
• Compression joints: Provide in accordance with BS 7609.
• Conductor labelling: Identify cable conductor cores at each end of cable and at joints.
• Unused cable cores: Connect to earth.
770 JOINTING AND TERMINATING ELASTOMER AND PLASTICS INSULATED CABLE

• Cable glands: Shroud.
• Core connections to equipment without integral clamping terminals: Compression lugs.

780 TERMINATING MINERAL INSULATED CABLES

• Terminating copper sheaths: Earth to non-ferrous plate fixed to enclosure.
• Connections to vibrating equipment: Loop cables in a complete circle next to the point of
connection.
• Connection to equipment and boxes: LSZH shrouded glands.
• Conductor cores: Identify at cable ends.
• Insulation resistance: Test at the time of termination and 24 h later.
- Test report: Submit.
790 MINERAL INSULATED CABLE JOINTS

• Terminations: Terminate cables in externally threaded glands with seals. Indicate
temperature rating.
• Joints: Crimped connectors.
• Connectors: Insulate and seal connectors with insulating tape to conductor sleeving.
Terminate glands into internally threaded brass sleeve.
- Brass sleeve protection Heat shrink sleeve.
810 COLD-POUR RESIN COMPOUND AND HEAT-SHRINK JOINTS


V33
Busbar trunking

V33 Busbar trunking
V33 Busbar trunking
PRODUCTS
310 LIGHTING BUSBAR TRUNKING Not included in the Cundall design but where proposed
by the contractor;
• Manufacturer: E&I or Electrak or Equal & Approved.
• Assembly: Fully type-tested.
• Current rating: 40 A.
• Configuration: 5 pole.
• Place of installation: Indoor.
• Protection against electric shock: Submit proposals.
• Prospective rated short circuit current (1 s): 25 kA.
• Casing:
- Standard: To BS EN 62208.
- Material: Aluminium.
- Finish: Hot dipped galvanized.
- Colour: Galvanised.
• Mechanical design:
- Mechanical loads: Normal.
- Additional loads: General lighting system.
• Conductors: Copper .
• Supports:
- Ceiling bracket;
- Clamp for channel;
- Suspension clamp; and
- Suspension ring.
• Accessories:
- Elbows;
- End covers;
- Flexible connections;
- Joint covers; and
- Plug outlet covers.

V33 Busbar trunking
320 POWER BUSBAR TRUNKING Power Busbar trunking will be provided in electrical risers
located near stair cores 1,2 and 3. Power Busbar will provide power to all ward levels
within the Acute Services Block. Tap offs to all local distribution boards indicated in the
drawings will be provided as part of the contract, plus an additional 15% of the total number of
tap off boxes will be provided as spares. Spares will be provided complete with all necessary
items to allow the tap off to operate once a cable is installed to the tap off.
• Type: Low voltage.
• Manufacturer: E&I or Schneider .
- Product reference: PowerBar or Canalis or Equal & Approved.
• Configuration: Clean earth and 100% earth.
• Additional circuits: Submit proposals.
• Place of installation: Indoor within Electrical Risers.
• Attitude: Vertical.
• Casing:
- Finish: Self finished.
- Colour: manufacturers standard.
- Additional loads: Ladder supports.
• Supports: Wall brackets.
• Accessories:
- Joint covers; and
- Thrust units.
320A POWER BUSBAR TRUNKING Power Busbar trunking will be provided between the generators
and the main Generator switchboard with the busbar then continuing to feed the main LV
Switchboard. The main switchboard will also be served directly from the two main transformers
via busbar also.
• Type: Low voltage.
• Manufacturer: E&I or Schneider .
- Product reference: PowerBar or Canalis or Equal & Approved.
• Configuration: Clean earth and 100% earth.
• Additional circuits: Submit proposals.
• Place of installation: Indoor within Electrical Risers.
• Attitude: Vertical.
• Casing:
- Finish: Self finished.
- Colour: manufacturers standard.

- Additional loads: Ladder supports.
• Supports: Wall brackets.
• Accessories:
- Joint covers; and
- Thrust units.
340 TAP-OFF UNITS Tap offs to all local distribution boards indicated in the drawings will be
provided as part of the contract, plus an additional 15% of the total number of tap-off boxes
will be provided as spares. Spares will be provided complete with all necessary items to
allow the tap-off to operate once a cable is installed to the tap-off.
• Type: Plug-in.
• Manufacturer: E&I or Schneider to match power busbar or Equal & Approved..
- Product reference: Power Bar or Canalis.
• Rating: As schematics, drawings and circuit charts.
• Phase: Three.
• Assembly: Partially type-tested.
• Circuits: To match busbar trunking.
• Accessories: Circuit-breaker.
350 FEED UNITS End feed units shall include an isolator fully rated to the system requirements
• Type: End feed.
• Manufacturer: E&I or Schneider or Equal & Approved.
- Product reference: PowerBar or Canalis.
• Circuits: To match busbar trunking.
• Accessories: Submit proposals.

V33 Busbar trunking
370 FIRE BARRIER UNITS Where busbars penetrate fire compartments

• Manufacturer: As Power busbar trunking.
• Fire protection: To match compartmentation .
• Circuits: Match busbar trunking.
• Accessories: End covers.
EXECUTION
605 INSTALLING BUSBAR TRUNKING GENERALLY

• Joints: Manufacturer's jointing fittings. Maintain rigidity of trunking across joint.
- Number of joints: Minimize.
- Lengths of trunking: Maximize.
- Open ends: Blank using manufacturer's removable end caps.
- Electrical continuity: Maintain at each joint with a copper link fitted on the outside of the
trunking.
• Connections to trunking covers: Minimize. Submit proposals for lid removal.
• Electrical continuity of covers: Electrically continuous with the trunking or provide protective
conductors.
• Access: Provide space around trunking to permit access for installing and maintaining
cables. Set out access with covers on a continuous face to allow cabling to be laid in
throughout its entire length.
• Trunking passing through building fabric openings: Provide fixed trunking covers and
extend these 50 mm from both sides of the opening.
610 INSTALLING LIGHTING BUSBAR TRUNKING where proposed by contractor.

• Generally: In accordance with BS 7671.
• Location: High level horizontal installation.
• Expansion joint interval: 30 m and at building expansion joints.
• Supports and fixings:
- Supports: Purpose made brackets and Suspension rods and steel channels.
- Finish and colour: Match trunking.
- Locations where moisture may occur: Corrosion resistant, selected to prevent
deterioration by electrolytic action.
620 INSTALLING POWER BUSBAR TRUNKING Power busbar will be installed vertically
within electrical risers with the end feed unit mounted at the lowest practical point to
maximise space for tap-offs within the risers.
• Location: Within electrical risers.
• Expansion joint interval: 30m .
• Supports and fixings:
- Supports: Purpose made brackets.
- Finish and colour: Match trunking.
- Locations where moisture may occur: Corrosion resistant, selected to prevent
deterioration by electrolytic action.
630 INSTALLING TAP OFF UNITS Tap-offs will be installed within riser cupboards and connect
distribution boards to the 400V electrical network..
• Location: Within electrical risers - on the same floor level as the connected equipment.
• Tap-off point intervals: 600 mm.

V33 Busbar trunking
640 INSTALLING FEED UNITS Each busbar will have a dedicated end feed unit, main rising
busbars shall be connected by LSA/SWA/xple cable to the main switchboard.
• Location: Within electrical risers at lowest available floor.
650 INSTALLING FIRE BARRIER UNITS Where busbar trunking penetrate walls and
compartments.
• Location: At all fire walls.
COMPLETION
910 CLEANING
• Trunking: Clean immediately before handover.

930 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF SITE-ASSEMBLED BUSBAR TRUNKING

• Notice before testing and commissioning: 21 days.
• Protective devices settings: To be included in a protection settings report by
commissioning Agent.
• Routine testing and commissioning: Submit results.
• Additional inspection and testing:
- Check and adjust tightness of busbar connections and supports.
- Check tightness of bolted connections.
- Check busbar joints using ductor resistance measurements.
- Check earth connections.
- Check clearance of live parts from direct contact.
- Carry out earth fault protection simulation tests.
940 SPARE TOOLS

• Tools: Supply the tools for maintaining the busbar trunking.
950 LABELLING
• Busbar terminals: To BS EN 60445.
960 DOCUMENTATION
• Drawings: Submit, showing the busbar trunking and tap-off units.

V36Automatic power factor correction equipment

V36 Automatic power factor correction equipment
PRODUCTS
310 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT Automatic power factor

correction equipment shall be installed at the main building switchboard.
• Operation:
- Power factor: Continuously monitored.
- Differences between the required power factor and the actual setting: Rectified by
adding or removing capacitor banks.
• Enclosure: Within low voltage switchgear, as section V31.
• Power capacitors: Integral.
• Main isolation: Integral.
- Type: Circuit breaker, as V32.
- Operating handle: Padlock loop.
- Mounting: Front of panel.
• Controls: Solid state microprocessor based.
- Illuminated display: Required.
- Selection of required power factor: Adjustable between 1.00 and 0.75.
- Operating modes: On, off and automatic.
- Power factor sensing and control: Automatic.
- Capacitor banks: Switched individually.
- Identification of energized capacitor banks: LED indicating lamps.
- Undervoltage sensing: Disconnects capacitor banks at pre-set adjustable undervoltage
and upon supply failure.
- Alarms:
- Capacitor overload;
- Loss of capacitance;
- Low power factor;
- Overcurrent;
- Over temperature;
- Overvoltage; and
- Excessive voltage total harmonic distortion (THD).
- Mounting: Front of panel.
• Remote monitoring output: Connect to central controls and BMS, as section Y40.
- Signals: Alarms.
• Current transformers: Type, configuration and ratio to suit sensing and mounting
conditions.
• Contactors: Three pole, rated for repetitive high inrush switching duty.
320 CAPACITOR BANK SIZE

• Number of capacitor banks: 6 (Each side of the switchboard)
• Size of each capacitor bank: 50 kV·Ar
330 PERFORMANCE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

• Power factor when corrected: 0.95 lagging.
• Capacitor bank size and number of stages: Submit proposals.
• Power factor equipment sizing calculations: Submit.

370 ILLUMINATED DISPLAYS

• Type: Liquid crystal display (LCD).
• Indicate:
- Required and actual power factors: Accuracy to within 1% of measured value.
- Capacitor banks in use.
- Bank reconnection delay.
- Real and reactive currents.
- Voltage THD.
- System alarms.
410 POWER CAPACITORS

• Standards: To BS EN 60831-1 and BS EN 60831-2.
• Type: Dry, metallized dielectric, self-healing.
- Encapsulation: Vacuum liquid treated with thermosetting resin within plastic container.
• Manufacturer: Schneider, SDC or equal approved.
• Capacitor housing: Sheet steel enclosure filled with inorganic, inert and fire proof granules.
- Thermal equalizers: Required.
• Voltage rating: 690 V.
EXECUTION
610 INSTALLING POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

• Separate enclosures: Arrange in modular form to facilitate future extension.
- Front access: 1000 mm.
• Fixing equipment: Fix independently of wiring installation with zinc electroplated fasteners.
• Indoor equipment: Fix with internal lugs.
• Outdoor equipment: Fix with external lugs.
• Extension boxes: Provide where necessary.
• Gland plates: Non-ferrous for single core cables.
- Cable type: LSZH singles, as section V32.
- Containment: Trunking, as section Y60.
620 POWER FACTOR ANALYSIS

• Data logging: As section V30.
630 FRAMEWORK FOR MOUNTING POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

• Material: Match main switchgear.
• Finish: Match main switchgear.
680 FACTORY INSPECTIONS

• Notice before inspection and testing: 21 d.
• Scope: Factory test power factor correction equipment before delivery to site.
• Tests: Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance,
leak, and dissipation-factor tests.
• Operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices: Functional test.

COMPLETION
910 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING GENERALLY

• Capacitors, wiring, components, connections and equipment installation: Inspect.
• Operation of instruments and displays: Check and confirm correct operation.
• Controls: Commission and adjust for optimum power factor correction.
• Testing and commissioning results: Submit.

• Supply the following spares:
- Internal fuses: 2 of each type.

V37
Harmonic filtering equipment

V37 Harmonic filtering equipment
PRODUCTS Harmonic Filtering equipment will be installed on the main switchboard. The
contractor will allow for carrying out a survey once the building has been operation for 6
months. The contractor will also allow for installing the required filtration when required
following the survey.
310 ACTIVE FILTERS GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: Switchgear manufacturer standard.
• Rating per filter: 90 A per phase and 270 A neutral.
• Nominal voltage and frequency: 400 V a.c., 50 Hz.
• Enclosure:
• Controls: Solid state microprocessor based.
- System control: Push button providing ON/OFF operation.
• Illuminated display requirements:
- Total current distortion (load and source).
- Total rms current (load and source).
- Harmonic current distortion per order, up to and including 13th order.
• System status indication: Individual coloured light emitting diodes (LED) for the following:
- Normal operation condition.
- Current limiting mode.
- Filter shut down or alarm condition.
• Operation:
- Harmonic analysis: Continuously monitoring 2nd-25th order.
- Response to harmonic currents: Inject same harmonic current back into supply 180°
out of phase.
- Rated current: Capable of mitigating harmonic current in the neutral conductor three
times greater than rated phase current.
- Total voltage harmonic distortion: Capable of reducing network voltage down to a
specified level of fundamental voltage.
- Reduction factor (minimum): 10 at full load current.
- Mains failure: Automatic restart.
- Overload condition: Maintain mitigation up to rated current without affecting reliability of
operation.
• User adjustable functions:
- Mitigation of individual, group, or full range of harmonics (2nd-25th order).
- Compensation of phase displacement (cos ø).
- Compensation of true power factor.
• Current transformers: Cast resin split type.
- Sets required: 3 per set of close coupled active filters.
320 PASSIVE FILTERS GENERALLY

• Reactive power rating: 400 kV·A(r).
• Enclosure:
• Operation:
- Harmonic current to be compensated: 5th.

330 HYBRID FILTERS GENERALLY

• Reactive power rating: 300 kV·A(r).
• Active filter rating: 120 A per phase and 360 A neutral.
• Enclosure:
- Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP41
• Operation:
- Harmonic current to be compensated: 5th.
EXECUTION
610A GENERAL INSTALLATION

• Standard: To current edition of BS 7671 including amendments and associated Guidance
notes.
620 SURVEY
• Objectives: To determine harmonic content and development within the operational
Electrical infrastructure.
• Scope of survey: Main and sub-main distribution switchgear, major rotating plant loads, IT
power distribution switchgear .
630 INSTALLING HARMONIC FILTERS

• Point of installation: Main switchboard.
• Mounting: Vertical, clear of local heat sources.
- Front access: Manufacturer's standard.
- Rear access: Manufacturer's standard.
- Top access: Manufacturer's standard.
- Bottom access: Manufacturer's standard.
- Side access: Manufacturer's standard.
• Gland plates: Form common slot to all holes to prevent eddy currents.
640 INSTALLING CLOSE COUPLED ACTIVE FILTERS

• Close coupled active filters: 3
- Cable size: Manufacturer's standard
• Control cables between close coupled active filters: Interconnect.
650 INSTALLING CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTS)

• Mounting: In direction of current flow as indicated on CT.
• Connection to filter:
- Cable type: Manufacturer's standard.
- Cable size: Minimum 0.75 mm².
• Connecting to filters: With cables provided by manufacturer. Where cables are of
insufficient length, extend with terminal block and equivalent cable.

COMPLETION
910A INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING GENERALLY

• Standard: To BS 7671 and amendments, and associated Guidance Notes.
• Commissioning of filters: By manufacturer.
• Filters, CTs, wiring, components, connections and equipment installation: Inspect.
• Operation of instruments and displays: Check and confirm correct operation including:
- Supply current (rms) L1, L2, L3 and neutral current.
- Load current (rms) L1, L2, L3 and neutral current.
- Supply THD % L1, L2, L3.
- Load THD % L1, L2, L3.
- Supply voltage.
- Load level % L1, L2, L3.
- Detailed load current spectrum display.
- Detailed supply current spectrum display.
- Reactive compensation.
- Selection of harmonic orders for mitigation.
- Number of parallel connected filters.
- Alarm functions.
- Communication port function.
- Identification function.
• Controls: Commission and adjust for optimum harmonic mitigation and reactive power
compensation.
• Inspection, testing and commissioning results: Submit.
- Number of copies: 3+ Electronic.

V39
Electrical inspection and testing

V39 Electrical inspection and testing
To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.
COMPLETION The particular testing and inspection requirements shall be fully addressed
in accordance with applicable statutory recommendations and guidance. Systems in this
respect shall include but not limited to
1) HV
2) LV
3) MEiGAN
910 ELECTRICAL INSPECTION AND TESTING TYPE

• Type: Initial verification.
915A ELECTRICAL TEST ENGINEER

• Electrical test engineer: Independent of installation contractor. Personnel must be qualified
to carry out inspection and testing on HV, LV and MEiGAN installations as required for this
project.
• Approval: NICEIC.
- Evidence of approval: Submit.
920 GENERAL
• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with IEE Guidance note 3.
• Notice before commencing tests (minimum): 7 d.
• Installed equipment standards: Verify and confirm compliance with the relevant equipment
standards.
• Electronic devices: Isolate to prevent damage during testing.
• Continuity of protective conductors:
- Parallel earth paths: Isolate before testing.
- Equipment: Continuity tester with short circuit current of at least 200 mA, and a no load
d.c. or a.c. voltage between 4 V and 24 V.
• Insulation resistance (minimum):
- SELV and PELV circuits: 1 megohm.
- Other circuits less than or equal to 500 V: 2 megohm.
- Circuits less than or equal to 500 V: 2 megohm.
• External earth fault loop impedance: Direct measurement.
• Connection of test equipment to existing switchgear: Submit proposals.
- Timing: 14 days notice on LV, 28 days notice on HV.
• Earth fault loop impedance:
- Method: Direct measurement.
• Measurement locations: Origin, switchgear, fixed equipment and outlets, circuit extremities.
• Prospective fault current:
- Location: Origin, and at points where protective devices are required to operate under
fault conditions.
• Phase sequence: Verify.
• Cable containment: Measure electrical continuity and insulating properties of containment.
Submit results.

920A GENERAL
• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with IEE Guidance note 3. Engineering
Recommendations, MEiGAN
• Notice before commencing tests (minimum): 7 d.
• Installed equipment standards: Verify and confirm compliance with the relevant equipment
standards.
• Electronic devices: Isolate to prevent damage during testing.
- Equipment: Continuity tester with short circuit current of at least 200 mA, and a no load
d.c. or a.c. voltage between 4 V and 24 V.
• Insulation resistance (minimum):
- SELV and PELV circuits: 1 megohm.
- Other circuits less than or equal to 500 V: 2 megohm.
- Circuits less than or equal to 500 V: 2 megohm.
• Connection of test equipment to existing switchgear: Submit proposals.
- Timing: 14 days notice on LV, 28 days notice on HV.
• Measurement locations: Origin, switchgear, fixed equipment and outlets, circuit extremities.
• Prospective fault current:
- Location: Origin, and at points where protective devices are required to operate under
fault conditions.
• Phase sequence: Verify.
• Cable containment: Measure electrical continuity and insulating properties of containment.
Submit results.
940 TEST EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION

• Test equipment calibration: UKAS approved.
950A INSPECTION AND TEST RESULTS

• Standard: To BS 7671 MEiGAN, Engineering Recommendations.
• Certificates: Submit.
- Number of copies: 3+ electronic.
• Test equipment identity: Record on test certificates.
• Certificates of calibration: Submit for each test instrument.
960 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATES

• Format: To NICEIC standard.
• Schedule of test results: Submit.

V40
Small power systems

V40 Small power systems
To be read with section Preliminaries/ General conditions.
GENERAL The requirements for this project include but not limited to compliance with BS
7671 , associated Guidance notes and in certain defined areas MEIGAN. The physical
arrangements and provisions of the electrical infrastructure in such defined areas shall
primarily be fully in accordance with MEIGAN stipulations. The installations in this regard
shall have the necessary earthing installations inclusive of increased earth conductor sizes.
The Cath labs installation shall require termination of the main equipment supplies at the
associated UPS. Electrical services earthing provisions shall terminate at the ERB within
the UPS plant room Contractor shall ensure positioning of the Distribution switchgear
which serves the Cath labs areas shall be suitably positioned with respect to the ERB, and
testing and certification regimes of the electrical services to the space.
110 HARD WIRED LOW VOLTAGE SMALL POWER SYSTEM

• Origin of supply: Low voltage distribution system, as section V30.
• Final circuit cabling:
- Types:
- LSZH singles, as section V32;
- LSZH/ LSZH with CPC, as section V32; and
- Multi-core XLPE/ SWA/ LSZH, as section V32.
- Sizes: As Circuits schedule.
• Containment:
- Cable basket, as section Y63;
- Cable ladder, as section Y63;
- Cable tray, as section Y63;
• Concealed installation: Required.
• Final connections: Required.
• Partial installation: Not required.
• Outlets: As small power drawings.
• Controls and starters: As section V34.
• Accessories: Transient over-voltage surge suppression devices for mains power supplies,
as section Y67.
• Completion:
- Electrical identification: As section V80.
- Testing and inspection: To BS 7671 and Section V39.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Provision of small power: Fixed and portable equipment requiring power.
• Design: Complete the design of the small power systems.
• Diversity: In accordance with IEE Guidance note 1 .
literature.

220 HAND DRIERS

• Quantity: Refer to layouts including Architects. include for provision and installation of
individual radial power circuit to serve individual hand-driers .
230 MULTI-GANG POWER OUTLETS

• Quantity: 1 per workstation in office areas.
PRODUCTS
310 HAND DRIERS

• Standard: To BS EN 60335-2-23.
• Manufacturer: refer to schedule of preferred manufacturers.
• Operation: Automatic.
• Heater rating: 2.0 kW.
• Noise level at 1 m (maximum): 65 dB(A).
• Features: Hand only.
• Enclosure: Stainless steel.
330 MULTI-GANG POWER OUTLETS

• Type: Switched including RCD & 1000mm lead .
• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of preferred Manufacturers and Suppliers.
• Rating: 13A.
• Outgoing ways:
- Type: Unswitched socket outlets.
- Fusing: Fused.
- Quantity: 4.
• Features: Indicator lamp.
EXECUTION
610A SMALL POWER INSTALLATION

• Standard: To BS 7671 Associated Amendments and Guidance Notes. HTM-06 and to
MEiGAN in specific Defined Areas.
630A INSTALLING CABLING TO SOCKET OUTLETS

• General: Wire in ring final circuits or radial circuits without spurs.
640 INSTALLING FINAL CONNECTIONS

• Equipment requiring final connections: Include for coordination of provision and installation
of final connections to specialists requirements. Include for provision and installation of
final connection to all items of plant and equipment. .
• Length of final connection: Sufficient to allow for equipment cleaning, maintenance and
removal.

650 PARTIAL INSTALLATION

• Equipment to be installed only: Provide and install all installation of equipment. Provide
local power supplies to meet load demand. Ensure location of power supplies are in
accessible locations and adjacent final termination point. Ensure position shall not inhibit
access to devices for the purposes of installation of final connection by others.
• Equipment requiring power supplies and final connection only: Provide local power
supplies to meet load demand. Ensure location of power supplies are in accessible
locations and adjacent final termination point. Ensure position shall not inhibit access to
devices for the purposes of installation of final connection by others.
• Provide containment for the following: Primary and/or secondary containment as required
and defined elsewhere for distribution of power, communications control and signalling
cabling systems to specialist systems installations, inclusive of but not limited to:
- IT
- BMS
- Fire Alarm
- Nurse Call,
- Assistance Call
- Security
- Access Control
- Lifts
- Mechanical Services .
- Draw cords: Required.
- Proposals: Submit.
660 INSTALLING HAND DRIERS

• Setting out: Refer to Architects Layouts.
• Fused connection units:
- Type: Switched.
- Engraving: Engrave with 'HAND DRIER'.
- Location: Immediately below ceiling.
• Final connection: Concealed.
- Containment: 25 mm HG galvanized conduit.
COMPLETION
920 DOCUMENTATION
930 MAINTENANCE

V44
Uninterruptible power supplies

V44 Uninterruptible power supplies
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Provide full and complete systems. Ensure inclusion and provision of all necessary
interconnection cabling between all items of plant equipment and components.
310 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) EQUIPMENTUPS systems will be provided

in separate distinct modes of operation which include;
• Static Online UPS for data systems / IT protection within the Server Room
Static Online UPS for Cath Lab main plant protection (Provided and installed as part of
Cath labs installation. Electrical contractor to provide and install power supplies terminating
at Cath lab UPS system.
• IPS / UPS combined supply's to medical equipment
• Cabinet mounted UPS systems to Krone Frames installed to Hub Rooms
Standard: To BS EN 62040-3.
• Type: On-line Double Conversion.
• Manufacturer: Rellio .
• Configuration: Parallel redundant (n+n) with switchgear bypass.
- External input and output isolators for each unit: Required.
• Service conditions: Manufacturer's standard.
• Input power supply: As section V12.
• Maintenance bypass: Internal fully interlocked and external fully interlocked
• Galvanic separation between input and output: Required.
• Rated output apparent power: 200 kV·A.
• Overload capability: 150% for 1 minutes.
• Voltage: Three phase and neutral 400 V a.c. ±2% .
- Voltage waveform: Sinusoidal.
Total harmonic distortion: Less than 5%.
Even harmonic distortion: Less than 1%.
• Frequency: 50 Hz ±2%.
• Output power factor: 0.9 lag to 0.9 lead.
• Batteries: Required.
- Arrangement: Cladded racks or cubicles.
- Recharge time:
To 80% capacity: 120 minutes .
To 100% capacity: 48 hours
- Battery monitors: Required.
• Generated harmonic distortion at point of incoming supply: In accordance with ENA
Engineering Recommendation G5/4-1.
- Evidence of compliance: Submit evidence for 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% load.
• Controls, indicators and alarms: Manufacturer's standard.
• Enclosure: IP21 to Manufacturer's standard.
• Factory tests: Required. Tests to be detailed in offer, allow for 3 Witnesses from Design
Team.

310A UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY FOR UPS/IPS EQUIPMENT

UPS/IPS systems will be provided to medical equipment. Each data rack will be provided with
a UPS with sufficient capacity for all live equipment for a duration of 15 minutes.
The UPS for UPS/IPS systems shall be configured in an N+1 arrangement whereby
particular loads defined elsewhere will be supported by a single UPS for a duration of 60
minutes without failure of the UPS system.
• Manufacturer: Bender.
• Configuration: Parallel redundant (n+1) with bypass.
- External input and output isolators for each unit: Required - in Switchgear.
• Service conditions: Site specific.
• Input power supply: As section V12.
• Maintenance bypass: External fully interlocked
• UPS to be 'transformerless' product Required.
• Rated output apparent power: Various - Refer to layouts and schematics.
• Overload capability: 110% for 10 minutes and 133% for 1 minutes.
• Voltage: Three phase and neutral 400 V a.c. ±2% .
- Voltage waveform: Sinusoidal.
Total harmonic distortion: Less than 5%.
Even harmonic distortion: Less than 1%.
• Frequency: 50 Hz ±2%.
• Output power factor: 0.95.
- Arrangement: Within UPS equipment enclosure.
- Recharge time:
To 80% capacity: 120 minutes.
To 100% capacity: 48 hours
- Battery monitors: Required.
• Generated harmonic distortion at point of incoming supply: In accordance with ENA
Engineering Recommendation G5/4-1.
- Evidence of compliance: Submit evidence for 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% load.
• Controls, indicators and alarms: Manufacturer to fully detail in offer.
• Enclosure: IP21.
• Factory tests: Required. Tests to be detailed in offer, allow for 3 Witnesses from Design
Team.

310B UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY FOR CATH LAB EQUIPMENTN+1 UPS systems
will be provided in separate distinct modes of operation which include;
• Static Online UPS for data systems / IT protection within the Server Room
Static Online UPS for Cath Lab main plant protection (Provided and installed as part of
Cath labs installation. Electrical contractor to provide and install power supplies terminating
at Cath lab UPS system.
• IPS / UPS combined supply's to medical and theatre equipment
• Cabinet mounted UPS systems to Krone Frames installed to Hub Rooms
UPS systems for Cath lab protection
This system shall be provided and installed as part of the Cath labs equipment specialists
works. The electrical contractor shall arrange the non Cath equipment electrical services
arrangements to suit the Cath lab UPS/MEiGAN infrastructure requirements (including
Testing and inspection).
• Manufacturer: Supplied as part of Cath Labs Installation. Electrical Contractor shall liaise
fully with systems specialist to ensure all necessary attendant electrical services provisions
are include to, from and about this system .
320 SITE SPECIFIC SERVICE CONDITIONS

• Altitude: Less than 1000 m above sea level
• Ambient service temperature for UPS equipment:
- Minimum: 19°C.
Maximum: 21°C.
• Ambient relative humidity for UPS controls: 20%-80%
• Ambient relative humidity for batteries: 20%-80%
• Environmental conditions: To maximise battery life battery room to be controlled to 20°C
340 MANUFACTURER'S INFORMATION

• General arrangement drawings: Submit fully dimensioned and detailed general
arrangement drawings including:
- Weight of each UPS unit.
- Total weight of complete UPS assembly (with batteries if integrated).
- Weight of separate battery (including enclosure or racks).
- Rating and connection plate details.
- Enclosure base details.
- Arrangement and connection drawings for ancillary equipment.
• Batteries:
- Submit design life details.
- Submit service life details.
• Type test certificates: Submit details including:
- Temperature rise.
- Sound level in normal mode.
- Sound level in battery mode.
- Rated input current.
- Maximum continuous input current (curve of current against time).
- Inrush current expressed as a percentage of normal rated current.
- Harmonics: Full details of input current harmonic distortion at 25%, 50%, 75% and
100% load.
- Overall efficiency: Submit details at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% load.
• Mean time between failures: Submit details.

350 BATTERIES
• Type: Lead-acid valve regulated (VRLA) to BS 6290-4, BS EN 60896-21 and BS EN 61056
-1
• Voltage: Submit proposals
• Battery autonomy (stored energy time at rated power): Various autonomies applicable (all
at full power) to specific systems/applications as detailed elsewhere.
• Fused parallel battery strings: Multiple strings. Must have fused transition box..
- Automatic disconnection of a faulty string: Fusing Required
• Impact resistant plastic shields to intercell terminal and output terminals: Required.
• Battery supply d.c. circuit breaker with overload and short circuit protection: Required.
• Ripple free battery charger with automatic temperature and float voltage compensation:
Required.
• Battery recharge time: Submit proposals
360 BATTERY MONITORS

• Type: Microprocessor based.
• Manufacturer: Detail to be provided in offer.
• Features:
- Automatic battery discharge test at adjustable time intervals;
- Battery voltage;
- Detection of faulty battery;
- Detection of excessive temperature;
- Estimated remaining battery service life; and
- Standby time remaining
- Deep Discharge
365 BATTERY SHELVING RACKS

• Type: Free standing.
• Manufacturer: System Manufacturer.

370 CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND ALARMS

• Indicator type: LCD display.
• Controls:
- Automatic/ manual;
- Display select button; and
- On/ off/ bypass.
• Display:
- Readings:
- Battery voltage;
- Input voltage;
- Output voltage;
- Input frequency;
- Output frequency;
- Input current;
- Output current;
- Output load kW; and
- Output power factor.
- Status indicators:
- Battery operation;
- End of autonomy;
- Load on bypass;
- Mains healthy;
- Mains failed;
- Normal operation; and
- Time of load on battery autonomy.
- Faults: Supply voltage and frequency faults.
- Alarms: Local audible and visual and via common interface to BMS.
• Local audible alarm systems: Minimum 65 dBA sounder with xenon flashing beacon and
With rechargeable battery back-up power supply
390 FACTORY TESTS

• Notice before tests: 21 days.
• Tests: In accordance with BS EN 62040-3.
- Routine tests: Undertake.
- Type test documentation: Submit.
- Special tests:
- Balanced load test;
- Efficiency test;
- Harmonic components test;
- Input voltage and frequency test; and
- Inrush current test
colleagues.
• Test report: Submit.
EXECUTION

• Transportation, off-load and installation: Submit method statement.
- Weight limit: None.
• Assembly: Replace fittings removed for transport.
• UPS units: Interconnect.
• UPS controls and batteries: Interconnect.

620A INSTALLING BATTERIES

• Location: UPS plantroom(s) adjacent UPS.
• Batteries:
- Interconnect individual cells.
• Battery circuit breaker: Interconnect with UPS units and batteries.
- Arrangement: Refer Layouts& Schematics and to Manufacturers guidance.
630 INSTALLING EXTERNAL MAINTENANCE BYPASS

• Location: Adjacent to the UPS Unit in question.
• Interconnection: Interconnect with UPS, mains supply and load.
- Arrangement: Refer to Layouts and Manufacturer.
640 INSTALLING CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND ALARMS

• Location: Mounted on the output/bypass enclosure.
• Interface: With central controls and building management system, as section Y40
COMPLETION
910 CLEANING AND GENERAL INSPECTION

• Dust and debris: Remove.
• Enclosures: Inspect.
• Earthing: Verify.
• Cable terminations: Inspect.
• Inspection report: Submit.
915 LABELLING
• Identification label: All UPS systems to be labelled with distribution system name, where
incoming cables are fed from and details of switching and bypass arrangements .


• Phase rotation: Verify.
• Emergency and safety circuits: Check.
• Correct operation of alarms and controls: Confirm.
• Insulation resistance tests: Test interconnecting cables and Test forced cooling fan motors.
• Tests: In accordance with BS EN 62040-3.
- Operational tests:
- a.c. input failure test;
- a.c. input return test;
- Acoustic noise test;
- Battery ripple current measurement;
- Current division test;
- Earth fault test;
- Overload capability test;
- Rated restored energy time;
- Rated stored energy time test;
- Restart test;
- Short circuit test;
- Short circuit protection device test;
- Simulation of parallel redundant UPS fault test;
- Synchronisation test;
- Transfer test;
- UPS efficiency test;
- UPS auxiliary devices test; and
- Ventilation test.
- Output tests:
- Harmonic components measurement;
- Frequency variation test;
- Output over voltage test;
- Output frequency slew rate test;
- Periodic output voltage variation test; and
- Radiofrequency interference and conducted noise test.
- Load tests:
- Unbalanced load test;
- Balanced load test; and
- Full load test.
- Standby generator compatibility tests: Required
940 DOCUMENTATION
950 MAINTENANCE
- Consumables: Provide.

V50
General lighting systems

V50 General lighting systems
To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.
GENERAL
110 HARD WIRED GENERAL LIGHTING SYSTEM

- Types: LSZH singles, as section V32 from distribution boards to lighting control
modules and LSZH/ LSZH with CPC, as section V32 from lighting control modules to
light fittings.
• Containment: Rigid conduit, as section Y60 or Trunking or ducting, as section Y60.
• Partial installation: Not required.
• Connections to luminaires: Lighting circuit distribution boxes.
• Luminaires and lamps:
- Luminaire types: As section V59.
- Luminaire accessories: Power factor correction, as section V59.
- Operating voltage: Low voltage.
- Lamp types: As Luminaire schedule.
• Control gear: High frequency,dimmable as section V59, LED dimmable drivers where
required.
• Lighting controls:
- Light switches, as section Y65;
- Dimmer switches and controls, as section Y65;
- Separate photoelectric controls, as section V51;
- Separate daylight sensing, as section V51;
- Separate mains voltage occupancy detection, as section V51; or
- Separate combined daylight and occupancy detection, as section V51.
• Completion:
- Electrical identification: As section V80 to BS 7671.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Standard: In accordance with CIBSE Code for lighting LG2.
• Design: Complete the design of the general lighting systems.
• Average power density energy consumption (maximum): 8 W/m².
• Initial circuit luminous efficacy (minimum): 60 lm/W.
literature.
220 PERFORMANCE
• Lighting performance: Lighting to be RA90 with 4000 Kelvin Lamps.
230 MAINTENANCE FACTOR CALCULATIONS

• Proposals for luminaire maintenance: Submit.
• Proposals for lamp replacement: Submit with calculations and manufacturers' literature.
• Maintenance factors: Submit.

240 LUMINAIRE AND LAMP MAINTENANCE PROPERTIES

• Lamp replacement method: Spot replacement.
• Lamp lumen maintenance factor: Submit proposals.
• Lamp survival factor: Submit proposals.
• Luminaire maintenance class: Submit proposals.
• Luminaire cleaning interval: 0.5 y.
• Luminaire maintenance factor: Submit proposals.
• Room surface cleaning interval: 1 y.
• Room surface maintenance factor: Submit proposals.
250 LIGHTING CALCULATIONS

• Type: Computer generated point calculations with contribution from inter-reflected light.
• Submit the following:
- Luminaire layout drawings.
- Luminaire photometric data including flux fraction ratios, polar intensity curves and
utilisation factors.
- Lamp technical information.
- Room surface reflectance values.
- Maintenance factor calculations.
- Isolux contour plots for working plane and room surfaces.
- Schedule of design and calculated maintained average illuminance values.
- Schedule of wall-working plane illuminance ratios.
- Schedule of ceiling-working plane illuminance ratios.
- Schedule of design and calculated uniformity values.
- Schedule of design and calculated glare index values.
- Power density and efficacy of the installation.
250A LIGHTING CALCULATIONS Provide lighting calculations based on luminaires proposed

for installation prior to placement of orders
• Submit the following:
- Room surface reflectance values.
- Isolux contour plots for working plane and room surfaces.
- Schedule of wall-working plane illuminance ratios.
- Schedule of ceiling-working plane illuminance ratios.
- Schedule of design and calculated glare index values.
PRODUCTS
310 CEILING ROSES

• Rating: 6 A.
• Mounting type: Semi-recessed.
• Flex length (maximum): 2 m.
• Colour: White.

320 LIGHTING CIRCUIT DISTRIBUTION BOXES.

• Distribution box: Galvanized sheet steel with recessed input and outgoing connections.
• Connectors:
- Power input connection: Via prefabricated wiring and plug-in connectors .
- Power output connector: Fully shrouded female connector.
• Outgoing connections:
- Quantity: 8.
- Poles: 4.
330 LUMINAIRE SUPPORTING COUPLERS.

• Rating: 6 A.
• General luminaires: White plug with white cover.
• Emergency luminaires: Red plug with red cover.
• Plug type: Rewireable, independent.
- Pin configuration: 4 pin.
• Cable type: HR PVC/ PVC cord, as section V32.
- Cable size: 0.75 mm².
340 PRE FABRICATED LSZH INSULATED AND SHEATHED MULTI-CORE

• Approval: British Approvals Service for Cables (BASEC) certified.
• Thermosetting insulated, twin, 3-core, 4-core and 5-core circular sheathed cables:
345 LIGHTING EXTENDER LEADS All cables to be fully supported throughout length in
accordance with BS7671 and associated Guidance notes. No cables to be loose laid in
ceiling void. Ensure sufficient length and additional extender leads as necessary to clip and
dress cabling to soffit slab following neat horizontal building lines between lighting
distribution modules and between luminaires. Where extender leads serve light fittings they
are to be clipped to point on slab directly above light fitting..
• Cable type: Prefabricated LSZH insulated singles in flexible conduit.
- Number of cores: 5.
- Size: 2.5 mm².
• Length: 10 m.
• Connectors:
- Arrangement: One fully shrouded male connector and one fully shrouded female
connector.
- Poles: 6.

350 LUMINAIRE CONNECTION CABLES Ensure that the final connection cable is not more
than depth of ceiling void +300mm at any location. Review ceiling void depth accordingly
and ensure details issued to luminaire suppliers for integration.
• Cable type: Prefabricated LSZH insulated and sheathed multi-core.
- Number of cores: 3 and 4.
- Size: refer to distribution board schedule
• Length: Not more than depth of ceiling void +300mm at any location.
• Connectors:
connector and One fully shrouded male connector and one free cable end.
- Poles: 6.
355 MASTER DISTRIBUTION BOXES.

• Distribution box: Galvanized sheet steel with recessed input and outgoing connections.
• Rating: 16 A.
• Connectors:
- Power input connection: Hard wired via home run cable.
- Power output connector type: Fully shrouded female connector.
• Outgoing connections:
- Quantity: 9.
- Poles: 6.
360 SWITCH CONNECTION LEADS.

- Size: refer to the distribution board schedules
• Length: 10 m.
• Connectors:
- Arrangement: One fully shrouded male connector and one free end.
- Poles: 4.
365 STARTER LEADS .

- Size: refer to distribution board schedules
• Length: 20 m.
• Connectors:
connector and One fully shrouded male connector and one free cable end.
- Poles: 6.

370 SWITCH MODULES .

• Type:
- One way switch 'T';
- Two way switch 'T';
- Two way intermediate switch 'T'; and
- Key switch 'T'.
- Size: refer to distribution board schedules
• Rating: 16 A.
• Length: 10 m.
• Connectors:
connector.
- Poles: 6.
375 T CONNECTORS .
• Type: Fixed to luminaire and Flying lead.
- Size: 2.5 mm².
• Length: Where used as fixing to luminaire ensure that the final connection cable is not
more than depth of ceiling void +300mm at any location. Review ceiling void depth
accordingly and ensure details issued to luminaire suppliers for integration. Where used as
flying lead principle as per lighting extender lead (clause 345 of this specification section.
• Connectors:
- 'T'arrangement: One fully shrouded male connector and one fully shrouded female
connector.
- Connection to luminaire: Fully shrouded male connector.
380 RJ45 CABLES

• Manufacturer: Lighting Controls manufacturer.
• Length: 3 m.
EXECUTION
610 INSTALLING GENERAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS

630 MODIFYING EXISTING LIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Existing luminaires: Clean.
• Existing lamps: Replace.
640A LIGHTING CIRCUITS

• Rooms smaller than 25 m²: Restrict lighting circuits to one electrical phase.

650 MANUAL CONTROLS

• Location: Plant rooms.
• Staircases: Two way switching at top and bottom landings with intermediate at full
landings.
660A INSTALLING PREFABRICATED WIRING

• Connection arrangement: Form circuits using a male connector working away from any
master distribution boxes.
• Fixing master/ lighting distribution boxes: Suspended from drop rods.
• Fixing cabling:
- Maximum distance between clips:
Prefabricated LSZH insulated singles in flexible conduit: In accordance with BS7671 and
associated guidance notes.
Prefabricated LSZH insulated and sheathed multi-core: In accordance with BS7671 and
associated guidance notes.
- Clip within 100 mm of each connector.
- Bends: Not permitted within 150 mm of connectors.
COMPLETION
905 TESTING AND INSPECTION OF FIXED ELECTRICAL WIRING

• Testing and inspection: To BS 7671 and associated Guidance Notes.
• Test results: Submit.
- Number of copies: 3.
910 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF GENERAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Commissioning: In accordance with CIBSE Commissioning code L
• Controls: Check operation.
• Lamps: Check operation.
• Test results: Submit.
920A PHOTOMETRIC SURVEY On completion of installation to areas with finished surfaces

• Standard: In accordance with CIBSE Code for lighting.
• Locations: Typical ward and room at level 3.
• Daylight control: Full blackout.
• Average illuminance measurement method: Submit proposals.
• Illuminance variation measurements:
- Diversity.
- Uniformity.
• Measured values: Submit.
• Maintained average illuminance: Submit based upon measured values.
• Illuminance variation:
- Diversity: Submit based upon measured values.
- Uniformity: Submit based upon measured values.
• Survey photographs: Submit for each location.
930 DOCUMENTATION
940 MAINTENANCE
- Duration: Until 12 months after completion.

V51
Automatic lighting controls

V51 Automatic lighting controls
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
310 AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROLS GENERALLY

• Proposed service conditions: Normal indoor healthcare environment. Inclusive of but not
limited to
- Storage
- Plantrooms,
- Switchrooms,
- Comms/Telecomms Rooms
- UPS Plantrooms
- Generator plantroom
- Generator Oil Tank Room
- Ancillary Use Accommodation
- Public access areas,
- Day Surgery operating suites
- Recovery wards
- Patient prep areas
- CIU areas
- Angiography,
- Endoscopy,
- Pharmacy,
- Aseptic Suite
- Cath Labs.
- Non clinical areas
- Reception areas
- Staff bases
- Meeting Rooms
- Office Accommodation
- Training rooms
- Café/Retail area
- Bedrooms incorporating En-suites
- Patient support rooms
- Specialised Patient support facilities, (Levels 3 & 5)
- Utility areas
- Hub-Kitchen areas
.

330 TIME SWITCHES

• Standards: To BS EN 60730-1 and BS EN 60730-2-7.
- Approval: British Electrotechnical Approvals Board (BEAB).
• Type: Electronic digital.
• Manufacturer: Lighting Controls System Specialist.
• Display: Liquid crystal display (LCD).
• Programme capability: 48 on and 48 off operations per day.
• Number of switching channels: 4
• Inductive switching capacity: 20 A
• Cable termination capacity: 2.5 mm².
• Override facility: Remote
• GMT/BST daylight saving: Automatic.
• Enclosure: Required
- Minimum degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP44
- Material and construction: Manufacturers' standard.
• Battery backup: 100 h.
340 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL UNITS GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: Lighting Controls System Specialist.
• Inductive switching capacity: 25 A.
• Minimum degree of ingress protection to BS 60529: IP67.
• Switching settings:
- - Adjustable switching time delay: Required
- On lighting level: Adjustable.
- Off lighting level: Adjustable.
- Timed on: Programmable 7 day 24 h clock.
- Timed off: Programmable 7 day 24 h clock.
• Remote setup/ override: By infrared controller
• Mounting:
- Ceiling ;
- Column top;
- Flush ;
- Indoor;
- Outdoor;
- Surface; and
- Wall .
350 DAYLIGHT SENSORS GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: Lighting Controls System Specialist
• Daylight sensitivity: Adjustable
• Remote setup/ override: By infrared controller.
• Mounting: Ceiling and Flush

360 EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY SENSORS GENERALLY.

• Type: Passive infrared
• Occupancy sensitivity: Adjustable.
• Remote setup/ override: By infrared controller.
• Mounting:
- Ceiling;
- Flush;
- Surface; and
- Wall
380 COMBINED DAYLIGHT AND OCCUPANCY SENSORS Combined sensors may be

utilised where appropriate to staff and patient movements.
• Manufacturer: As per specification schedules
- Product reference: As per specification schedules
• Daylight sensitivity: Adjustable
• Occupancy sensitivity: Adjustable.
• Remote setup/override: By infrared controller.
• Mounting: Ceiling and Flush
390 REMOTE INFRARED CONTROLLERS

• Quantity: 4.
410 CENTRAL CONTROLLERS

• Type: Microprocessor controlled.
• Control protocol: Digital serial interface (DSI)
• Inputs:
- Combined daylight and occupancy sensors;
- Daylight sensors;
- Extra-low voltage occupancy sensors;
- Photoelectric control units ;
- Remote infrared controllers; and
- Laptop computers
• Outputs: Manufacturer's standard
• Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard.
- Minimum degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP55
- Material and construction: Manufacturer's standard.
- Finish: Manufacturer's standard
• Mounting: Wall
EXECUTION

• Installation: Submit method statement.
• Interconnection: Interconnect sensors, controllers and luminaires with manufacturers'
recommended cable types.
630 INSTALLING PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL UNITS

• Location: Not influenced by luminaires.
640 INSTALLING DAYLIGHT SENSORS

• Location: Representative of the daylight level in the area under control.

650 INSTALLING OCCUPANCY SENSORS

• Location: To suit the occupancy pattern of the area under control. Shield from erroneous
influences.
660 INSTALLING CENTRAL CONTROLLERS

• Location: As indicated on layouts.
COMPLETION
910 CLEANING AND CABLE INSPECTIONS

• Detector lenses: Clean using anti-static cleaning fluid.
• Cable connections: Verify.
915 LABELLING
• Equipment and sensor identification labels: Provide.
• Central controller: Label describing its purpose.
- Output circuits: Label.

• Commissioning: In accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code L.
• Notice before commissioning (minimum): 21 d .
• Witnessing: Arrange for site testing to be witnessed by the contract administrator.
• Pre-commissioning checks: Undertake.
• Pre-commissioning certificate: Submit.
• Sensor settings: Submit proposals. Calibrate and commission.
• Operation of sensors and control devices: Check and verify. Submit results.
• System commissioning certificate: Submit.

• Manufacturer's recommended spares: Supply two sets

V56
Central battery emergency lighting and signage systems

V56 Central battery emergency lighting and signage systems
To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions
GENERAL
110 CENTRAL BATTERY EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND SIGNAGE SYSTEM A full complete
fully operational certified system will be provided and installed. The emergency lighting
systems will be a distributed central system whereby control and battery enclosures will
be installed throughout the building and not at one central location.
Each individual emergency lighting cabinet shall be capable of supplying energy to

illuminate 80-120 dedicated emergency light fittings for a duration of not less than three
hours. All luminaires shall be individually monitored for condition and the entire system
shall be capable of self-testing and reporting via a graphical user interface.
The system will be addressable type with DALI control and distribution system to serve
system power, control and monitoring requirements
• System manufacturer: Zumtobel Onlite Central LPS or Whitecroft Pathfinder.

• Central battery charger unit: Required.
• Battery storage: Central battery enclosure.
- Ambient temperature of store: 20°C.
- Cable type: Fire resistant screened cables, as section V32.
• Containment:
- Rigid conduit, as section Y60; or
• Emergency luminaires: Dedicated emergency luminaires to all Ward and Public areas.
Combined emergency luminaires may be offered within Plant areas..
• Escape route lighting: Required and Electrical low mounted way-guidance lighting for
courtyards / Roof Terraces.
• Open area anti-panic lighting: Not required.
• High risk task area lighting: Required.
• Standby lighting: Required.
• Emergency signs: As depicted in drawings.
• Test facility: Automatic test facility.
• Accessories: Mounting framework.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Standards: To BS EN 1838, BS EN 50171, BS EN 50172 and in accordance with BS 5266-
1.
• Design: Complete the design of the emergency lighting and signage systems.
literature.
• Mode of operation: 0,1, 6.
- Facilities: B, C, D .
- Full load duration under rated load conditions (minimum): 180 minutes.
230 ESCAPE ROUTE LIGHTING DESIGN

• Location: All levels. Refer to layouts.
• Response following failure of normal lighting supply: 50% illuminance within 5 s and 100%
illuminance within 60 s.
• Horizontal illuminance (minimum) of permanently unobstructed escape routes: 1 lx.
• Working plane: At finished floor level.
237 HIGH RISK TASK AREA LIGHTING DESIGN

• Location: Level 2 Day surgery, Angiography, Cath labs recovery wards operating suites
and recovery wards.
• Response following failure of normal lighting supply: 100% illuminance within 0.5 s.
• Maintained illuminance on reference plane (minimum): 10% of maintained illuminance
required for high risk task, or 15 lx, whichever is greater.
• Working plane: At finished floor level.
270 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CALCULATIONS

• Type: Point calculations with zero contribution from inter-reflected light.
• Submit the following information:
- Luminaire photometric data including lamp light output data at beginning and end of
battery discharge.
- Luminaire spacing tables.
- Lamp and luminaire technical information.
- Isolux contour plots.
PRODUCTS
310 PRODUCTS GENERALLY

• Standards: To BS EN 1838, BS EN 50171, BS EN 50172 and in accordance with BS 5266-
1.

315 CENTRAL BATTERY CHARGER UNITS

• Manufacturer: Zumtobel or Whitecroft.
- Product reference: Onite LPS or Pathfinder.
• Capacity:
- Normal supply load (minimum): To serve full charge requirements of particular
distributed cabinet load served .
- Emergency supply load (minimum): To serve full charge requirements of particular
distributed cabinet load served.
• Output:
- Type: d.c.
- Nominal voltage: 110 V.
• Display panel: Required.
- Type: LCD.
- Monitoring each of the following:
- Battery voltage;
- Battery/ charger/ discharge current;
- Load current (in mode without interruption operation); and
- Output current of the charger (in mode without interruption operation).
- Mains supply healthy;
- Mains supply fail;
- Charger fail;
- Inverter running;
- Inverter overload;
- Float charge;
- Boost charge;
- Low battery voltage;
- High battery voltage;
- d.c. earth fault; and
- Deep discharge protection initiated.
• Common fault relay contact: Volt free
• Identification at cable terminations: Label with circuit reference, on push-on plastics
markers.
• Accessories: Phase failure monitors to all individual lighting circuits with zoning to be
carried out by Manufacturer.
320 BATTERIES
• Type: Sealed nickel-cadmium prismatic cells.
• Labelling: Indelibly mark with year of manufacture and installation.
325 CENTRAL BATTERY ENCLOSURES GENERALLY.

• Material: Match low voltage switchgear.
• Finish: Match low voltage switchgear.
- Colour: Match low voltage switchgear.
• Degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP44.
• Ventilation: Natural.
• Integral distribution board: Required.

330 EMERGENCY LUMINAIRES GENERALLY

- Approval: In accordance with ICEL 1001.
• Housing: Locate components necessary for the operation of the luminaire (including relays,
conversion modules, lamp and control gear) within the luminaire body.
• Visual charge indicators:
- Type: Red light-emitting diodes.
- Purpose: To indicate the presence of the emergency supply at the luminaire.
- Position within luminaire: Readily visible. Fix to luminaire body.
340 COMBINED EMERGENCY LUMINAIRES

• Manufacturer: As Luminaire schedule -for plant areas only - if proposed by the Contractor.
Dedicated Emergency luminaires will also be accepted in Plant areas..
- Product reference: As Luminaire schedules.
350 DEDICATED EMERGENCY LUMINAIRES

• Manufacturer: As Luminaire schedule.
- Product reference: As Luminaire schedule.
360 GENERAL LUMINAIRES RE-ENGINEERED FOR EMERGENCY USE

• Standards: To BS 5225-1 or BS EN 13032-1 and -3.
• Conversion unit and re-engineering manufacturer: Submit proposals.
• Approval: ICEL 1004 registered.
• Photometric data: Submit for re-engineered luminaires.
380 ELECTRICAL LOW MOUNTED WAY-GUIDANCE LIGHTING

410 INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED EMERGENCY SIGNS

• Manufacturer: As Luminaire schedule.
- Product reference: As Luminaire schedule.
415 NON-ILLUMINATED EMERGENCY SIGNS

450 AUTOMATIC TEST FACILITY

• Type: Central control panel.
• Location: Next to the main fire alarm panel.
460 AUTOMATIC CHANGE-OVER CONTACTORS


480 EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE SUPPORTING COUPLERS

• Standards: To BS 6972 and BS 7001.
• Rating: 6 A.
• Colour: Red plug with red cover.
• Plug type: Rewireable, independent.
- Pin configuration: 4 pin.
485 INTEGRAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

• Outgoing circuits:
- Poles: Double.
- Quantity: 8.
- Protective devices: Miniature circuit breakers.
- Rating: Submit proposals.
- Spare ways: Fit with a selection of protective devices.
FABRICATION
510 BATTERY ROOM DOOR SIGNAGE

Warning notice: Provide sign stating "BATTERY ROOM. EXTINGUISH ALL NAKED
FLAMES BEFORE ENTERING. NO SMOKING".
520 MOUNTING FRAMEWORK

• Material: Metal channel to BS 6946.
• Finish: Hot dip galvanized.
EXECUTION
620 SAMPLES
• Samples to be submitted: all emergency lighting luminaires and signage to be submitted to
the Client via the Architect.
• Submittals: Include manufacturer's technical information with each sample.
• Identification: Label samples with the project luminaire references.

• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with BS 5266-1.
640 INSTALLING EMERGENCY SIGNS

• Fixing: Fix to building fabric such that the removal of the sign requires a special tool.
- Orientation: Plumb and level.
650 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL LOW MOUNTED WAY-GUIDANCE SYSTEMS

665 INSTALLING AUTOMATIC TEST FACILITIES

• Location: Within central battery enclosures with network connections to graphical user
package.

670 PERMANENT ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES TO EMERGENCY LUMINAIRES

• Source: Derive from central battery system.
COMPLETION
910 INSPECTION AND TESTING

• Inspection and testing: To BS EN 1838, BS EN 50171, BS 7671 and in accordance with
BS 5266-1 and BS EN 50172.
• Full discharge test: Required. Following restoration of the normal supply verify the
operation of charge indicators.
- Results: Submit.
920 EMERGENCY LIGHTING PHOTOMETRIC SURVEY

• Location: all internal areas plus roof terrace .
• Timing: During the hours of darkness.
• Extraneous light: Minimize.
• Measured values: Submit, stating levels of extraneous light.
940 SPARES
• Quantity of manual test keys (minimum): 10

960 DOCUMENTATION
• Documentation: In accordance with BS 5266-1.
• Certificate of testing: Submit.
- Certficate: In accordance with BS 5266-1, Annex B.
- Number of copies: 3+ electronic.
• System log book: Required.
970 MAINTENANCE
• Service and maintenance: In accordance with BS 5266-1.
- Duration: Undertake until 12 months after completion.

V59
Luminaires and lamps

V59 Luminaires and lamps
PRODUCTS Internal artificial lighting shall be provided by low energy lamp sources, in
particular light emitting diode (LED) light sources. All selected luminaires must be compliant
to the requirements of BREEAM 2008 Healthcare. For specific clauses relating to BREEAM
please refer to the requirements listed in Section B06
of this document.
Fluorescent lighting shall be provided by linear or circular 'T5' lamps. '2D' (TCDD) Lamps
will not be accepted on this project.
395 ENCLOSURES FOR CONTROLGEAR where non integral control gear is used internally
• Material: Submit proposals.
- Finish: Match luminaire.
- Colour: As Luminaire schedule.
• Degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP31.
• Hardware: Cylinder lock and handle. Standardize key type.
• Labelling: Describe controlgear purpose.
400 LUMINAIRES GENERALLY.

• Standards: To BS EN 60598-1.
• Approval: Kitemark certified.
• Photometric performance: To BS EN 13032-1.
• Supply circuit conductor connections: Screw terminals .
• Internal fuse: Required for incoming circuit phase connections.
402 CONTROL GEAR Unless otherwise stated control gear shall be integral to the luminaire.
• Position: Integral within luminaire.
405 LUMINAIRES .
• Manufacturer: As per approved list of manufacturers. The contractor may choose the
fitting listed as the design fitting for each luminaire, or offer one of the approved
alternatives as a replacement for the design fitting. The contractor does not have to buy all
the fittings for the project from a single manufacturer, but must utilise the approved
alternatives provided. The contractor can take a commercial decision as to which fittings
will be supplied from any particular manufacturer from the approved manufacturer and
fitting schedule.
It should be noted that the approved luminaire schedule has been carefully assessed for
the equality of light fittings and the quality of light output. If the contractor offers any other
alternatives the contractor must provide full details of comparative quality of materials
including diffuser technologies and lamps. The Contractor will also be expected to provide
comparative light output with fully detailed lighting plots in relux or dialux format as part of
the submission. No non-approved alternatives will be accepted without full documentation
proving the quality of light and materials and justification of what advantages other
alternatives can offer to the project.
The design team is not bound to accept any changes in specification or quality of light
output from the lighting installation and deviations from the approved schedule shall have
to be approved collectively in writing by the Engineer, The Architect and the Client before
implementation of any changes thereto. .
- Product reference: As per manufacturers and luminaires schedules..
• Description: As per schedules and drawings.

• Features: Low Energy Design, light output to be in compliance with CIBSE LG2 throughout
the Acute Services Block.
• Lamps:
- Number: As per schedules and drawings.
- Type to PD IEC TS 61231 to ILCOS L: FD.
- Colour temperature: 4000K.
- Colour rendering index: Ra 90 or above.
- Rating: As Luminaire schedule .
410 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

• Luminaires: Correct power factor to a minimum 0.9 lagging.

420 AIR HANDLING LUMINAIRES

• Standard: To BS 4533-102.19.
460 LUMINAIRE SMOKE HOODS

• Smoke hoods and blankets: Match fire performance of building fabric.
FABRICATION
510 CUSTOM-BUILT LUMINAIRES GENERALLY

• Design and fabrication: Complete the design and fabrication of custom-built luminaires.
• Prototypes: Submit.
• Photometric data: Submit.
- Standard: To BS 5225-1.
520 CUSTOM-BUILT LUMINAIRE.

• Circumstances of use to BS EN 60598-1: Submit proposals.
• Electric shock classification to BS EN 60598-1: Class I.
• Degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: Submit Proposals.
• Supporting surface classification to BS EN 60598-1: Suitable for mounting on normally
flammable surfaces.
• Luminaire light output ratio (minimum): 75%.
• Description: Submit Proposals.
• Features: Submit Proposals.
• Lamps:
- Number: Submit Proposals.
- Type to PD IEC TS 61231 to LICOS L: Submit proposals.
- Colour temperature: As Luminaire schedule .
- Colour rendering index: As Luminaire schedule .
- Rating: As Luminaire schedule .
530 PROPOSALS FOR CUSTOM-BUILT LUMINAIRES

• Content: Submit the following:
- Dimensioned general arrangement drawings, plans, elevations and sections.
- Materials and component details.
- Details of internal and external paint systems and colour finishes.
- Means of access to consumable parts.
- Routing of cabling within luminaire.
- Internal wiring diagrams and location of components.
EXECUTION
610 SAMPLES
• Samples: Before ordering, supply samples of the following luminaires: A sample of each
type of luminaire is to be provided to the Client via the Architect. All samples to be
provided for comment at least two calendar months before any orders for fittings are
placed with suppliers. Electrical Contractor is to allow appropriate timescales to achieve
client comments within the programme of works.
• Submittals: Include manufacturer's technical information with each sample.
• Identification: Label samples with the luminaire references.

620 INSTALLING LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS GENERALLY

• Location: As drawings. For setting out details refer to Architect's drawings. .
• Orientation: Parallel with ceiling.
• Lamps and accessories: Provide.
• Supports: Adequate for weight of luminaire.
630 LUMINAIRE CABLE CONNECTIONS

• Cable connection size (minimum): 1.0 mm² or 1.5mm² or refer to distribution board schedules.
• Conduit mounted: Terminate directly within luminaire.
• Trunking mounted: Terminate in a terminal block within a conduit box, with an HR PVC/
PVC cord final connection.
• Suspended trunking: From cable connection mounted on side of trunking.
- Type: Plug and socket outlet to BS 546.
• Rod or chain suspended: Luminaire supporting coupler.
- Cable type: HR PVC/ PVC cord, clipped to chain or rod. Do not pass cord through
chain links.
• Cable entry: Grommet.
• Class 1 earth connections: Connect to luminaire circuit protective conductor.
• Wiring within luminaires: Minimize. Clip at 300 mm intervals.
640 LUMINAIRES MOUNTED AS PART OF A SUSPENDED CEILING

• Luminaire supports: Independent suspension wires.
• Luminaire final connection: Plug and socket outlet to BS 546.
- Mounting: Surface mounted on side of trunking.
- Length (maximum): 3 m.
670 INSTALLING CONTROLGEAR

• Location: Adjacent to luminaire above finished ceiling when not integral.
• Fixing: Secure to building fabric.
680 INSTALLING SUSPENDED LAMP HOLDERS

• Flex length: Suspended pendant fittings may be used in staff break out areas to delineate
the spaces separately from working spaces. Pendant drop lengths shall be agreed with
the Architect prior to installation. .
690 INSTALLING LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS

• Support and fixing arrangement: Submit proposals
• Luminaire suspensions: Vertical.
- Multiple suspensions: Provide as necessary.
• Levelling: Adjust the length of suspensions so that luminaires are level.
- Levelling tolerance: ± 3 mm.
• Conduit supports:
- Size (minimum): 20 mm.
- Type: Match cable containment.
- Conduit boxes: Provide for each luminaire suspension point.
• Rod supports: Continuously threaded rods.
• Chain supports: Steel chain with conduit box hook and cover.
• Ball and socket: Provide as top support and fix cover to circular conduit box. Route cable
from conduit box through ball and socket.
• Number of supports for luminaires longer than 600 mm (minimum):
- Luminaire width<300 mm: 2.
- Luminaire width >300 mm: 4.

COMPLETION
910 CLEANING
• Luminaires and lamps: Clean when building works are complete.

• Luminaires and lamps: Check operation.
930 SPARE LAMPS

• Quantity to be supplied: 5% each type installed.
• Labelling: Label the lamps with the corresponding luminaire reference.

V60
External lighting systems

V60 External lighting systems
GENERAL
120 AMENITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS GENERALLY

• System manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers and Suppliers.
• Electrical supply: Low voltage connection, as section V11.
• Low voltage switchgear: Cable distribution cabinet, as section V31.
• Luminaire supports:
- Steel lighting columns;
- Steel lighting pedestals;
- Steel column luminaire brackets; and
- Steel luminaire brackets.
- Painting: Anti-graffiti textured finish.
• Concrete bases to columns/pedestals: Required.
• Luminaires: As section V59.
- Operating voltage to BS 7671: Low voltage.
• Controls:
- Types: Photoelectric control units, as section V51 and Time switches , as section V51.
- Configuration: Group.
- Accessories: Enclosures for control gear .
• System accessories: Electrical cut outs.
120A FEATURE LIGHTING SYSTEMS Feature lighting will be installed to landscaping and
courtyards in line with Landscape Architect and Electrical drawings and specifications.
• System manufacturer: As per lighting schedules.
- Product reference: As per lighting schedules.
• Low voltage switchgear: Cable distribution cabinet, as section V31 or fed direct from plant
room (dependant on location).
• Luminaire supports: As per lighting schedules.
- Painting: Not required.
• Concrete bases to columns/pedestals: Not required.
• Luminaires: As Luminaire schedule.
• Controls:
- Types: Photoelectric control units, as section V51 and Time switches , as section V51,
PIR's and sequencing (DMX).
- Accessories: As per lighting schedules.

120B SECURITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS External areas surrounding the Acute Services Block
shall be designed and installed to Secured by Design Criteria
• System manufacturer: As per Lighting Schedules.
- Product reference: As per Lighting Schedules.
• Low voltage switchgear: Cable distribution cabinet, as section V31.
• Luminaire supports:
- Steel lighting columns;
- Steel lighting pedestals;
- Steel column luminaire brackets; and
- Steel luminaire brackets.
- Painting: Anti-graffiti textured finish.
• Concrete bases to columns/pedestals: Required.
• Luminaires: As section V59.
• Controls:
- Types: Photoelectric control units, as section V51 and Time switches , as section V51,
PIR sensor and master over-ride control .
- Accessories: Enclosures for control gear .
130 CABLING AND CONTAINMENT

• Cable type: Thermosetting insulated and LSZH sheathed armoured cables, as section V32.
• Containment: Ducting externally, cable tray internally.
• Trenches, pipeways and pits: As section P30.
• Accessories: Plastics ducts for underground cables, as section V32 and Underground
concrete cable protection covers, and protection tapes for underground cables, as section
V32.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
220 AMENITY LIGHTING DESIGN

• Design: Complete the design of the amenity lighting system.
• Performance: As Amenity lighting performance schedule.
literature.
230 MAINTENANCE FACTOR CALCULATIONSFOR AMENITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Calculations: In accordance with CIBSE Lighting guide 6.
• Proposals for luminaire maintenance: Submit.
• Proposals for lamp replacement: Submit.
• Maintenance factors: Submit.
240 LUMINAIRE AND LAMP MAINTENANCE PROPERTIESFOR AMENITY LIGHTING

SYSTEMS
• Lamp replacement method: Spot replacement.
• Lamp lumen maintenance factor: Submit proposals.
• Lamp survival factor: Submit proposals.
• Luminaire maintenance class: Submit proposals.
• Luminaire cleaning interval: 1.5 y.
• Luminaire maintenance factor: Submit proposals.

250 LIGHTING CALCULATIONSFOR AMENITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS.

• Calculations: Submit. Include the following:
- Road surface reflectance values, where relevant.
PRODUCTS
320 STEEL LIGHTING COLUMNSFOR AMENITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Type: As drawings and luminaire schedule.
• Manufacturer: Refer to Luminaire Schedules.
• Profile: Submit proposals.
• Cross section: Submit proposals.
• Height (nominal): As drawings and Luminaire Schedule.
• Base: Bolted flange.
- Root length: 1200mm.
• Mounting diameter or width (nominal) : As Luminaire Schedule.
• Factory finish:
- Above ground: Galvanised.
Colour: To Architects detail.
- Below ground: Primer and micaceous iron oxide.
• Lighting column access door keys:
- Door lock pattern: Same for all columns installed.
- Keys: Same for each group of columns.
• Identification:
- Manufacturer's marking:
- Location marking for inspection and maintenance purposes: As drawings.
• Accessories: None.
340 STEEL LIGHTING PEDESTALSFOR AMENITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Manufacturer: As luminaire Schedule.
• Profile: As Luminaire Schedule.
• Cross section: As Luminaire Schedule.
• Height (nominal): As Luminaire Schedule.
• Base: Bolted flange.
- Root length: As Luminaire Schedule.
• Mounting diameter or width (nominal) : As Luminaire Schedule.
• Factory finish: Galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 and primed
- Colour: To Architects Detail.

360 STEEL COLUMN LUMINAIRE BRACKETS GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: Column manufacturer.
• Luminaire fixing: Horizontal.
• Projection (nominal): As drawings and 500 mm.
• Spigot size (nominal): To suit luminaire served.
• Factory finish: Manufacturer's standard.
- Colour: Match columns.
380 STEEL LUMINAIRE BRACKETS GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: As luminaire Schedule.
• Luminaire fixing: Horizontal.
• Cable entry: Back.
• Fixing: Flat/Corner wall plate, bolted.
• Projection (nominal): As drawings and 500 mm.
• Factory finish: Manufacturer's standard.
- Colour: As Luminaire Schedule.
• Accessories: Separate wall mounted enclosure for final connections.
400 ENCLOSURES FOR CONTROL GEAR.

• Manufacturer: As Lighting Schedules.
• Enclosure:
- Material: Match Luminaire finish.
- Finish: Submit proposals.
- Hardware: Cylinder lock and handle. Standardize key type.
- Labelling: Describe control gear purpose.
410 ELECTRICAL CUT OUTS

• Type: Single phase loop in/ out with two single phase outgoing circuits.
• Classification: 2L.
Final connection circuit protection: MCB to BS EN 60898-1.
- Rating: 16 A
• Incoming cable capacity: 10sq.mm.
• Final connection cable capacity: Submit proposals.
• Cable entry plate: Brass.
- Cable termination: Brass compression glands.
• Accessories: Earth terminal block and Fused connection unit for auxiliary circuit.
EXECUTION
620A INSTALLING SECURITY AND AMENITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS GENERALLY

640 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL CUT OUTS

• Location: At base of columns.

650 INSTALLING PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL UNIT

• Location: As drawings.
660 INSTALLING TIME SWITCHES

• Location: Within Plant room.
670 CONCRETE BASES

• Foundation holes: Form neat holes with vertical sides. Cover bottom with a 50 mm layer of
concrete.
• Concealed finish: Finish by bedding and haunching at a depth suitable to receive the
overlying finish.
• Compaction: Fully compact as filling proceeds.
• Exposed finish: Compact until air bubbles cease to appear on the surface. Weather to shed
water, and trowel smooth.
• Dimensions: To suit luminaire & columns/pedestals fixing requirements.
680 SETTING COMPONENTS IN CONCRETE BASES
• Locating components: Accurately position, plumb and provide secure temporary support.
Prevent disturbance for at least 48 hours after placing concrete.
• Cable ducts: Connect to column cable entry slot and protect against collapse during
backfilling.
• Compaction: Fully compact as filling proceeds.
690 SETTING COMPONENTS IN EARTH

• Foundation holes: Form as small as practicable to allow refilling.
• Locating components: Accurately position, plumb and provide secure temporary support.
• Cable ducts: Connect to column cable entry slot and protect against collapse during
backfilling.
• Earth for backfilling: Selected material free from stones or lumps of clay exceeding 40 mm
in any direction.
• Backfilling: Refill with earth. Fully compact in 50 mm layers as filling proceeds.
700 HANDLING AND ERECTING LIGHTING COLUMNS

• Standard: To Highways Agency 'Specification for highway works', Volume 1.
710A INSTALLING LIGHTING COLUMNS

• Access doors: Orientate so that maintenance operatives face oncoming traffic and do not
obstruct access routes.
• Locations: As Drawings.
720 CABLING FROM ELECTRICAL CUT OUTS TO LUMINAIRES

• Luminaire: Connect to cut out.
750 COLUMN AND PEDESTAL LABELLING:

• Height above ground level: 1.2 m.
• Type: Self-adhesive.
• Size of numbers and letters: Submit Proposals.
- Background to numbers and letters: Submit Proposals.
• Size of background: Submit Proposals.

COMPLETION
910 CLEANING
• Electrical equipment: Clean immediately before handover.

• Standard: To BS 7671 and Associated Guidance Notes.
• Notice before commencing tests (minimum): 24 h.
• Certificates: Submit.
- Number of copies: 3.
930 COMMISSIONING
• Setting for control devices: Submit proposals and commission.
• Operation of control devices: Verify.
• Orientation of adjustable luminaires: Adjust to give optimum performance.
940 PHOTOMETRIC SURVEY

• Standard: In accordance with CIBSE Lighting guide 6.
• Locations: Externally illuminated areas generally.
• Time of test: 2200GMT.
• Average illuminance measurement method: Full grid .
• Measured values: Submit.
• Maintained average illuminance: Submit based upon measured values.
• Illuminance variation: Submit details.
• Environmental conditions: Submit details.
• Survey photographs: Submit for each location.
• Extraneous light: Measure and submit results.
• Test equipment: Submit calibration details.
950 DOCUMENTATION
• Timing: Submit at completion.
• Contents:
- Full technical description of each system installed.
- Manufacturers' operating and maintenance instructions for fittings and apparatus
including relamping instructions for luminaire types. Identify hazardous lamps that
require specialist disposal.
- Recommended frequency of testing and inspection, both for electrical safety, and for
matters such as the corrosion and security of lighting columns and luminaire fixings.
- Manufacturers' guarantees and warranties.
- Record drawings showing circuits and their ratings and locations of fittings and
apparatus.
- List of normal consumable items and their sources.
960 SPARE LAMPS

• Quantity of each type to be supplied: 5% of installed lamps.
• Labelling: Label the lamps with the corresponding luminaire reference.
980 KEYS
• Padlock keys:
- Number for each padlock: 2
• Lighting column access door keys:
- Number for each group of columns: 3
• Timing: At completion.

990 MAINTENANCE

V80
Electrical identification

V80 Electrical identification
PRODUCTS
310 IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES

• Standards: To BS 7671, BS 5499-1 and -5.
330 ELECTRICAL SHOCK TREATMENT SIGNS

• Type: Plastics encapsulated.
FABRICATION
510 EQUIPMENT LABELSIN PLANTROOMS

• Material: Face engraved rigid plastic laminate.
• Colour:
- Background: Red.
- Lettering: Black.
• Typography:
- Font: Helvetica medium.
- Size: Submit proposals.
510A EQUIPMENT LABELSFOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

• Material: Face engraved rigid plastic laminate.
• Colour:
- Background: Red.
- Lettering: Black.
• Typography:
520 DIAGRAMS
• Material: Paper print, encapsulated.
• Format: Single line engineering drawings to BS EN 61082-1.
• Information to be included:
- Supply characteristics.
- Maximum demand.
- Cable types and sizes.
- Switchgear ratings.
- Protective device types, ratings and function.
- Prospective fault current values: At each item of switchgear.
- Earth fault loop impedance values: At each item of switchgear.
- Circuits containing equipment vulnerable to testing: Label.
• Mounting: Wall.
EXECUTION
610 LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES

• Standards: To BS 7671, BS 5499-1 and -5.

620 SAMPLES
• Labels: Submit samples showing material, style, colour, lettering, and fixing method for
each label type.
630 ARRANGEMENT
• Location: Submit proposals.
• Fixing: Secure, plumb and level.
- Type: Round head bolt, washer and lock nut.
640 IDENTIFYING METAL CONTAINMENTFOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS, FOR

FIRE DETECTION, FOR SECURITY, FOR DATA COMMS
• Identification:
- Standard: To BS 1710.
- Colour: BS 4800 reference 06 E 51.
- Application: Paint.
650 IDENTIFYING SUB-MAIN CABLES

• Labels at both ends: Include circuit reference and cable size.
- Marker type: Face engraved rigid plastic laminate.
660 FUNCTIONAL EARTHS

• Labels at cable ends: State the purpose of functional earth cables.
• Instructions for operation and maintenance: Encapsulated card at cable ends.
670 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

• Labelling of busbar and bare conductors: Throughout the length of the conductor.
680 EQUIPMENT LABELLING

• Electrical equipment: Label indicating its purpose.
• Safety signs: Install where voltages above ELV exist.
• Voltage warning notices: Label equipment when the voltage exceeds 230 V.
- Format: To BS 5499-5 8.A.0044, include warnings of the voltage present.
690 CIRCUIT CHARTS

• Location: Distribution boards and consumer units.
• Format: Card within a reusable clear plastics envelope.
- Size A4.
• Typed information: State outgoing circuit references, their device rating, cable type, cable
size, circuit location and number of points served.
• Fixing: Fit to the inside of each unit with nylon hoop and loop self-adhesive pads.
• Switchgear outgoing ways: Label corresponding to the circuit chart.
700AENGRAVING OF ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
Engraving must not create surfaces where bacteria can multiply

• Fused connection units and isolators: Describe function and Identify circuit reference.
• Emergency lighting test key switches: Engrave with the wording "E LTG TEST".
• Multigang light switches: Describe luminaire arrangement.
• Socket outlets: Engrave with the wording "Cleaners socket" on cleaners outlets.
• Fill colour: Black.
710 INSTALLING DIAGRAMS

• Location: At main switchgear and At section boards.
- Installation: Wall mounted with cup & screw fixings.

720 INSTALLING PERIODIC INSPECTION NOTICES

• Location: At the incoming point of supply.
• Frequency of inspection: 3 year.
730 INSTALLING MAINTENANCE NOTICES

• Maintenance procedures: Install notices describing essential maintenance procedures and
their frequency.
- Location: Electrical Switchrooms, Plant Rooms with Electrical Section Boards and / or
Motor Control Centres .
740 INSTALLING ELECTRIC SHOCK TREATMENT SIGNS

• Location: Electrical switch rooms, Plant Rooms with Electrical Section Boards and / or
Motor Control Centres.
- Installation: Wall mounted with cup & screw fixings.
750 INSTALLING HAZARD SIGNS

• Location: At each item of switchgear.

V81
Earthing and bonding systems

V81 Earthing and bonding systems
GENERAL
GENERAL Earthing will generally be provided and installed fully in accordance with the
requirements as indicated in BS7671 and associated Guidance notes BS7430 and BS EN
62305. There are specific areas however where it is necessary to incorporate fully the
requirements of MEiGAN. In such instances it shall be necessary to increase the size of
CPCs and earth conductors , consolidate LV distribution infrastructure of such areas to
UPS rooms at different floor levels and generally amend earthing infrastructure physically
to suit Notwithstanding this the earthing arrangements shall remain compliant with BS7671
110 EARTHING AND BONDING SYSTEMS Generally works shall be carried out in full and
complete strict accordance with BS7671. There are instances in the installation where the
MEiGAN requirements shall take precedence. In these defined areas the MEiGAN
stipulations shall take precedence. Where the medical device manufacturer stipulates an
electromagnetic interference (EMI) screen for mains supply cables, the SWA shall be
terminated with a zoned earthing and neutral (ZEN) gland. The SWA shall be earthed only
at the distribution board unless that would conflict with the equipment manufacturer's
instructions for earthing arrangements for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
The steel wire armour (SWA) shall provide mechanical and electro-magnetic compatibility
protection; it shall not be used as the main earth conductor. Connection to earth shall be
achieved by means of a copper conductor, having a cross sectional area (CSA) greater
than or equal to that of the phase conductors. Where the medical device
supplier specifies a greater cross sectional area, the supplier's instructions shall be
followed. The copper earth conductor shall be connected to the source of the supply
unless it can be shown that a more local distribution panel can provide a copper conductor
of adequate CSA from the earth reference bar (ERB) to the earth distribution bar of the sub
-station (verify by inspection).
• Main incoming earth: Establish with the Electricity Distributor .

• Size of main earthing conductor: To BS 7671 Regulation 543.1.3.
• Main earth electrode type: Earth rod.
• Main equipotential bonding
- Connect the following to the main earthing terminal: LV infrastructure, Structural
constructions, Plant, Main incoming services, HV infrastructure, Submain distribution
infrastructure, Telecommunications system infrastructure, Specialist systems
infrastructures.
- Cable type:
- LSZH singles, as section V32;
- Bare copper tape; and
- Flexible copper braid.
- Size: To BS 7671 Regulation 544.1.1.
• Supplementary equipotential bonding: Bond the following: Extraneous metal work,
Distribution pipework.
- Size: Minimum of 2.5 mm² if sheathed or where mechanical protection is provided,
otherwise 4 mm².
• Circuit protective conductors
- Type: Refer to Circuit Schedules.
- Size: To BS 7671 Regulation 543.1.3 and 543.1.4.
• Earth terminal: Separate wall mounted main earth bar and Separate functional earth bars
in server room(s) and cath labs (to meet MEiGAN.
• Earthing of metal fencing around substations: Required.
• Accessories:
- Anti vandal capping;

- Earth bar;
- Earth clamps;
- Earth monitoring system; and
- Earth proving system

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210A DESIGN
• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with BS 7430 and MEiGAN.
• Design: Complete the design of the earthing and bonding systems.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturer's
literature.
220 ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTOR'S REQUIREMENTS

• Electricity distributor: Comply with the requirements of the Electricity Distributor.
- Evidence of compliance: Submit.
230 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING IN BUILDINGS WITH INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

EQUIPMENT
• Objectives: Ensure the earthing arrangements are configured to eliminate potential
interference from main earthing system at point of use of IT equipment. .
240 FUNCTIONAL EARTHING DESIGN

• Objectives: Ensure the earthing arrangements are configured to eliminate potential
interference from main earthing system at point of use of IT equipment..
• Connection type: To a separate functional earth bar connected directly to the main earth
bar.
250 GENERATOR EARTHING DESIGN

• Standard: To BS 7430 and in accordance with the Electricity Distributor's requirements.
• Independent earth electrode network: Provide.
- Individual earth electrode resistance (maximum): 20 ohm.
• Generator operation: Dependent upon mains electricity supply.
• Earth connection to generator: Provide.
255 MOBILE GENERATOR EARTHING

• Mobile generator earthing: Provide an earthing system capable of being connected to a
mobile generator.
- Mobile generator position FM Yard to the West of the Acute Services Block. Temporary
generators would connect to the Generator switchboard - refer to LV electrical schematic.
260 HIGH INTEGRITY EARTHING DESIGN

• Scope: Earthing will comply with Hts 06 and MEIGaN regulations.
280 DESIGN FOR THE SAFE USE AND HANDLING OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
• Design: In accordance with HS(G) 140.
290 DESIGN TO MINIMIZE UNDESIRABLE STATIC ELECTRICITY

• Design: In accordance with BS 5958-1.
PRODUCTS

• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with BS 7430.

320 EARTHING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

• Type: Bare, tinned, LSZH-covered and lead-covered copper tape to BS EN 13601.
330 FUNCTIONAL EARTH CABLES

• Standards: To BS 6701 and To BS 7211.
•
360 EARTH RODS

• Standards: In accordance with BS 7430 and Energy Networks Association Technical
Specification 43-94.
• Type: Copperbond rods.
• Manufacturer: Furse or equal approved.
• Size (diameter): 25 mm.
370 COPPER EARTH PLATES

• Type: Solid.
• Size: 600 mm x 600 mm x 3 mm.
- Thickness: 3 mm.
380 EARTH ELECTRODE INSPECTION PITS

• Type: Concrete.
• Load rating (minimum): 3500 kg.
• Identification: Permanently identify with the wording “SAFETY EARTH”.
390 EARTH BARS Earth bars

• Material: Hard drawn copper to BS EN 13601.
• Location: Main Switchboard, IT Server Room, All major Plant rooms.
• Size:
- Profile: 50 mm x 6 mm.
- Length: Submit proposals.
• Predrilled connections: Submit proposals.
• Disconnecting links: 2 per bar.
440 EARTHING AND BONDING CLAMPS

450 EARTH PROVING/ MONITORING SYSTEMS

460 SOIL CONDITIONING AGENTS

• Type: Submit proposals based on soil resistivity measurements.

EXECUTION
610 GENERAL INSTALLATION

• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with BS 7430 .
640 INSTALLING EARTH CONDUCTOR TAPES

• Locations: Refer to Layouts.
• Fasteners: Metallic direct contact clips.
- Spacing (maximum): 600 mm.
• Anti-vandal capping: Provide.
- Type: Black PVC-coated steel.
- Location: Refer to Layouts.
650 INSTALLING EARTH CONDUCTOR JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS

• Number of joints: Minimize.
• Contact surfaces: Clean. Coat with corrosion inhibitor.
• Bimetallic joints: Do not cross-contaminate.
• Joints and connections subject to moisture: Protect.
- Type of protection: Heat shrink clear sheathing.
• Connections to test points: Clamp.
• Copper tape jointing: Provide as required.
- Conductor overlap (minimum): 100mm.
• Protective cable terminations: Compression lugs with phosphor bronze nuts, bolts and
washers.
660 INSTALLING EARTH RODS

• Position: In undisturbed ground.
- Location: In undisturbed ground, at least 2m from building and metal fencing, avoiding
communications cabling. Refer to Layouts.
• Rod separation: Space the rods apart by at least 1.25 times the depth of the longest rod.
- Clean earth installations: Space rods apart by at least 6 times the depth of the longest
rod.
• Rod alignment: Vertical.
• Rod length (minimum): 2.4m.
• Couplings: Apply corrosion inhibiting paste to the threads and enclose so that rods meet at
centre of coupling.
• Earth rod heads: Enclose and position within 100mm of ground level.
- Enclosure: Concrete inspection pit.
• Earth rods: Interconnect with bare copper tape.
- Tape size: 25mm x 6mm.
- Tape depth: 750mm below ground.
- Jointing method: Compression or Exothermic.
• Internal earth rods: Provide seals.
680 INSTALLING EARTH PLATES

• Earth plates: Install vertically. Backfill immediately following installation.
- Depth of plate top (minimum): 1000mm below finished ground level.
- Location: Refer to layouts.
685 INSTALLING EARTH PROVING/ MONITORING SYSTEMS

• Location: Refer to Layouts.

700 INSTALLING EARTH BARS

• Main earth bar location: Next to the main switchboard.
• Multiple earth bars: Connect with a conductor ring.
• Mounting: Insulated supports.
- Support spacing: 300mm for 25mm bar and 450mm for 50mm bar.
- Clearance between wall and earth bar (minimum): 30mm.
710 INSTALLING MAIN EARTHING CONDUCTOR

• Installing main earthing conductor: Install between the main incoming earth and the main
earthing terminal in one continuous length. Connect with compression lugs and phosphor
bronze nuts and bolts.
- Earthing conductor route: Refer to Layouts.
• Connection to earth electrodes: Heavy duty copper alloy mechanical clamps.
- Protection to main earthing conductor: Underground concrete cable protection covers
and protection tapes for underground cables, as section V32.
720 INSTALLING MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING CONDUCTORS

• Separate and continuous connections: Install between each service and the main earth
terminal.
- Bonding conductor routes: via electrical containment / electrical risers.
• Earth connections at main earth terminal: Connect with compression lugs and phosphor
bronze nuts and bolts.
730 INSTALLING SUPPLEMENTARY BONDING CONDUCTORS

• Earth connections: Connect with compression lugs.
740 INSTALLING EARTH ELECTRODE PITS

• Locations: external to the building at Level 1 West & North sides.
• Inspection pit lid: Install flush with the finished ground surface.
750 DISSIMILAR METALS

• Connecting dissimilar metals: Prevent electrolytic action.
760 EARTHING AND BONDING OF STREET FURNITURE

• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with the Electricity Distributor's requirements.
• Supplies to street furniture: Use cables with separate phase, neutral and protective
conductors.
770 EARTHING OF METAL FENCING AROUND SUBSTATIONS

• Type: Independent of substation earthing system.

COMPLETION

• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with BS 7430.
• Notice before commencing tests (minimum): 7 Days.
- Equipment: Continuity tester with short circuit current not less than 200 mA, and a no
load d.c. or a.c. voltage between 4 V and 24 V.
- Measurement locations: Origin, switchgear, fixed equipment and outlets, and circuit
extremities.
920 NOTICES AND LABELS

• Material: Face engraved rigid plastics laminate.
• Colour:
- Background: White.
- Lettering: Black.
• Typography:
• Earth bars: Describe each connection and label with “SAFETY ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE”.
• Main earthing and bonding connections: Describe each connection and label with “SAFETY
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE”.
• Telecommunications functional earth connections: Label with "TELECOMMS EARTH - DO
NOT REMOVE".
930 IDENTIFICATION OF FUNCTIONAL EARTHING

• Labelling: Identify the purpose of functional earth cables along their length using clip-on
cable markers.
- Spacing (maximum): 3 m.
940 DOCUMENTATION

W
Communications, security, safety and protection systems

W16
Induction-loop systems

W16 Induction-loop systems
GENERAL Induction loops will generally be required at fixed points of contact between
staff and visitors . These are generally identified as (but not limited to) interim main
entrance, sub-reception areas, staff bases training rooms, meeting rooms, interview rooms
rest areas. Systems will be stand-alone with dedicated loops, control amplifiers,
speakers, microphones and all necessary cabling and components etc to effect full
complete fully operational systems with optimal interference free clarity of
signal/communication.
110 AUDIO-FREQUENCY-INDUCTION-LOOP SYSTEM GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of preferred Suppliers and Manufacturers.
- Registration: Member of Professional Lighting and Sound Association.
• Type: 1) Ticket office (counter) system
2) Spatial .
• Environment: Indoors.
• Listening plane: Horizontal plane 1200mm above finished floor level.
• Coverage area: Refer to Layouts.
• Working area: Refer to Layouts.
• Source equipment: Microphones.
• Distribution equipment:
- Final amplifiers;
- Transformers; and
- Equalization equipment.
• Equipment interconnectivity: Wired.
• Loop arrangement: Multiple.
• Loop cables: PVC singles, as section V32.
- Containment: Pliable conduit as section Y60.
- Rewireable installation: Required.
- Concealed installation: Required.
• Trial loop: Required.
• Accessories:
- Illuminated reassurance indicators;
- Induction-loop monitor receivers;
- Loop field strength meters;
- Signage; and
- Tone signals.
• Completion: Test, Commission certify and set-to-work.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design and planning: In accordance with BS 7594.
- Variations: None.
• Design: Complete the design of the induction-loop system.
literature.
• Qualifications of designer: Member of the Institute of Sound and Communication Engineers
or Member of the Professional Lighting and Sound Association.
Loop cable type and size: Submit proposals.
- Design loop current: Submit proposals.
• Equipment: Provide electrical supplies to equipment requiring power.
220 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

• Frequency response: 100 Hz-5 kHz.
- Variation (relative to 1 kHz):
>100 Hz and <5 kHz: ± 3 dB.
100 Hz and 5 kHz: -3 dB.
• Magnetic field strength (relative to 0.56 A/m): -20 ± 3 dB.
• Rapid speech transmission index (RASTI) to BS EN 60268-16 (minimum): 0.65.
230 MULTIPLE LOOPS

• Objective:
- To cover a large area;
- To improve coverage in areas with interference caused by steel in the building fabric;
- To minimise overspill; and
- To reduce listening height.
• Loop design: Submit proposals.
PRODUCTS

• Products: In accordance with BS 7594.
320 MICROPHONES GENERALLY.

• Element: Dynamic.
• Polar pattern: Uni-directional (cardioid).
• Controls: On/ off slide switch.
• Mounting: wall, fixed gooseneck stand .
• Accessories: Foam windshield.

340 FINAL AMPLIFIERS .

• Type: Current drive.
• Inputs:
- Quantity: 3 per system.
- Mix control: Required.
• Total harmonic distortion: 0.5 %.
• Light emitting diode (LED) indication: Power on/ off.
• Output loop impedance:
- Minimum: 1 ohm.
- Maximum: 10 ohm.
• Phantom power: Required, submit proposals.
• Features:
- Automatic gain control;
- Automatic noise suppression;
- Noise gating;
- Signal presence monitoring; and
- Voice control.
• Auxiliary voltage output: Required.
350 TRANSFORMERS
• Type: Matching.
360 EQUALIZATION EQUIPMENT

380 LOOP PADS

• Loop cable: Encapsulated within flexible plastic cover.
420 ILLUMINATED REASSURANCE INDICATORS

• Sign:
- Legend: In accordance with BS 7594 figure 20.
- Material: Plastics.
• Indicator body:
- Material: Steel.
- Construction: Submit proposals.
- Finish: White powder coated.
• Mounting: wall.
• Lamp type: Tungsten filament.
- Rating: Submit proposals.

430 INDUCTION-LOOP MONITOR RECEIVERS

• Type: Fixed.
• Quantity: 1 per induction-loop.
• Frequency response:
- Response range (relative to 0 dB at 0.56 A/m): -40 dB to 3 dB.
- Characteristics: Normal and EQ (equalized).
• Loudspeaker output: Required.
• Headphone output: Required.
• On/ off with volume control: Required.
• Alarm output: Required.
• Battery low indicator: Required.
440 LOOP FIELD STRENGTH METERS

• Type: Peak programme meter (PPM).
• Quantity: 1 per induction-loop.
• Frequency response:
- Response range (relative to 0 dB at 0.56 A/m): -40 dB to 3 dB.
- Characteristics: Normal and EQ (equalized).
• Display: Illuminated incremental scale.
- Type: Light emitting diode indicators.
• Battery low indicator: Required
450 SIGNAGE
• Requirements in accordance with BS 7594:
- Equipment identification: Figure 2.
- Areas where an induction-loop system is installed: Figure 2.
- Areas where reception of the induction-loop system does not meet the system
performance: Figure 3.
• Material: PVC.
• Dimensions: 300 mm x 300 mm.
460 TONE SIGNALS

• Purpose: Confidence tone and Test tone.
• Magnetic field strength (relative to 0 dB at 0.56 A/m): 0 dB for test tones and - 6 dB for
confidence tones.
• Duty (on:off): 1:4.

EXECUTION
620 SITE ASSESSMENT

• Site assessment: Determine the suitability of the site for use with induction-loop systems.
- Location: Refer to SIte layouts and construction plans . .
- Qualifications of assessor: Member of the Institute of Sound and Communication
Engineers or Member of the Professional Lighting and Sound Association.
Report: Submit.
- Quantity: 3 + electronic.
- Content:
Use of the premises.
Location and dimensions of the working area.
Building construction and its impact on an induction-loop system.
The presence of electrical equipment and its impact on an induction-loop system.
Background magnetic field measurements.
The impact on equipment due to the presence of an induction-loop system.
Incoming low voltage connection earthing type.
Suggested routes for microphone and loop wiring.
Location and details of existing induction-loop system equipment.
630 INSTALLING INDUCTION-LOOP SYSTEMS GENERALLY

• Installation: In accordance with BS 7594.
650 INSTALLING FINAL AMPLIFIERS

• Equipment: Provide electrical supplies to equipment requiring power. Derive from the same
electrical phase.
- Standard: To BS 7671.
670 INSTALLING INDUCTION-LOOP CABLING

• Standard: To BS 7671
• Location: Ceiling level.
• Timing: Keep cabling dry. Commence internal cabling when building enclosure provides
permanently dry conditions.
• Cables: Install in one length. Segregate from band II voltages.
• Cable pulling: Submit proposals. Do not overstress. Prevent kinks and twisting of the cable.
• Separation from other audio cables when run in parallel (minimum): 1 m.
• Cable route: Permanently identify.
680 INSTALLING MICS/LSZH LOOP CABLES

• Metallic sheath: Isolate. Do not form loop.
• Labelling:
- Location: At cable connections.
- Description: ISOLATE METALLIC SHEATH - DO NOT FORM LOOP.
690 INSTALLING MULTIPLE LOOPS

• Layout: Submit proposals.
700 INSTALLING LOOP PADS

• Locations: Concealed below counter top.
• Fixing: Self-adhesive hook and loop tape.

720 TRIAL LOOP

• Trial loop: Install.
- Timing: During construction period to mock-up area.
• Measurements:
- Meter: Loop field strength meter.
- Measurement grid: 3 m x 3 m.
- Magnetic field strength. Measure.
- Coverage area: Determine.
- Results: Submit.
760 INSTALLING ILLUMINATED REASSURANCE INDICATORS

• Locations: At entrances to areas with induction-loop systems.
780 INSTALLING SIGNAGE

• Locations: At entrances to areas with induction-loop systems and Within areas covered by
induction-loop systems .
• Mounting: Wall.
COMPLETION

• Testing: In accordance with BS 7594.
• System commissioning agent: System manufacturer.
• Areas where magnetic field strength and signal-to-noise ratio falls below design
parameters: Identify on layout drawing.
• System commissioning:
- Method: Submit proposals.
- Meter: Loop field strength meter.
- Input equipment: Commission.
- Output controls: Commission and adjust.
- Equalizers and auxiliary passive elements: Commission.
- Measurement grid: 3 m x 3 m.
- Magnetic field strength. Measure.
- Coverage area: Determine.
- Working area: Determine.
- Rapid speech transmission index (RASTI) to BS EN 60268-16: Determine.
- Results: Submit.
• Cable testing:
- Insulation resistance: Submit results.
- Earth continuity: Submit results.
- Loop current: Measure.
• Loop: Measure resistance. Verify loop is operating within design limits.
920 SYSTEM RE-COMMISSIONING

• Induction-loop system: Re-commission.
- Timing: 3 months after Practical completion.
930 SUBJECTIVE TESTING

• Locations: All.
• Objectives: Confirmation of operational functionality in use.
• Timing: 3 months after Practical completion.
• Panellists: Submit proposals.

940 EQUIPMENT LABELLING AND SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

• Equipment rack: Label with a unique identification code.
• Final amplifiers: Label with induction-loop identification information.
• System diagram: Provide. Show the location and identity of system equipment and routes.
- Location: Next to the final amplifier
960 SPARES
• Spare fuses:
- Quantity (minimum): 5% of each type and rating used.
970 DOCUMENTATION
• Record drawings: Submit
980 MAINTENANCE

W20
Television and radio distribution systems

W20 Television and radio distribution systems
GENERAL The requirement includes engagement of a television system specialist to

design a complete fully operational IPTV installation to the Acute Services Block. Television
to the Acute Services Block will be provided by via a dedicated Internet Protocol network
(IPTV) broadcasting the Freeview HD range of television and radio channels.
Subscription / per per view Satellite or cable TV is not required as part of this installation.
High Definition signals shall be transmitted to all the Televisions installed in the Acute Services
Block. Each of the bedrooms will be separately connected to the TV network and
shall be capable of delivering 'Freeview HD' TV and radio services. The system will be
integrated with the Nurse call system to enable full control of the end use television
apparatus by means of a handset interfaced with the nurse call system within bedrooms,
elsewhere standard infra-red controllers will be employed. Within bedrooms the television
system will use a dedicated controls wiring installation as the mechanism for switching
control functionality and interconnection from the individual plug-in handsets to the local
television system/apparatus.
The IPTV system will be capable of accepting inputs to and from a central computer
terminal for hospital wide text and graphical displays e.g daily meal menu information and
any other hospital wide notifications required. To allow two way communication each TV
will be addressable to room location thereby allowing the selection of meal menu choices
by the patient. Provision will be made for internal 'on demand' services from a local
server held within the IT room for the building.
IP TV will be distributed by a backbone fibre cable network to the same standard as

described in Section W31. From local switches Cat 5e or Cat 6 (dependant on system
provided) will be distributed horizontally via IT containment to the final termination points.
TV's will be provided by the Client to the following minimum specification;

• IP TV receiver units will be integral to the Television sets
• The TV sets will have concealed stereo speaker systems.
• The upper volume control will be settable out with the patient handset controller to prevent
nuisance noise transfer to neighbouring rooms
• 1080P widscreen with a minimum 26 inch screen size
• TV's wil be wall mounted with the bracket provided by the Contractor. Brackets will allow
for tilt adjustment in horizontal and vertical planes with at least 20° adjustment in each
plane.
• RJ45 outlet and TV power outlet will be wall mounted and positioned behind the TV to
conceal there presence providing a neat installation
• IPTV's shall be black framed
IPTV's will comply with and be certified to Energy Saving Trust Recommended Criteria;
Digital televisions must meet the following Energy Saving Trust Recommended product
certification criteria:
Compliance with 642:2009 (e.g. on passive standby and auto power down)
Compliance with the RoHs & WEEE Directives can be demonstrated by manufacturers self
declaration
On mode power consumption of =50W
The Home Mode must be set at a brightness level not less than 65% of the maximum

brightness of the TV.

Energy Efficiency index (EEI) =0.40
Certification proof
To prove that the individual product has met the Energy Saving Trust Recommended
criteria we require the following documentation:
Suppliers Declaration of Conformity
110 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

• System manufacturer:
- Member of the Society of Cable and Television Engineers (SCTE);
- Member of Confederation of Aerial Industries Ltd (CAI); or
- Member of the Independent Digital Standards Commission (IDSC).
• Type: SMATV.
• Input signals:
- Frequency modulated (FM) radio (VHF);
- Digital audio broadcasting (DAB); and
- Digital terrestrial television (DTT).
• Aerials:
- DAB;
- FM; and
- UHF.
• Distribution equipment:
- Diplexers;
- Equalisers;
- Launch amplifiers;
- Masthead amplifiers;
- Multiswitches; and
- Splitters.
• Outlets: Television outlets.
• Accessories:
- Brackets;
- Catenaries;
- Masts; and
- Stay wires.
• Completion: Submit design and cost proposals.
120A CABLING AND CONTAINMENT

• Cable: Cat 6 for IPTV .
• Containment: Rigid trunking, cable tray, cable basket as sections Y60 and Y63. Containment
installation to comply with clause 120 of Section W31 of this specification.
• Completion: Provide design and cost proposals.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the television distribution system.
- Standards: To BS EN 60728-11, the requirements of the Digital Television Group
guide, The CAI Code of practice for television aerials and TV systems, and BS 7671.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers
literature.
• System designer: Specialist Supplier as per Schedule of Preferred suppliers.
- Qualifications of designer:
- Member of the Society of Cable and Television Engineers (SCTE);
- Member of the Confederation of Aerial Industries (CAI); or
- Member of the Independent Digital Standards Commission (IDSC).
220 PERFORMANCE
• ITU impairment grade: 5.
230A WIND RESISTANCE OF ANTENNAE

• An antennae array should be capable of withstanding winds of 120 km/h and gusting of
180 km/h without excessive movement or permanent deformation.
240 INTERFACE TO OTHER SERVICES

• Interfaces to equipment not forming part of the television distribution system: Design
system to interact with the equipment in the event of a fire or fault signal.
• Equipment and mode of operation: A requirement exists to allow messaging from the
Hospital to be displayed on screen within Patient bedrooms. This requirement will typically
include any hospital wide announcements to patients and daily menu's. Include for
interfacing with Nurse call system distribution infrastructure. Provide all necessary works
coordination and interfaces to enable full operational control of television apparatus within
room from local handset .
PRODUCTS
310 UHF ANTENNAE

• Approval: CAI Benchmark.
• Forward gain: Submit proposals.
• Front/ back ratio: Submit proposals.
• Channel group: Submit Proposals.
320 FM ANTENNAE
• Approval: CAI Benchmark
• Forward gain dB(i): Submit proposals.
• Front/ back ratio dB(i): Submit proposals.
330 DAB ANTENNAE

• Forward gain: Submit proposals.
• Front/ back ratio: Submit proposals.

350 MASTHEAD AMPLIFIERS

• Type: Wideband.
• Channel group:
- 21-37 Group A;
- 35-53 Group B;
- 48-68 Group C/D;
- 35-68 Group E;
- 21-48 Group K; and
- 21-68 Group W.
• Frequency:
- DAB 217.5 - 230 MHz;
- FM 87.5 -108 MHz; or
- UHF 470-862 MHz.
• Noise (maximum): <3 dB.
• Gain: Submit proposals.
• Impedance:
- Input and output terminals: 75 ohm.
• Mains 230 V connection: Required.
360 EQUALIZERS
• Type: Band pass and Cluster levellers.
• Transmitter source: Submit Proposals.
• Signal loss: Submit proposals.
370 LAUNCH AMPLIFIERS

• Type: Quad band.
• Output power (dB µV) Submit proposals.
• Frequency: FM 87.5-108 MHz.
• Gain: Submit proposals.
• Impedance:
- Input and output terminals: 75 ohm.
380 MULTISWITCHES
• Frequency:
- Satellite bandwidth: 950-2150 MHz.
- Terrestrial bandwidth: 47-862 MHz.
• Inputs:
- IF: Submit Proposals.
- Wideband UHF-VHF: Submit Proposals.
• Outputs Submit Proposals.
• Satellite signal loss Submit Proposals.
• Terrestrial signal loss Submit Proposals.
• Switching: 13 V, 18 V, 13 V/ 22 kHz, 18 V/ 22 kHz.

390 DIPLEXERS
• Type:
- Diplexed (radio and TV);
- Double F satellite master outlet (radio, TV and satellite 1 and 2);
- Single F satellite;
- Single IEC radio or TV out; and
- Triplexed (radio, TV and satellite).
410 TELEVISION OUTLETS

• Manufacturer: RJ45 data plates to match data plates installed elsewhere. MK or equal
approved.
• Type:
- Diplexed (radio and TV);
- Double F satellite master outlet: (radio, TV and satellite 1 and 2);
- Single IEC radio or TV out;
- Triplexed (radio, TV and satellite); and
- Submit proposals.
• Colour: White matching electrical accessories.
• Frequency range: Submit proposals.
EXECUTION
620 INSTALLING ANTENNAE AND DISHES

• Installation: In accordance with the CAI Code of practice for the Installation of terrestrial
and satellite TV reception systems.
• Locations: Roof mounted at Level 7.
• Position: Protect from windblast by coordinating with Level 7 plant rooms and building
maintenance units..
• Mounting: Wall.
- Concrete base: Required.
• Planning permission: Required.

640 INSTALLING CABLING

• Installation: In accordance with the CAI Code of practice for the installation of terrestrial
• Route: via dedicated main containment routes as per drawing series 1005885 (65)Series
drawing. Final containment runs are not depicted on these drawings which will be detailed
by the contractor.
conditions.
• Bending radius (minimum): 10 times outside diameter of cable.
• Cable fixing: Do not staple.
650 INSTALLING AMPLIFIERS

• Location: As close as practicable to aerial and Submit proposals.
660 INSTALLING OUTLET PLATES

• Mounting: Recessed.
- Height (finished floor level to underside of equipment): Outlet points to be mounted
behind televisions. Refer to Architect's setting out details..
• Minimum depth of backboxes: 35 mm.
670 CONNECTION TO LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

• Connection: In accordance with the CAI Code of practice for the installation of terrestrial
COMPLETION
910 TESTING AND INSPECTION

• Tests:
- At receivers: In accordance with CAI Code of Practice for the Installation of terrestrial
and satellite TV reception systems. Signal output level at each head end and amplifier:
Measure.
- Carrier to noise ratio at outlets: Measure.
- Outlets to be tested: All.
920 DOCUMENTATION
- Number of copies 3 + electronic.

• Fuses: Supply two spares for every type and rating.
940 MAINTENANCE

W30
Telecommunications systems

W30 Telecommunications systems
GENERAL
110 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM The requirements are for a full complete fully
operational telecommunications system to serve the complete telecommunication
requirements of the project. The contractor will engage the services of a system specialist
from the schedule of preferred suppliers and manufacturers to carry out the installation.
The telecommunications shall be installed as Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP) and shall
be installed as part of the data distribution network as section W31.
Pass through technology shall be used to allow voice communications and computers to
connect to the same Cat 6 cabling installation. The Trust shall also install a Vocera mobile
communications system which will operate over the wireless and hard wired data networks
described in Section W31. The Contractor will not install the Vocera system which will be
independently procured by the Trust. The system will be utilised to transmit and
distribute a wide variety of data from discrete systems, such as, Security/access control
Vocera, BMS Nurse call, patient recording, Endoscope processing etc
Emergency phone lines use in lifts and for redcare notifications will not be connected into
the data network; The Contractor will wire these as separate analogue phone lines
directly connected to the Security Office.
The Contractor will install analogue phone lines within the Main reception for 2 off
payphones and 1 off taxi phone which will only connect to approved local taxi companies
(numbers to be provided by the Trust )
• System manufacturer: Cabling will be a mixture of fibre and copper as per Section W31.
Telephone handsets will not be provided by this contract.
• Type of system: Voice Over IP.
• Method of operation: Digital.
• UPS: As section V44.
• Connection to public telephone network: Required.
• Distribution panels: Required.
• Cables: As per W31.
• Cabling topology:
- Backbone cabling: As section W31.
- Horizontal cabling: As section W31.
• Telecommunications outlets: RJ45 Data outlets.
• Terminal devices: Required.
• Payphones: Not required.
• Operator consoles: Not required.
• Lightning protection: As section W60.
• Transient over-voltage surge suppression devices: As section Y67.
• Accessories: Call information logging equipment.

120 CONTAINMENT The voice communications shall use the data containment network
cabling and containment.
• Containment: Cable basket, as section Y63.
• Draw wires: Provide in conduit drops.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the telecommunications system.
- Standards: To BS 6701 and BS EN 50174-1.
- Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers'
- Cabinet general arrangements.
- Cabling topology schematics.
- Distribution point layouts.
- Equipment room layouts.
- Interconnection diagrams.
- Work area layouts.
250 RESILIENCE
• Resilience: Submit design and cost proposals.
• Fall back facility: Submit design and cost proposals.
• Spare capacity: Submit design and cost proposals.
260 INTERCONNECTIONS WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

• Systems to interconnect: As detailed below but not limited to
- Access control system, as section W40;
- Lift alarm, as section X10; and
- Lighting control systems, as section V51
- Nurse Call System
- Vocera
- BMS
- Fire alarm
- Television
- CCTV,
- Radio
.
• Requirements: Provisions will enable two way data transmission between systems. All
infrastructure will be provided and installed to meet the requirements..
PRODUCTS

• Standards: To BS 6701 and BS EN 50174-1.

320 MAIN SWITCHING DEVICE

• Manufacturer: System specialist.
• Type:
- Expandable;
- Modular; and
- Rack mountable.
• Facilities:
- Automated attendant;
- Automated call distribution (ACD);
- Automatic dialling;
- Automatic route selection;
- Call divert;
- Call recording;
- Carrier pre-select (CPS);
- Clamp-on;
- Conference calling;
- Digital enhanced cordless telephony (DECT);
- Direct dialling inward (DDI);
- Emergency switching;
- Failed transfer;
- Group hunting;
- Intrusion facilities;
- Least cost routing;
- Music on hold;
- Priority extension facility;
- Remote dial-in maintenance; and
- Voicemail.
• Power supply rating: Incorporate appropriate supply rating with proposals.
330 DISTRIBUTION PANELS

• Sizes: 200 pair and Submit proposals.
• Spare capacity: 30%.
• Cable termination: BT insulation displacement connection type.
• Identification label: Required.
335 COPPER VOICE CABLES

• Standards: To BS EN 50288-6-2 and To BS EN 50406-2 .
• BT references:
- CW 1308/LSF;
- CW 1128/1252; and
- CW 1600.
- Submit proposals
• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice of preferred suppliers.
- Submit proposals
- Product reference: Submit Proposals.
- Submit proposals
• Sizes: 100 pair and Contractor's choice.
• Spare pairs in distribution cables: 30%.

340 FUNCTIONAL EARTH CABLES

• Type: BT reference CW 1044.
• Sizes: 25 mm² and Submit proposals.
345 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES

• Standards: To BS EN 60794-2 and To BS EN 60794-3.
• Types: Singlemode.
• Sizes: 62.5/ 125 µm.
• Category: OM3.
• Optical fibre strands: 48.
• Accessories: Pulling eye.
350 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS

• Standards: To BS 6312-2.1 and BS 6312-2.2.
• Types : RJ 45 socket.
• Cable termination: BT insulation displacement connection type.
• Mounting: Flush.
• Plate:
- Finish: White.
- Insert colour: Match plate finish.
360A TERMINAL DEVICES

• Terminal devices shall be supplied separately and do not form part of this contract.
365 PAYPHONES Install two payphones to the Ward Block Main Reception area
• Types:
- Coin operated;
- Credit card operated; and
- Phonecard operated.
• Handsets fitted with inductive couplers: Required.
• Facilities: Fast dial key type and Outgoing calls only.
370 ACOUSTIC HOODS Install acoustic hoods to Main Reception payphones

• Type: Submit proposals.
- Mounting: Wall.
• Colour and finish: white and clear.
375 OPERATOR CONSOLES

• Manufacturer: N/A.
- Product reference: Connect to existing Main Hospital Switchboard.

380 CALL INFORMATION LOGGING EQUIPMENT

• Monitoring and reporting facilities:
- Busy and quiet extensions;
- Departmental summaries;
- Designated number usage;
- Duration and cost of calls;
- Exchange utilisation;
- Frequently dialled numbers;
- Generation of accounts ;
- Individual extension usage;
- Operator time to answer;
- Percentage usage of exchange lines; and
- Private line usage.
385A EXTENSION RINGERS

• Terminal Devices shall be supplied separately and do not form part of this contract
EXECUTION

• Type of installation: Flush.
• Equipment: Provide electricity supplies to equipment requiring power. Derive from a
dedicated circuit from the main switchboard.
620 CONNECTION TO THE PUBLIC TELEPHONE NETWORK

• Public telephone network: Connect to the main telecommunication distribution frame.
625 INSTALLING MAIN SWITCHING DEVICES

• Location: As drawings .
• Connection to power supply: Double pole isolator.
• Clear access (minimum):
- Front: 1000 mm.
- Rear: 1000 mm.
- Sides: 600 mm.
640 INSTALLING DISTRIBUTION PANELS

• Location: As drawings.
- Front: 1000 mm.
- Sides: 600 mm.
• Earthing: Provide functional earth connected to building main earth terminal.
- Cable size: 10 mm².

660 INSTALLING COPPER VOICE CABLING

• Standards: To BS 7671, BS EN 50174-2, BS EN 50174-3 and TIA/ EIA-568-B.1.
• Routes: As drawing.
• Segregation: Segregate from other cabling. Where installed in trunking, locate in a
dedicated telecommunications compartment.
conditions.
• Orientation: Dress cables flat, free from twists, kinks and strain.
• Cable binders: Reusable plastics wrap around cable ties and Reusable hook and loop
wrap around cable ties.
- Spacing (minimum):
Horizontal cabling: 2 m.
Vertical cabling: 1 m.
• External cabling: Terminate within 2 m of entrance to building.
665 INSTALLING FUNCTIONAL EARTH CABLING

• Routes: Submit proposals, to follow distribution infrastructure.
670 INSTALLING OPTICAL FIBRE CABLING

• Routes: To follow distribution routes.
• Jointing method: Fusion splicing.
conditions.
• Cable binders: Reusable plastics wrap around cable ties and Reusable hook and loop
wrap around cable ties.
Horizontal cabling: 2 m.
Vertical cabling: 1 m.
680 INSTALLING TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

• Locations: As drawings.
• Final fix of outlet faceplates: Fit after completion of building painting.
720 INSTALLING CALL INFORMATION LOGGING EQUIPMENT

• Location: As drawing.
• Connection to power supply: Double Pole Isolating Switch.
- Front: 1000 mm.
- Sides: 600 mm.

COMPLETION
910 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

• Testing and inspection agent: Data System manufacturer.
• Notice before commencing tests: 72 h.
• Inspection of cabling: Inspect cables for kinks, bends, snags and compression and
deformation damage.
• Interconnections with other systems: Verify.
• Equipment calibration for performance testing: Submit evidence.
- Format: Schedule of outlets
920 DOCUMENTATION
925 LABELLING
• Standard: to BS EN 50174-3.
• Cabling topology schematics:
- Location: Main telephone exchange.
- Format: A1 paper print.
- Installation: In glazed frame, wall mounted with cup and screw fixings.
• Equipment: Label with unique identifier.
- Type: Face engraved rigid plastic laminate.
• Cable schedules:
- Location: Building telephone exchange.
- Format: Card within a reusable clear plastics envelope.
- Size: A5.
- Contents: Outgoing cable designation and destination
• Cable labels: Wrap-around machine-printed label with cable identifier.
- Location: Within 100 mm of each termination.
• Outlet labels: Machine printed adhesive label with extension identifier.
- Format: Submit proposals.
940 MAINTENANCE
- Level of maintenance: system infrastructure Hardware and software excluding terminal
devices.

W31
Data distribution systems

W31 Data distribution systems
GENERALdescriptive information for the data installation here;
The IT network shall consist of the following main elements;
• Incoming data connections from BT and Virgin Media

• Containment system for all network backbone cabling including blown fibre routes from the
External Server room to all hub rooms located around the building via a switching room on
Level 0
• Hub rooms installed with two off, Krone APF frames per room
• Servers, switches and patch panels at Server room
• Servers, switches, in rack UPS's and patch panels at Hub rooms
• Horizontal Cat 6 cabling from Hub rooms to final termination points (RJ45 outlets) which
could be wall recessed, bedhead trunking or floor box mounted to suit.
• Horizontal Cat 6 cabling from Hub rooms to Wi-Fi termination points, two Cat 6 cables to
each Wi-Fi point
• Patch leads
Constraints and responsibilities

The Contractor shall provide and install the following equipment;
• All incoming ductwork and containment for BT and Virgin Media cabling to connect to the
Level 1 Server Room. BT will be installed from two locations (East side Level 2 and West
side at high Level under the Link bridge connecting to Level 1. Virgin Media will be
installed form the East side of the Building at Level 2.
• All outgoing containment and ductwork to connect a fibre network to other buildings within
the Ulster Hospital Estate
• All containment systems for backbone cabling including blown fibre containment with 50%
spare capacity to each hub room
• All backbone cabling OM3 & OS2 (fibre)
• All reserve/back up backbone cabling (CAT 6 copper)
• All distributed Cat 6 Cabling and final termination face plates
• All cabinets to server room, generally 42U and quantities as per server room layouts.
• All Krone APF frames to hub rooms (two per hub room)
• All high integrity earthing to Server and hub rooms. *Note all small power used will have
high integrity earthing
• Patch panels
• Patch leads of the same standard and data rate as the Cat 6 cabling (quantities to be
confirmed by Trust IT)
The Employer (Trust IT) shall provide the following equipment;

• All active network equipment; servers, switches, rack mounted UPS to hub rooms and Wi-Fi
access points, VOIP Phones, Vocera Phones, PC’s and Printers

Backbone fibre cabling requirements

The backbone fibre is required to support Ethernet data transmission at data rates of up to
10 Gbps. Where the actual cable run is less than 300 m it will be acceptable to use 50/125
µm OM3 grade multimode fibre. Where the actual cable run exceeds this length, it will be
necessary to use 9/125µm OS2 grade singlemode fibre.
The backbone fibre will be terminated with LC duplex connectors.
Backbone fibres between the Acute Services Block server room and other buildings Server
Rooms will be run on diverse routes in separate ducts via separate risers. The minimum
separation between ducts is to be 30 m. Within each building the separation between the
routes to the two central server rooms will be maintained as far as possible and use
separate risers. There is no minimum separation within the hub / patch rooms.
The main runs between buildings will be a loose-tube, gel-free, armoured cable that is
rated for external and internal use in ducts and risers without the need for a transition
splice. This allows the fibre to be brought into the server rooms for direct termination.
The sub-distribution within a building will be a similar loose-tube, riser-rated cable with a
toughened jacket but does not need to be armoured.
Back up 'reserve' system

As a system reinforcement the Contractor shall install a back up copper network to support
the fibre backbone in the event of a catastrophic failure to the main backbone network.
The copper cable network shall consist of 12x4 pair CAT 6 UTP. The copper network
installation shall follow the same principles as the fibre network and shall be installed via
segregated and disparate routes to each hub room to prevent a catastrophic failure in a riser
fully disconnecting the copper network.
Horizontal CAT-6 cabling requirements

Horizontal CAT-6 cabling is required to support Ethernet data transmission at up to 1 Gbps
to desk, wall or floorbox outlets. Cable lengths shall not exceed 90 m (actual cable run
length) from the patch panel to the information outlet. The Acute Services Block will utilise
VoIP telephone technology for staff communications, there will however be a small number
of BT direct exchange lines connected to alarm receiving centres 'ARC' including lift alarms
and fire alarm that will require a small number of analogue backbone pairs.
Administration or Nurse workstations VoIP systems may share a single data socket by
pass through technology for both the phone and the PC, however in line with Trust IT
policy four RJ45 data outlets and three twin switched socket outlets (tsso) are required per
person / workstation
At each bed-head three CAT-6 sockets will be provided (two for medical use and one for
future patient entertainment).
Wi-Fi
A pair of CAT-6 cables connecting to twin Wi-Fi outlets are required for each wireless access
point. The wireless access points do not require 230 Vac as they can be powered over the
CAT-6 cable from the network switch as a Power over Ethernet (PoE) system. Wireless
access points will be Trapeze (Juniper). At every internal Wi-Fi point 5 meters spare of data
cable shall be left prior to the termination to allow for adjustments to the Wi-Fi coverage
during final surveying of the Wi-Fi network distribution.
Wi-Fi coverage will be provided as full coverage to the entire building including all plant
spaces, stairwells, public areas and service support areas. Within areas with radiation
shielding a Wi-Fi point will be located in each room of that particular radiation shielded area.

External Wi-Fi
The contractor shall install an external Wi-Fi network to provide full coverage for Vocera
voice communications (Vocera by others). The external Wi-Fi network shall provide
coverage to the following areas;
• Level 7 Roof Plant and plant rooms
• Level 3 Roof terraces 1 and 7
• All internal courtyards
• Level 2 Ambulance Entrance
• Level 1 Plant service yard and light wells
• All External pathways within 10m of the building
• The loop road to the West of the Building
It should be noted that an external duct network has been installed as part of the enabling
works which connect to the North Loop road, however all other containment and routes will
be installed by the electrical contractor as part of this contract. External drawings will detail the
routes.
110 DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GENERALLY

• Applications: CSMA/ CD 1000Base-T (ISO/IEC 8802-3 gigabit Ethernet) and Voice (digital).
• Cabling hierarchy:
- Campus distributors (CD): Cabinets.
- Campus backbone cabling: Optical fibre cabling.
- Building distributors (BD): Krone Frames within hub rooms.
- Building backbone cabling: Optical fibre cabling.
- Floor distributors (FD): Balanced twisted-pair cabling patch panels.
- Horizontal cabling: Balanced twisted-pair cabling.
- Consolidation points (CP): Balanced twisted-pair cabling patch panels.
- Consolidation point cabling: Balanced twisted-pair cabling.
- Telecommunications outlets (TO): Balanced twisted-pair cable outlets.
- Work area cabling: Patch cords.
• Cabling topology:
- Campus backbone: Ring.
- Building backbone cabling: Submit design and cost proposals.
- Horizontal cabling: Star.
• Accessories: Transient over-voltage surge suppression, as section Y67.

120 CONTAINMENT Incoming duct points must be met by main containment with blown fibre
provision to take the incoming cables to the server room to ensure the cable(s) are not
unsupported at any point. Incoming routes from the East and West sides of the building
must be diverse and as far as reasonably practical must be installed to separate fire
compartments (a common point of termination within a single fire compartment is
acknowledged)
The electrical contractor shall install cable containment routes; generally main routes will
be provided with galvanised cable baskets with final conduit down drops concealed in walls
terminating to single or double gang steel back boxes. The data cabling specialist shall
procure, install, test and commission all data wiring. Conduits above non accessible
bedroom ceilings which terminate to recessed back boxes within walls or bedhead trunking
must have a pull-in points with draw tapes located above the accessible ceiling panels to
allow future cable changes or additions without the need to disrupt or break into ceiling
finishes.
For horizontal final distribution all containment bending radii and back box depths will
allow for the required performance criteria for Cat6 cabling.
Vertical distribution; containment within risers by galvanised cable basket

Horizontal distribution; containment within ceiling voids by galvanised cable basket
Final distribution; containment within ceiling voids terminating at recessed outlets by
galvanised 25mm conduit (final containment design / coordination by the contractor)
• Containment: Cable basket as section Y63 .
• Rewireable installation: Required .
• Concealed installation: Required .
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Standards:
- To BS EN 50173-1;
- To BS EN 50173-2;
- To BS EN 50173-3;
- To BS EN 50173-4;
- To BS EN 50173-5;
- To BS EN 50174-1; and
- To ISO/IEC 11801.
• Design: Complete the design of the data distribution system.
literature.
- Drawings. Include:
Cabinet general arrangement drawings.
Cabling topology schematics.
Distribution point layout drawings.
Equipment room layout drawings.
Interconnection diagrams.
Work area layout drawings.
230 CHANNEL PERFORMANCE

• Balanced twisted-pair cabling class (minimum): E.
• Optical fibre class (minimum): OF-300 for use internally within the Acute Services Block
building. OF-2000 for cables connecting elsewhere..

240 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

• Requirements: Telecommunications shall be Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) and
connect via RJ45 terminations with the exception of analogue phone lines installed as
'emergency phone lines' for Lifts and redcare. Emergency lines shall be dedicated
analogue lines connected directly to BT telephone exchange and not via the data network.
Provision shall be given to payphones and Taxi phones at the main entrance. .
250 RESILIENCE
• Spare capacity: 50% spare backbone cabling and blown fibre capacity. One spare
horizontal final data cable to each room with more than 5 data connections.
260 CONNECTIONS WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

• Requirements: As detailed below but not limited to
- Lift alarm, as section X10; and
- Lighting control systems, as section V51
- Nurse Call System
- Vocera
- BMS
- Fire alarm
- Television
- CCTV,
- Radio
Provisions shall enable two way data transmission between systems. All infrastructure
shall be provided and installed to meet the requirements.
290 NON LINEAR LOADS

• Precautions to prevent neutral overload: Use adequate cross-section for the neutral
conductor, at least identical to the phase conductor, to cope with unbalanced loads and
triple harmonics, provide appropriate harmonic filtration.
PRODUCTS

320A BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR CABLES GENERALLY

• Manufacturer: Systimax.
- Product reference: 71 Series GigaSPEED XL (LSZH) Type 3071 E.
• Category: 6UTP.
• Impedance: 100 ohm.
• Screening: Not Required.
• Number of pairs: 4
• Conductors: Solid.
- Size: 24 AWG (0.51 mm).
• Sheath:
- Type: Low smoke zero halogen (LSZH).
- Colour: White.

330A SINGLE MODE OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES to be used where cable lengths exceed 300m
• Standard:
- Singlemode: To BS EN 60793-2-50.
• Manufacturer: SE Trust approved supplier.
• Physical characteristics: Singlemode.
• Category: OS2
• Environment: Outdoors / indoors without petroleum fill (LSOH).
330B MULTIMODE OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES Where specified

• Standard:
- Multimode: To BS EN 60793-2-10.
• Manufacturer: SE Trust approved supplier.
• Physical characteristics: Multimode 50/ 125 µm.
• Category: OM3.
• Environment: Indoors (LSOH).
370 HARDWARE CONNECTIONS GENERALLY

• Balanced twisted-pair cabling terminations: Insulation displacement method to BS EN
60352-3 and -4.
- Pin assignment to BS EN 50174-1 Annex B: Option A (T568B).
• Optical fibre terminations: LC (duplex).
• Accessories: Strain relief boot.

400 CABINET
• Type: 19 inch racking with front and rear adjustable rails.
• Manufacturer: Refer to schedule of preferred suppliers and Manufacturers.
• Size:
- Width: 600 mm.
- Depth: Network 1000mm/Server 1200mm.
- Height: 42 U.
• Enclosure:
- Mounting: Free standing.
- Material: Steel.
- Finish: Black powder coating.
- Front door: Ventilated with lock.
- Rear door: Split Rear Door Ventilated with lock.
- Side panels: Removable.
- Handles: Recessed side mounted.
- Base: Height adjustable supports.
• Cabinet locks: Common key.
• Ventilation: Front to back.
• Power: Integral.
• Vertical power modules with outlets mounted at rear and master power switch at front: Req
uired.
- Arrangement: 2 per side.
- Outlets to BS 1363-2: rated at 32Amp 20no. IEC 60320 C13 10A with retaining clip.
• Lighting: Not required.
• Space for active equipment: 42U.
• Cable entry with grommets: Bottom/Top.
• Horizontal cable supports: 1 U for each 48 port patch panel with 1 U spare.
- Covers: Required.
• Vertical cable supports: Left and right hand sides.
- Support spacing: 8 U.
• Spare U sections: Provide individual blanking plates.

400A FRAMES To maximise the use of available space each Hub Room will be fitted with data
frames as an alternative to data cabinets. 42U Data Frame accommodating up to 42 1U
panels and 1000+ patch cords
• Type: 19 inch racking with front and rear adjustable rails.
• Manufacturer: Krone.
- Product reference: APF.
• Size:
- Width: 985mm .
- Depth: 501mm .
- Height: 2232mm .
• Enclosure:
- Mounting: Free standing.
- Material: Steel.
- Finish: Manufacturers Standard.
- Front door: N/A.
- Rear door: N/A.
- Side panels: N/A.
- Handles: Not required.
- Base: Height adjustable supports.
• Ventilation: N/A Open Rack.
• Power: Integral.
• 1 U horizontal mounted power modules with outlets mounted at rear and master power
switch at front: Required.
- Arrangement: 1 at top of cabinet.
- Outlets to BS 1363-2: 6.
• Vertical power modules with outlets mounted at rear and master power switch at front: Required.
- Arrangement: 1 per side rated at 16amp.
- Outlets to BS 1363-2: 6.
• Lighting N/A
• Space for active equipment: 42U.
• Cable entry with grommets: Bottom and Top.
• Horizontal cable supports: 1 U for each 48 port patch panel with 1 U spare.
- Covers: Not required.
• Vertical cable supports: Left and right hand sides.
- Support spacing: 8 U.
• Spare U sections: Provide individual blanking plates.
• Accessories: Vented equipment shelf.
420 BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING PATCH PANELS

- Product reference: 24 way GigaSPEED XL 1100GS3.
• Height: 1 U.
• Ports with RJ-45 outlets: 24.
• Shielding: Not Required.
• Cable connections:
- Front: RJ-45.
- Rear: Insulation displacement connection (IDC)
• Outlet labelling:
- Front: Engraved port number with circuit description.

430 PATCH CORDS GENERALLY

• Standard: To TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.
• Category: 6 UTP
• Impedance: 100 ohm.
• Screening: Not Required.
• Number of pairs: 4.
• Conductors: Stranded.
- Size: 24 AWG.
• Sheath:
- Type: Low smoke zero halogen (LSZH).
- Colour: As Patch cord schedule.
• Length: 0.5m/1.0m/1.5m/2m.
• Connecting hardware: Factory fitted.
440 BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR CABLE OUTLETS GENERALLY

• Type: Single RJ-45, Twin RJ-45, Quad RJ-45.
• Manufacturer: Systimax .
- Product reference: MGS GigaSPEED XL .
• Screening: Match cabling.
• Plate:
- Finish: White.
- Insert colour: White.
• Module mounting: Angled.
• Cable termination: Insulation displacement connection (IDC).
• Spring loaded shutter: Required.
• Circuit designation label with transparent cover: Required.
450 FIBRE OPTIC CABLE OUTLETS GENERALLY

• Type: LC.
• Manufacturer: MK or equal approved.
• Mode of operation: Duplex
• Plate:
- Material: As Electrical accessory finishes schedule.
- Finish: As Electrical accessory finishes schedule.
- Insert colour: As Electrical accessory finishes schedule .
• Module mounting: Straight.
• Cable termination: LC.
• Circuit designation label with transparent cover: Required.
470 RJ-45 TO BT PLUG ADAPTORS

• Type: Fixed within telecommunications outlet.

480 WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS

• Type: Interior grade fire retardant plywood.
• Size: Submit proposals - to suit load capacity requirements.
- Thickness: 19 mm.
EXECUTION
615 SYSTEM INSTALLER

- Registration: Registered installer of the Fibre optic Industry Association (FIA).
- Evidence of registration: Submit.

• Standards:
- Indoor installations: To BS 6701 and BS EN 50174-2
- Outdoor installations: To BS 6701 and BS EN 50174-3.
630 CABLE INSTALLATION GENERALLY

conditions.
• Cables: Install in one uninterrupted run.
• Arrangement: Position vertically and horizontally in line with equipment served, and parallel
with building lines.
• Cable pulling: Do not overstress.
• Cable binders: Reusable hook and loop wrap around cable ties.
Horizontal cabling: 2000 mm.
Vertical cabling: 1000 mm.
• Cables routes generally:
- Concealed cable runs to wall accessories: Run vertically from the accessory.
- Exposed cable runs: Submit proposals.
• Cables from other systems: Segregate and cross at right angles.
- Distance from steam and low temperature hot water systems running parallel: 500 mm
minimum.
• Terminations: Support cable within 150 mm of termination.
• Balanced twisted-pair cabling:
- Maximum untwist at terminations: 12 mm.
640 SPARE CABLING

• Spare cable length at termination points (minimum): Sufficient to allow 3 re-terminations.
650 INSTALLING OPTICAL FIBRE CABLING

• Jointing method: Fusion splicing.
680 INSTALLING CONNECTING HARDWARE

• Connecting hardware: Consistent throughout system.
690 EARTHING AND BONDING

• Incoming low voltage connection earthing characteristics: As section V11.
• Requirements: As section V81.

720 INSTALLING CABINETS

• Cable termination sequence: Left to right and bottom to top.
- Cabinet front: 1.2 m
- Cabinet rear: 1.2 m.
- Cabinet sides: N/A.
• Fixing: Level and secure to floor or wall.
• Interconnecting cabinets: Connect without side panels with manufacturer's baying kit.
• Cabinet identification: Face engraved rigid plastic laminate.
- Colour:
Background: White.
Lettering: Black.
- Typography:
Font: Helvetica medium.
- Sizes: Submit proposals.
730A INSTALLING WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

• Equipment : Group into logical arrangements.
• Mounting: Plywood backboards treated with flame retardant intumescent paint for wood
surfaces
770 CONNECTION TO THE PUBLIC TELEPHONE NETWORK

• Public telephone network: Connect to the main telecommunication cabinet.
- Cable type: BT specification CW1308.
- Pairs: 200 pair.
780 INSTALLING TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS Outlets to be RJ45 to operate with

VoIP equipment via the horizontal cabling network.
• Locations: As indicated in small power and data drawings (62) Series.
• Arrangement:
- Coordinate with other wall mounted equipment.
- Positioning: Accurate and square to verticlal and horizontal axes.
- Alignment: Align adjacent accessories on the same vertical or horizontal axis.
- Fixing: Secure, plumb and level.
• Mounting heights (finished floor level to underside of outlet plate): Pat 'M' compliant. Refer
to Architect's setting out details .
• Separation distance between adjacent accessories (minimum): 20 mm.
• Outlet faceplates: Fit after completion of building painting.
COMPLETION
910 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

• Standards: To BS EN 50346 and BS EN 61935-1.
• Testing and inspection agent: System manufacturer.
• Notice before commencing tests: 72 h.
• Inspection of cabling: Inspect cables for kinks, bends, snags and compression and
deformation damage.
• Performance testing:
- Equipment calibration: Submit evidence.
- CAT 6/Clause E to ANSI/TIA 568-C.2
• Channel length: Measure.
• Pin assignment and continuity: Verify and submit results.
• Cable temperature during testing: Submit.
- Format: Schedule of equipment and outlets

920 DOCUMENTATION

• Cable terminations: Supply 30 of each type.
• Telecommunication outlets: N/A.
• IDC punch down tool: Supply 2.
• Patch cord spares:
- Quantity: 10 of each length/colour.
- Cabinet keys: 4 of each type.
940 MAINTENANCE
950 LABELLING
• Cabling topology schematics:
- Location: Main server room.
- Format: Glazed A1 size paper print.
- Installation: Wall mounted with cup and screw fixings.
• Equipment: Label with unique identifier.
• Cable schedules:
- Location: At each cabinet.
- Format: Clear encapsulated card.
- Size: A4.
- Contents: Outgoing cable designation, purpose and destination
• Patch panels: Machine printed label with patch panel identifier
- Outlet ports: Machine printed label with circuit description.
• Cables: Wrap around machine printed label with cable identifier.
- Location: Within 100 mm of each termination and Every 5 m throughout the cable
length.
• Outlets: Machine printed label with circuit description.
- Format: unique identity label to each individual cable. The identity should always refer
the reader back to the source point of the cable..
980 SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY

• Performance warranty: Required.
• Warrant operation with the following applications: CSMA/ CD 1000Base-T (gigabit
Ethernet).
• Warranty period: 20 y.

W40
Access control systems

W40 Access control systems
GENERAL
110 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Access Control will be installed to control and define public
access areas and staff access areas. The Access Control system shall operate via a stand
alone data network.
Two or four door controllers shall be employed to reduce the number of door control units
and associated spur points required on the project.
The Trust has introduced a single user card policy for all building operations that require an
identity card. Access Control system, controllers and readers shall be capable of
operating, integrating with and utilising HID cards as the single card system used on site.
The cards shall be 'Iso-thin' HID cards
Access control to main ward entrances (1 main entrance per ward) shall be capable of
being switched off at visiting times to allow access to individual wards as deemed
appropriate. Access control to the secondary (staff) entrance to wards from the building
'hotlink' shall remain operational at all times except during a fire alert in the fire
compartment or adjacent fire compartment. Note; only door access doors which are on
designated escape route shal de-activate during a fire alarm event.
Video intercoms shall be employed at Ward Entrances to prevent public or non-authorised

access. The video intercom shall intergrade with the IP Nurse Call system to allow
images and voice data to be presented at the Nursecall graphical user interfaces provided
at Nurse Stations. There shall be three nurse stations per ward, all three shall have
communications with Video intercoms for both the Main Door and the secondary ward door
to each ward. It is required that video intercoms signals can be routed via the wifi network
locally within each ward to stream live onto tablet computers held by nursing staff within
the individual ward that has had the video intercomm activated.
The Nurse shall be capable of assessing the person activating the video intercom with
voice and visual indication on the tablet pc. The nurse will be capable of sending a door
unlock signal via the wifi system to allow access to the ward if appropriate. Unless stated
otherwise, it is expected that talet pc's will operate on the current Microsoft Windows
operating system or its successor at the time of installation.
Individual door release button's for both ward exit / entrance doors will be provided at all
three Nurse Stations in each ward.
Certain doors shall be capable of limited time hold open to allow patient beds or patient
wheel chairs to be pushed through the door without staff having to hold the door. Where
this functionality is required the access control system shall be provided with the
appropriate integral time delay mechanism to effect requirements.
Within the A&E department there will be access control installed on all doors that lead to
medical assessment areas. There will also be a requirement to install a lock down of the
department should rioting ensue within the A&E department.

Blue Route requirements

The door access system shall fully integrate with the Internet Protocol (IP) Nursecall
system for activation of the Blue route during a cardiac or related emergency response.
The Blue route shall fulfil the following function; On activation of a cardiac request at the
bedhead via the nurse call system, The 'crash team' will originate from Level 3 Cardiology within
the Generic Ward Block and advance to the Ward and room from where the activation request
has been initiated. When responding to a request from another floor level the crash team will
use the lift at Stair core 2 (North) to access all levels of the building with the Acute Block served
via the link corridor.

The Stair Core 2 lift shall auto park at Level 3 during a blue route event with the lift doors in
the open position. The lift will be fitted with an HID proximity control access card which will
allow the lift to be sent to a floor by the occupants provided the occupants have the Crash
Team group stetting on their proximity cards. After delivering the crash team members to
the floor called on the lift car control panel the lift should return to Level 3 with its door open
incase of further Crash Team member movements towards the activation point. This
process will continue until the Blue Route activation has been reset.
The blue route is controlled by the Nursecall system and will unlock door access doors
which are designated as being on the blue route during a blue route cardiac event. After
the event / when the blue route activation has been reset all door access doors will return
to normal operation. Any auto doors on the blue route should open until the blue route
system is reset.
The Contractor will provide a door access system and autodoor system cause and effects
and develop the cause and effects as the detail design is carried out post contract.
Auto doors
In addition to door access controls that hold doors closed, the contractor shall install a
number of auto doors which open on approach to allow staff through unhindered. Auto
doors on the hotlink shall cater for beds and laundry trolleys being pushed through the
doors
• Standards: To BS EN 50133-1 and in accordance with BS EN 50133-7.
• Manufacturer: Inner Range.
- Registration: A member of BSIA or A Gold member of NSI.
• Operation in the event of mains failure: Access points remain secure except on escape
routes..
• Tokens: HID iCLASS 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card .
• Readers: Proximity readers.
• Standby battery supply: 24 h.
• Locking mechanisms: Magnetic locks and strike plates.
• Controls:
- Access control system controller;
- Door controllers; and
- Personal computer.
• Accessories:
- Access control point status monitoring devices;
- Card printer;
- Digital camera;
- Emergency break glass units; and
- Request to exit buttons.

130 A VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM Separate video intercom systems shall be provided
to each ward. Video intercom's shall be provided at each Ward entrance and to the main
entrance of the A&E department. On arrival at
the Ward Visitors will connect to the staff bases by one-way video link to allow staff to
assess the visitor prior to the door being operated. The video system system shall
incorporate facility to also integrate with additional systems particularly the Nurse call
system which shall be deemed a means of control monitoring of access to the ward(s) .
The video intercom shall be capable of streaming vive H.264 video signal's to tablet
computers carried by staff within the individual wards allowing Staff to deal with visitors
to the Wards without having to be at the Staff Bases. This will be an intercom over IP
system and should be capable of supporting Android, Windows or Apple OSX -
dependant on what tablets are used.
• Entrance panel: Required.
- Remote handsets: Desktop handsets at staff bases (3 per ward) .
• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of Preferred Suppliers and Manufacturers. The contractor
shall engage the services of a system specialist to design provide install test commission
integrate and interface the system with the access controls and nurse call system to effect
requirements..
• Product reference: Submit design and cost proposals.
• Audio communication: Two way.
• Video communication: One way.
• Video image: Colour.
• Remote door opening via handset: By door access system operated from one of three staff
bases in each ward..
• Calling method: Push button.
140 CABLING AND CONTAINMENT Cabling at all points in the network shall be concealed
and protected from unauthorised access. The Access control system shall operate on a
standalone data network which shall comprise of the following;
Video door entry panel / handset- Cat 6e cable
field devices - Belden 8 core alarm cable (proximity readers, push exits, mag locks etc)
Automatic door operators - Belden 8 core alarm cable
LAN - Belden 8723 LAN cable
• Cable type: Access control cables.
• Containment: Cable basket and conduit as section Y63.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the access control system.
literature.
220 ACCESS CONTROL POINTS All access control points and door controllers shall be
installed to the same recognition classes
• Recognition classification to BS EN 50133-1: Class 3.
• Access classification to BS EN 50133-1: Class B.
• Environmental classification to BS EN 50133-1: Class I and Class II locations to be
installed.
• Number of transactions (minimum): 2500 per 24 h.

230 CONNECTION TO FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• Operation in the event of a fire signal: Doors on the fire escape route shall automatically
disengage magnetic controls in the compartment affected by the fire signal and adjacent
compartments to each side, above and below. Doors which are not on a fire escape route
should remain locked
Operation in the event of a Blue Route signal: The routing of 'Blue Route' will be
dependant on the activation point of a cardiac alarm in the Nursecall system (dependant on
Ward) Where a Blue route activation affects any individual door the particular door will
receive an unlock signal from the local door controller. The door will remain unlocked until
the Blue Route activation has been cancelled The blue route shall be defined. t from the
The deactivation o the door shall be permitted via the sequential addressing
interconnection between the originating call point, the primary blue route to that point from
the serving lift core, and the intermediate access controlled door sets between those
points.
230A CONNECTION TO 'BLUE ROUTE' CRASH TEAM ACCESS SYSTEMS

• Operation in the event of a 'blue' signal: Doors on the 'blue' route shall automatically
disengage magnetic controls. Controls shall not be re-instated for 15 minutes or until reset
from the Main door Access Control Computer - which ever event takes place first.
240 INTEGRATION WITH OTHER ALARM AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

• Objectives: To complement and enhance communications and operational interfaces and
potential between access control , security, Nurse call, Fire alarm and BMS installations.
• Systems to be integrated:
- Closed circuit television systems as section W44;
- Intruder detection and alarm systems as section W41;
- Fire detection and alarm systems as section W50; and
- Central controls and building management systems as section Y40.
PRODUCTS
310 MULTIPLE TECHNOLOGY CARDS

• Type: Non-contact smart card with 13.56 MHz chip and antenna.
330 SMART CARDS

• Standard: To BS ISO/IEC 15693-2.
• Type: Non-contact 13.56 MHz smart chip and antenna.
• Physical characteristics: To ISO/IEC 7810.
• Printing capability: Two sided dye sublimation.
• Unique card identity: 64-bit fixed card serial number.
• Read and write capability: Required.
• Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM): 16 kbits.
- Data retention (minimum): 10 years.
• Application areas with individual 64-bit unique security key: 16.
• Removal of card from the radio frequency field: Complete write cycle.
• Accessories: Slot and neck strap.

370 SMART CARD READERS AND WRITERS

• Manufacturer: HID.
• Product reference: Omnikey.
• Operating frequency: 13.56 MHz.
• Antenna: Integral.
• Range: Up to 50 mm.
• Re-read delay: 1 s.
• Visual indication: LED displaying red when access point status secure, green when
unlocked.
• Audio status indication: Multiple tone sequences.
• Tamper detection: Required.
• Colour: Black.
400 ACCESS CONTROL CABLES

• Conductor:
- Nominal diameter: 0.22 m².
- Stranding: 7 x 0.2 mm.
• Sheath: LSZH.
• Cores (minimum): 6.
410 ELECTRIC STRIKES AND FACEPLATES

• Operating voltage: 24 V.
• Operation: Fail Secure in Pharmacy to prevent ingress without inhibiting egress
Fail unlocked in all other areas. Liaise and coordinate works to door sets, ironmongery and
installation with door systems specialist and ironmongery systems providers..
• Holding force (minimum): 13 kN.
420 MAGNETIC LOCKS AND STRIKE PLATES

• Material and finish: Brushed aluminium.
• Instant release circuit: Required.
• LED status indication: Door secure and Door unlocked.
430 SHEAR LOCKS AND STRIKE PLATES

• Material and finish: Brushed aluminium.
• Instant release circuit: Required.
• Mounting within door: Submit proposals.

450 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

- Product reference: 4 way intelligent door controller 4WIC .
• Type: Microprocessor based.
• Administration access: Password protected.
• Synchronise date and time: Once a day.
• ODBC compatible database:
- Users (minimum): 5000.
- Information fields per user:
Access period.
Access points.
Department.
Email address.
First name.
Holiday schedule.
Last name.
Photograph.
Telephone.
Token expiry.
Token number.
Visitor status.
- Spare information fields per user (minimum): 20.
- Import and export of database in ASCII format: Required.
• Monitor and record the following transactions and events:
- Forced access.
- Pass back attempt.
- Tamper.
- Transaction invalid.
- Transaction timed out.
- Transaction valid.
• Events and transactions: Data and time stamp.
• Customised event alarms: Display.
• Control features:
- Access point status monitoring.
- Anti pass back control: Not required.
- Auto unlock at predefined times.
- Configure access groups, grids and levels.
- Configure access point unlock time.
- Configure time grids, zones and slots.
- Daylight time saving.
- Display access point status on site and layout plans.
• Reports: Provide searchable information.
- Transaction and event reports:
By access point.
By area.
By department.
By time and date period.
By transaction type.
By user.
- Other reports:
Occupancy reports.
Time and attendance reports.
- Publishing: Export to pdf and Print.

455 DOOR CONTROLLERS

• Number of doors per controller: 1 or a pair of double doors.
• Door lock battery backup: Integral.
• Time between token presentation and door unlock (maximum): 0.3 s.
• Enclosure:
- Material: Steel.
- Finish: White.
- Tamper alarm: Required.
460 PERSONAL COMPUTERS

• Processor: Pentium IV 2.4 GHz.
• Read only memory (RAM): 512 MB.
• Hard disk:
- Capacity: 120 GB.
- Speed: 7200 rpm.
• Video card: Submit proposals.
• Sound card: On motherboard.
• DVD/ CD rewriter: Required.
• Network card: 10/100 base T Ethernet.
• Modem: V.92 56 kbits/s data, fax and voice..
• Monitor: 17 inch LCD
• Keyboard and mouse: Wired.
• Operating system: Windows XP.
465 ACCESS CONTROL POINT STATUS MONITORING DEVICES

• Type: Magnetic reed switch.
• Material: Aluminium.
470 CARD PRINTERS

• Type: Dual sided, 13.56 MHz, contact chip, and magnetic stripe encoding.
• Print:
- Method: Colour dye sublimation.
- Resolution: 300 dpi.
- Operation: Double sided.
- Speed (minimum): 60 cards/ h.
• Laminate: Hologram.
• Card feeder capacity: 200.

475 DIGITAL CAMERAS

• Effective pixels: 2 million.
• Focal range: 7.5-20 mm.
• Zoom:
- Optical: x4.
- Digital: x5.
• Features:
- Auto exposure.
- Auto focus.
- Integral LCD monitor.
• Integral flash: Required.
- Range: 0.5-3 m
• Power:
- Battery: Rechargeable Li-ion battery with charger.
- Mains powered.
• Image file format: JPEG.
• Connection to personal computer: Universal serial bus (USB).
• Tripod: Required.
480 EMERGENCY BREAK GLASS UNITS

- Product reference: Contractor to confirm. Breakglass's used in door access systems
should have 'collapsible' re-useable breakglasses that can be reset without having to
change the breakglass plate..
• Frangible element: Non-resettable.
• Colour: Green.
• Labelling: "EMERGENCY DOOR RELEASE".
• Mounting: Fully recessed.
490 REQUEST TO EXIT BUTTONS

- Finish: White.
• Engraving: "PUSH TO EXIT".
• Operation: Momentary.
• Illuminated button: Not required.
EXECUTION
620 INSTALLING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

• Standard: To BS EN 50133-1 and in accordance with BS EN 50133-7.
• Location of the access controller: above finished ceiling level .
• Token reader: Install next to system controller.

630 INSTALLING CABLING The data network cabling shall be installed to the main 'Security'
containment installation provided to all floors of the building. The electrical contractor shall
install final containment to door positions to allow the security specialist to install final
cables to the door controller positions. As part of a 'door set installation' the electrical
contractor shall install the final containment to card reader positions, break glass positions
and to magnetic lock positions..
• Route: Refer to 1005885 (65)Series drawings for main containment routes. Secondary
containment routes shall be designed and installed by the contractor.
conditions.
650 INSTALLING READERSHID card readers to be installed

• Mounting:
- Type: Wall, recessed cables to be contained within conduit downdrops.
- Height (finished floor level to underside of equipment): 900 mm.
690A INSTALLING VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEMS At each ward entrance

• Entrance panel:
- Mounting: Recessed.
- Location: at each public ward entrance and A&E Entrance.
• Handset locations: integral to panel.
• Labelling: Identify call buttons.
COMPLETION

• System programming:
- Configure user database and tokens.
Number of users: 3000 .
- Configure access permissions.
- Configure time grids, zones and slots.
• Cable testing:
• Access points: Verify the correct operation of reader and lock mechanism. Configure
unlock times.
• Standby supply: Verify operation in the event of a mains failure. Check capacity and submit
results.
- Charger: Verify operation.
• Equipment tamper detection: Verify operation.
920 EQUIPMENT LABELLING AND SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

• Access points and door controllers: Label with a unique identification code.
• System diagram: Provide showing the location and identity of all system equipment.
- Location: Next to the access system controller.

940 VIDEO INTERCOM TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

• Call button: Verify the operation of call buttons.
• Audio communication: Verify 2 way audio communication.
• Video image: Verify the operation of the video camera and remote display.
• Remote release: Verify the operation of remote door release facilities.
950 DOCUMENTATION

• Tokens to be supplied: 1000 of each type used.
970 MAINTENANCE

W41
Intruder detection and alarm systems

W41 Intruder detection and alarm systems
GENERAL The requirements are for the provision and installation of a full complete fully
operational intruder detection and alarm system with appropriate interfaces input outputs
etc to ancillary supporting, complementary and supported systems and infrastructure. The
system shall use a variety of detection methods to protect the building and nominated
spaces from intrusion. The contractor shall engage the services of an intruder detection
and alarm system specialist as indicated in the schedule of preferred suppliers and
manufacturers to complete the design, provide, supply, install, test, commission, set to
work, and certify the system provided.
110 INTRUDER DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM An intruder detection and alarm system
shall be installed to the main kitchen and servery area on Level 1.
An intruder detection and alarm system shall be installed to the internal automatic glass
doors located at Level 1&2 for use out of working hours.
An intruder detection and alarm system shall be installed to the Café for use out
with working hours.
An intruder detection and alarm system will be installed to Level 1 and level 7 plant areas.
An intruder detection and alarm system will be provided to serve the ward floors and
specialised process rooms (operating suites)
• System manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Registration: A member of BSIA or A Gold member of NSI.
• Grade: Grade 3 for Reception and the Café, Plant areas and specialised process
rooms (operating Suites)
• Power supply: Type A.
• Environmental classification: Class I to Reception and the Café.
• Areas to be protected: Café & Servery
• Perimeter protection: All external doors and windows.
• Detectors:
- Acoustic detectors ;
- Combined passive infra-red and microwave detectors ;
- Combined passive infra-red and ultrasonic detectors ;
- Passive infrared detectors ;
- Protective switches ; and
- Ultrasonic movement detectors .
• Cabling and containment:
- Cable type: Multi-core intruder alarm cable.
- Containment: Rigid conduit, as section Y60.
- Rewireable installation: Required.
- Concealed installation: Required.
• Warning devices:
- Internal: Electronic sounders and Xenon beacons.
- External:
- Sounders;
- To alarm receiving centre (ARC); and
- Main Security Office.
- Signalling method: Dual Signalling.
• Control and indicating equipment (CIE): Main control panel with integral keypad and
Remote keypad.

• Completion: Submit design and cost proposals.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the intruder detection and alarm system.
literature.

220 SYSTEM SETTING AND UNSETTING

• Design the system to accommodate the following entry and exit routes:
- Entry: 3 no. controlled entry points.
- Exit: 3 no. controlled exit points.
225 ZONING AND DEVICE IDENTIFICATION

• Zoning: Divide the installation into separately controlled and identifiable zones.
• Device identification: Individual address.
230 SPARE CAPACITY

• Spare capacity (minimum): 50 devices.
235 CONNECTION TO FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• Fire and fault signal: Accept and relay to the alarm receiving centre.
235A CONNECTION TO FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• Fire and fault signal: Accept and relay to the alarm receiving centre.
Isolate protected doors from monitoring regime where such doors fail open as part of fire
strategy. Maintain monitoring to protected doors which do not form part of monitoring
regime or are fail secure..
240 CONTINUOUS MONITORING

• Objective: Maintenance of intruder detection to access controlled doors which remain to be
protected during hours of operation. Plantrooms, Pharmacy etc.
• Continuous monitoring: All plant room doors.
242 POLICE RESPONSE

• Response: In accordance with Association of Chief Police Officers (England, Wales and
Northern Ireland) Security systems policy..

• Objectives: To operate and interact in a complementary and non -conflicting manner.
• Systems to be integrated: Fire detection and alarm systems as section W50
Assistance Call System as Section W53
Central Controls and Building Management Systems as Section Y40
Nurse Call System As Section W55
.
246 INTEGRATION WITH CCTV SYSTEMS

• Integration: In accordance with BS 8418.
248 GRADE 3 AND GRADE 4 STANDBY PERIOD

• Duration (minimum): 24 h.
250 DIGITAL COMMUNICATORS

• Standards: To BS EN 50136-1-3 and BS EN 50136-2-3.
252 DIRECT LINE SIGNALLING

• Standards: To BS EN 50136-1-2 and BS EN 50136-2-2.
257 PREVENTION OF SETTING FOR GRADE 3 SYSTEMS

• Conditions preventing system setting: Detector masked.

263 SUPPLEMENTARY PROCESSING OF SIGNALS FOR GRADE 3 OR 4 SYSTEMS

• System status, set:
- Response to hold-up signal/ message: Internal Audible Alarm
External Audible Alarm.
- Response to tamper signal/ message: Internal Audible Alarm
External Audible Alarm.
- Response to fault signal/ message: Internal audible alarm.
• System status, unset:
- Response to hold-up signal/ message: External audible alarm and Internal audible
alarm.
- Response to tamper signal/ message: Internal audible alarm.
266 SUPPLEMENTARY INDICATIONS FOR GRADE 3 SYSTEMS

• System set: Range reduction and Setting.
• During unsetting: Setting.
268 SUPPLEMENTARY INDICATIONS FOR GRADE 4 SYSTEMS

• System set: Setting.
• During unsetting: Setting.
274 NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADE 3 SYSTEMS

• Means of notification: Option C.
276 NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADE 4 SYSTEMS

• Means of notification: Option C.
282 SUPPLEMENTARY TAMPER DETECTION FOR GRADE 3 SYSTEMS

• Additional forms of tamper detection: Penetration of CIE/ ACE/ ATS.
286 MONITORING SUBSTITUTION OF GRADE 1, 2 AND 3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

• Substitution of system components: Required.
• Substitution of signals/ messages: Required.
• Timing:
- Substitution of system components: 100 s.
- Substitution of signals/ messages: 30 s.
292 EVENT RECORDING FOR GRADE 3 SYSTEMS

• Memory capacity (minimum): 500 events.
• Endurance of memory after system power failure (minimum): 30 days.
• Event recording functions:
- Other faults;
- Detection of substitution; and
- Contractor's choice.
294 EVENT RECORDING FOR GRADE 4 SYSTEMS

• Memory capacity (minimum): 1000 events.
• Endurance of memory after system power failure (minimum): 30 days.
• Event recording functions:
- Other faults;
- Detection of substitution; and
- Submit proposals.

PRODUCTS
316 COMBINED PASSIVE INFRARED AND MICROWAVE DETECTORS GENERALLY.

• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice of Preferred Suppliers and Manufacturers.
• Mounting: Ceiling and Wall.
• Features: None.
320 PASSIVE INFRARED DETECTORS GENERALLY.

• Manufacturer: System Manufacturer as Schedule of preferred suppliers and Manufacturers
• Mounting: Ceiling & Wall.
• Features: None.
322 PROTECTIVE SWITCHES GENERALLY.

• Type: Magnetic reed switch.
• Manufacturer: System Manufacturer_.
• Circuit configuration: Closed-circuit.
• Features: Heavy duty to perimeter doors and roller shutters in any location.
340 ELECTRONIC SOUNDERS

• Colour: White.
345 LED CLUSTERS

• Colour: Match surface or White.
355 XENON BEACONS

• Colour: White.
360 EXTERNAL SOUNDERS

• Type: Self activating bell, foam proof.
• Stand by power supply: Integral.
• Colour: Match surface finish to which it is attached.
• Strobe: Integral.
• Visual indication: LED.

400 CONTROL AND INDICATING EQUIPMENT (CIE) GENERALLY

• Controller: Microprocessor based.
• Features:
- Event time recording.
- Alarm and fault indication.
450 REMOTE KEYPADS

• Backlight: Required.
• Individual zone identification: Required.
• Individual device identification: Required.
• Deliberately operated button: Integral.
480 MULTI-CORE INTRUDER ALARM CABLES

• Conductor: 0.22 m², 7 x 0.2 mm stranding.
• Sheath: LSZH.
• Cores (minimum): 6.
EXECUTION
620 INSTALLING INTRUDER ALARM CONTROL AND INDICATING EQUIPMENT

• Standards: To BS 7671 and BS EN 50131-1.
• Location: Refer to Layouts.
• Main power supply: From an un-switched fused connection unit. Permanently wire with a
dedicated circuit from the building's main low voltage switchboard.
• Dummy external sounder: Required.
- Location: Refer to Layouts.
630 INSTALLING CABLES

• Route: via dedicated containment.
• Device wiring: Individual radial circuit from control panel.
conditions.
650 INSTALLING COMBINED PASSIVE INFRARED AND MICROWAVE DETECTORS.

• Mounting: Semi recessed.
665 INSTALLING PASSIVE INFRARED DETECTORS.

670 INSTALLING PROTECTIVE SWITCHES.


690 INSTALLING ELECTRONIC SOUNDERS.

695 INSTALLING LED CLUSTERS.

700 INSTALLING XENON BEACONS.

710 INSTALLING REMOTE KEYPADS.

COMPLETION

• Notice before commencing tests (minimum): 21 days.
• Cable testing
• Charger: Verify operation.
• Detection devices: Verify the operation, and adjust to provide maximum coverage.
• Device voltage: Submit details of the voltage at powered devices.
• Local warning devices: Verify operation.
• Remote signalling: Verify operation.
• Standby supply: Verify operation in the event of a mains failure. Check capacity and submit
results.
• Tamper detection: Verify operation.
• Timers: Set up and adjust entry and exit timers.
• User codes: Set up and commission.
910 DEVICE IDENTIFICATION AND TESTING

• Device list: Before commissioning submit proposals, including proposed device, zone and
group names.
• Zone diagram: Before commissioning submit proposals.
• Device identification: Label devices with a unique address corresponding to that used by
the CIE.
- Device testing: Verify the operation of each device. Submit a schedule of devices,
including the device test methods and results.
915 SYSTEM SOAK TESTING

• Soak test: Undertake when construction works are complete, but before handover and
before connection to a remote alarm receiving centre.
- Period: 14 days.
- Re-test after remedial works.

920 STANDBY BATTERY TESTING

• Mains power supply: Isolate.
• Quiescent mode: Measure current supplied by standby source when intruder detection and
alarm system is operating in the quiescent mode. Submit results.
• Alarm mode: Measure current supplied by standby source when intruder detection and
alarm system is operating in the alarm mode. Submit results.
925 TESTING ACTUATION, INTEGRATION AND INTERFACING WITH ALARM AND

SECURITY SYSTEMS
• Connections with other systems and equipment: Verify and demonstrate operation of the
systems and equipment under fire and fault conditions. Submit results.
930 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING INTRUDER DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• Modification certificate: Submit.
• Existing operation and maintenance manuals and record drawings: Update.
935 DOCUMENTATION
• Operation and maintenance manual: Submit.
940 LOG BOOK

• Type: Hard back cover embossed "INTRUDER DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM LOG
BOOK" with A4 lined paper, minimum 100 pages.
• Number of copies: 3.

- Deliberately operated devices: 5% of each type (minimum 2).
- Detectors: 5% of each type (minimum 2).
- Protective switches: 5% of each type (minimum 2)
949 MAINTENANCE

W44
Closed circuit television systems

W44 Closed circuit television systems
GENERAL
The requirements are for design, provision installation testing commissioning setting to
work and certification of a full complete fully operational CCTV installation inclusive of but
not limited to:
- Cameras (PTZ, Fixed)
- Bracketry
- Covers,
- Housings,
- Columns,
- Cabling
- Containment
- Internal heaters/wipers,
- Power supplies,
- Monitors
- Switching controls,
- Digital recording facilities,
- Motion sensors,
- Transmission facility
- Distribution racks
The Contractor shall engage the services of a CCTV system specialist to validate and
verify the proposals as indicated on the drawings and within this specification.
The CCTV system will be generally located as indicated on the drawings subject to final
system proposals submitted.

110 CCTV SYSTEMCCTV will be an Internet Protocol system with Power over Ethernet (PoE)
cameras connected to a dedicated data network.
CCTV monitors and control will be provided to the Security suite to display the images
being recorded both internally and externally to the Acute Services Block. The CCTV system
will integrate with the existing site security data network.
All cameras within this system are to be network cameras using H.264 compression and
POE. Power outlets should not be provided to cameras unless internal heaters are
required. The Contractor will appoint a specialist sub-contractor to carry out the design,
installation and commissioning of the CCTV
• System: In accordance with BS EN 50132-7 and Home Office Scientific Development
Branch CCTV operational requirements manual.
- Registration:
- A member of BSIA;
- A Gold member of NSI; or
- A member of SSAIB.
• Format: Consultative Committee for International Radio (CCIR) PAL colour, 625 scan
lines/frame, 25 frames/second.
• Purpose: Site security safety and monitoring.
• Type: Internet protocol (IP).
• Surveillance equipment: Visible cameras only, no covert equipment .
• Controller: Control matrix.
• Telemetry transmitter and receivers: Required.
• Number of monitors: Camera: monitor ratio (maximum)10:1.
• Data collection: Digital video recorders.
• Accessories:
- CCTV signage;
- Infrared illuminator's; and
- Camera masts.

• Cable type: Balanced twisted pair cable.
• Containment: Cable conduit basket, trunking and tray, as section Y63.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the CCTV system.
literature.
220 CCTV ZONE

• Purpose: Access Control, Safety, Property protection.
• Target to be observed: Individuals and Groups of people.
• Purpose of the observation: Identification, Detection
.
• Image quality: High.
• Number of cameras: As drawings.
• Camera operating mode: fixed and PTZ (pan, tilt and zoom).

240 DIGITAL STORAGE

• Rate per camera (minimum) : 25 frames/s.

• Objectives: to .
• Systems to be integrated:
- Access control systems as section W40;
- Assistance call systems as section W53;
- Nurse Call System as Section W55
- Intruder detection and alarm systems as section W41;
- Fire detection and alarm systems as section W50; and
- Central controls and building management systems as section Y40.
PRODUCTS
310 CAMERAS GENERALLY

- Product reference: System manufacturer.
• CCD sensor format: 0.25 inch.
• Resolution (minimum): 5 megapixel.
• Power supply: Power over Ethernet (PoE).
• Camera synchronising: Genlock and Line lock with phase adjust
• Signal to noise ratio (minimum): 48dB.
• Image strength with 75 ohm terminations: 1 V peak to peak.
• Automatic gain control: Required.
• White balance control: Automatic and Presets for daylight, fluorescent and tungsten
halogen lighting.
• Backlight compensation: Required.
• Present gamma settings: 1 and 0.45.
• Iris: Automatic.
• Shutter speed adjustment: Automatic.
• Infrared sensitive: Required.
• Colour to monochrome switching: Automatic at pre-determined threshold (25 lx)
• Lens mounts: CS type.
• Lens:
- Type: Variable focal length.
- Filter: Polarising.
• Mounting points: Bottom and Top.
• Accessories:
- Anti-tamper devices;
- Camera brackets;
- External camera housings;
- Internal camera housings;
- Lens hood;
- Power supply units; and
- Wire guards.

310A CAMERAS CCTV will be an Internet Protocol system with Power over Ethernet (PoE)
cameras connected to a dedicated data network.
CCTV monitors and control will be provided to the Security suite to display the images
being recorded both internally and externally to the Generic Ward Block. The CTV system
will integrate with the existing site security data network.
• CCD sensor format: 0.25 inch.
• Resolution (minimum): 5 megapixel.
• Power supply: Power over Ethernet (PoE).
• Camera synchronising: Genlock and Line lock with phase adjust
• Signal to noise ratio (minimum): 48dB.
• Image strength with 75 ohm terminations: 1 V peak to peak.
• Automatic gain control: Required.
• White balance control: Automatic and Presets for daylight, fluorescent and tungsten
halogen lighting.
• Backlight compensation: Required.
• Present gamma settings: 1 and 0.45.
• Iris: Automatic.
• Shutter speed adjustment: Automatic.
• Infrared sensitive: Required.
• Colour to monochrome switching: Automatic at pre-determined threshold (25 lx)
• Lens mounts: CS type.
• Lens:
- Type: Variable focal length.
- Filter: Polarising.
• Mounting points: Bottom and Top.
• Accessories:
- Anti-tamper devices;
- Camera brackets;
- External camera housings;
- Internal camera housings;
- Lens hood;
- Power supply units; and
- Wire guards.
330 PAN AND TILT UNITS Provide as part of system

• Pan angle: Submit proposals.
• Tilt angle: Submit proposals.
• Speed control: Submit proposals.
• Pan speed: Submit proposals.
• Tilt speed: Submit proposals.

340 CONTROL MATRIX

• Video inputs: 4.
• Video outputs: 4
• Adjustable dwell time per camera image: 1-50 s
- Interval: 1 s.
• Video inputs:
- Unused: Automatic skip.
- Lost: Alarm displayed on monitor.
• Spot monitor output: Required.
• Control keyboard: Tactile push buttons with individual LED indication.
• Manual selection of camera images: Required.
• Screen mode: Sequential switching and split screen.
• Titling: Time, date, and camera identification.
• Video motion detection: Required.
• Alarm outputs: 4.
350A TELEMETRY TRANSMITTERS

• Control functions:
- Autopan;
- Auxiliary latching function;
- Auxiliary momentary action function;
- Focus;
- Iris;
- Lamps;
- Pan;
- Power;
- Tilt;
- Wash;
- Wipe; and
- Zoom.
• Alarm inputs: 4.
• Control keyboard: Tactile push buttons with individual LED indication.
• Control over twisted pair cabling: 4-20 mA current loop.
• Multiple camera control: Required.
• Guard tour set up: Required.
• Mounting: 19 inch rack.
• System configuration: Password protection.
360 TELEMETRY RECEIVERS

• Type: Variable speed d.c..
• Control signal type: Match telemetry transmitter.
• Inputs: Match telemetry transmitter.
• Pre-set pan, tilt, zoom and focus positions: 8.
• Movement control modes: Autopan.
• Enclosure with integral power supply unit:
- Material: Polycarbonate.
- Degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP65.

380A DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDERS Provide infrastructure and recorders to serve the quantity
of cameras as per layouts together with sufficient spare capacity for additional 20%
additional cameras per recorder
• Resolution:
- Horizontal: 720 pixels.
- Vertical: 576 pixels.
• Storage media: Hard disk.
- Capacity: 31 recording days.
• Inputs: Submit proposals.
• Recording speed: 0.1-50 frames/s.
• Event recording mode: Required.
- Pre-event buffer: 20 s.
• Camera inputs: 16.
• Monitor outputs: 4.
• IEEE 1394 connections:
- Input: Required.
- Output: Required.
• Integral CD recorder: Windows-based removable hard drive.
• Video motion detection: Required.
390 MONITORS For Single camera viewing

- Approval: BEAB.
• Size (nominal diagonal): 15 inch.
• SVHS input: Required.
• Audio input and output: Required.
390A MONITORS For Multi Camera Viewing

- Approval: BEAB.
• Size (nominal diagonal): 21 inch.
• SVHS input: Required.
• Audio input and output: Required.
400 CAMERA BRACKETS For wall mounting Internally surface mounted.

• Type: Wall Mounted.
- Finish: White.
• Camera mount adjustment: Single bolt release.
- Pan: ±360°.
Tilt: ±70°.

400D CAMERA BRACKETS For wall mounting externally surface mounted.

• Type: Wall Mounted externally flat.
- Finish: White.
- Pan: ±360°.
Tilt: ±70°.
400E CAMERA BRACKETS For internal ceiling recessed mounting.

• Type: Flush.
- Finish: White.
- Pan: ±360°.
Tilt: ±70°.
400F CAMERA BRACKETS For column mounting externally.

• Type: Column Mounted.
- Finish: White.
- Pan: ±360°.
- Tilt: ±70°.
400G CAMERA BRACKETS For wall mounting externally Corner surface mounted.
• Type: Surface Corner Mounted.
- Finish: White.
- Pan: ±360°.
- Tilt: ±70°.
410 CCTV SIGNAGE

• Format: Yellow background with black text and images.
• Size: 400 mm x 300 mm.
• Content:
- Warn individuals that they are entering premises or an area with CCTV surveillance.
- CCTV camera symbol.
- Describe the purpose of the CCTV system.
- Identify the organisation responsible for operating the system.

420 EXTERNAL CAMERA HOUSINGS GENERALLY

• Shape: Hemispherical dome.
• Material: ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) plastic.
- Finish: Black.
• Vandal resistant fasteners: Not required.
• Integral heater: Required.
• Sun shield: Required.
• Wiper and washer assembly: Required.
430 INTERNAL CAMERA HOUSINGS Reception areas

- Finish: White.
• Vandal resistant fasteners: Required.
430A INTERNAL CAMERA HOUSINGS Circulation

- Finish: White.
430B INTERNAL CAMERA HOUSINGS Accommodation areas

- Finish: White.
430C INTERNAL CAMERA HOUSINGS Fixed point monitoring

• Shape: Square section.
- Finish: White.
440 INFRARED ILLUMINATORS

• Lamp type: Light emitting diode (LED).
• Infrared wavelength: 850 nm.
• Effective infrared distance (minimum): 50 m.
• Infrared cut off angle: 30°.

450A CAMERA MOUNTING COLUMNS Generally. Final quantity and locations to be surveyed
reviewed and agreed.
• Type: Circular tubular section and Submit proposals.
Base: Concrete Flange fixing bracket and concrete foundation and fixings as required to
suit
• Height above ground level: 6 m.
• Tilt over facility: Required.
• Anti climb guards: Required.
• Finish: Galvanized.
EXECUTION
620 INSTALLING CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEMS

• Site survey: Assess the site conditions and available artificial light.
• Access: Locate system to provide safe access for maintenance and testing.
• Camera connections: Conceal where practical, otherwise contain within PVC covered
metal flexible conduit.
• Mounting heights: Submit proposals.

• Route: data cables to be installed on dedicated security containment routes..
conditions.
640 INSTALLING SIGNAGE

• Location: Contractor's choice.
COMPLETION
910 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

• Evaluation of system performance: Rotakin test.
• Commissioning video: Display image quality and camera coverage, using Rotakin test
target.
• Camera coverage: Adjust to obtain optimal performance.
920 DOCUMENTATION
940 MAINTENANCE

W50
Fire detection and alarm systems

W50 Fire detection and alarm systems
GENERAL
GENERAL The requirements are for the provision of a full complete and fully operational
fire alarm system to serve the compete fire detection and alarm requirements of the
project. It is essential to recognise the building is a hospital Ward Block where patients are
generally within allocated individual rooms and are potentially non ambulant. The system
shall be provided and installed to suit the environment and comply with the appropriate HTM
guidance BS 5839 and statutory requirements.
The contractor shall engage the services of a system specialist from the schedule of
preferred suppliers and Manufacturers to design, procure, provide, install, test,
commission, set to work and certify the system

110 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM The fire detection and alarm system shall be
capable of interfacing and working with the site wide installed fire alarm data control
network.
The existing installed fire panels are Morley Analogue Addressable with Apollo fire
detection sensor equipment.
• System manufacturer: Morley / Apollo to match site wide installation.

- Manufacturer approval: LPCB LPS 1014 certified.
• Type: Automatic analogue addressable.
• Category to BS 5839-1: L1.
- Variations: None.
• Detection devices:
- Atmosphere: Normal.
- Types:
- Manual call points;
- Optical beam smoke detectors ;
- Point heat detectors ;
- Point multi criteria detectors;
- Ionisation detectors (for areas where BS 6266 applies)
- Point smoke detectors ; and
- Submit design and cost proposals.
• Equipment interconnectivity: Enhanced fire resisting cabling .
• Cable containment:
• Internal alarms:
- Primary: Sounders .
- Secondary: Visual alarm signal devices .
• External alarms:
- To alarm receiving centre (ARC);
- To Ulster Hospital site fire detection and alarm system network; and
- Visual alarm signal devices .
• Controls: Fully functional repeat panels .
• Accessories:
- Automatic door release mechanisms ;
- Actuation of fire protection systems ;
- Mimic panels ;
- Remote indicators ;
- Short circuit isolators ; and
- Zone diagrams .

130 ASPIRATING DETECTION SYSTEMS Aspirating fire detection is to be installed to the top
of the lift shafts to allow lift shafts to be monitored for fire events whilst allowing the
maintainable items of the system to be located out with the lift shafts. The aspirating control
equipment shall be wall mounted and located at the same level as the top of the lift shaft
e.g. Level 7 as required. The control equipment is to be protected from the
elements if installed at level 7. Control equipment will not be accessible to members of
the public, clinical staff or patients must be safely and easily accessible to
maintenance staff and contractors employed to maintain or repair the equipment.
• System manufacturer: Submit proposals, to match other fire equipment and to operate on
the same network..
• System type: Localised sampling to monitor within lift shafts to BS 6266.
• Equipment interconnectivity: Enhanced fire resisting cabling .
• Cable containment:
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN OF FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• System designer: Contractor/ Contractors appointed LPCB specialist designer.
• Design: Complete the design of the fire detection and alarm system in accordance with BS
5839-1.
literature.
• System design certificate: Submit with design proposals.
215 DESIGN OF ASPIRATING DETECTION SYSTEMS

• System designer: System manufacturer.
• Design: Complete the design of the aspirating detection system in accordance with BFPSA
Code of practice for category 1 aspirating detection systems.
literature.
• System design certificate: Submit with design proposals.
220 PERFORMANCE OF FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• Areas to be protected: All internal areas protected to L1 standards .
• System objectives: The fire detection and alarm system will cover the whole Acute Services
Block building and the connecting Permanent Link and the Temporary Link
installations.
The system will be capable of providing Phased Horizontal Evacuation from

compartment to compartment to allow evacuation of occupants under confirmed fire alert
conditions.
.
• Spare system capacity: 10% loop loading on every installed loop.
• Number of devices per zone (maximum): Submit proposals.

225 PERFORMANCE OF ASPIRATING DETECTION SYSTEMS

• Areas to be protected: Lift shafts at high level. The Contractor may use aspirating
detection within the Main LV Switchroom and Transformer Rooms as part of the design to BS
6266 .
• System objectives: Protection of areas inaccessible under normal conditions
Protection of areas containing sensitive equipment and infrastructure which require
Automatic High Sensitivity Smoke Detection .
• Maximum transport time: Lift Shafts - 60s
Server Rooms - 30s.
• Sampling: Continuous.
• System sensitivity: Normal.
250 DETECTION ZONES

• Zoning: Submit proposals.
255 ALARM ZONES

• Alarm zoning: Refer to Fire Strategy documentation for compartmentation and zones.
• Mode of operation: Compartments shall alarm as follows; When a compartment has an
active fire alert all adjacent compartments and compartments directly above and below
shall signal a pre-alarm condition. After a preset time period (to be agreed with the Fire
Office) if the original alert signal is not reset the adjacent compartments and compartments
above and below will automatically be elevated to a full alert signal. The alarm will
cascade through the building on a time based basis until the authorised person(s) or Fire
Brigade cancel the alert signals. The fire detection specialist designer shall fully detail the
cause and effects diagram and submit them to the Hospital Fire Officer for approval. .
• All zone evacuate control: Required.

• Objectives: To ensure holistic interfacing and operation of ancillary complementary
systems and installations.
• Systems to be integrated: Include but not limited to IT, BMS, Security, Access control,
Nurse call, Operating suite control panels, Assistance Call, lifts, Mechanical Plant, Gas
supplies, Generator systems, Automatic Smoke Damper(ASD) systems, Automatic Smoke
Transfer Grille systems (ASTGs).
266 INTERFACES TO EQUIPMENT

• Interfaces to equipment not forming part of the fire detection and alarm system: Design
system to interact with the equipment in the event of a fire or fault signal.
• Equipment and mode of operation: interfaces shall be included but not limited too;
• Lifts - allow two interfaces per lift car for auto parking in the event of a fire
• BMS Outstations for Air handling equipment (1 per outstation)
• BMS Outstations to boiler plant (1 per boiler)
• All main and kitchen gas valves
• Door Access Control system - for doors on escape routes only
• Smoke Control systems - as many interfaces as required to enable full complete fully
operational control and switching as required for Fire Strategy and Cause and Effect
Schedule of Project .
270 INTERFACE ISOLATION FOR TESTING PURPOSES

• Isolation of systems and equipment: Design system so that the actuation, integration and
interfacing can be isolated during fire alarm testing.
• Means of isolation: Separate key switch for each connection.
275 ALARM FILTERING

• Objective: Prevention of Nuisance Alarms, Enabling verification of Fire condition.
• Type: Staff alarm investigation period.

275A CRITICAL ALARM SIGNALLING

• Objective: The fire detection and alert system shall be interfaced to BMS and other controls
necessary to signal 'critical alarms' from other systems via the fire detection network to the
main control point at the Hospital Switchboard which is manned on a 24hour basis.
Details of critical alarms shall be supplied from the Trust as a schedule separate from this
specification.
• Type: Systems interfaces.
285 EXTERNAL ALARM SIGNALLING

• Objective: External alarm signalling (audible and visual) will be required in all courtyards,
roof terraces, Level 7 external areas and plantrooms and to Level 1 external areas to the
North and West Elevations. External alarms will silence at 30 minutes in an evacuation
scenario.
290 REMOTE SIGNALLING

• Means of signal transmission:
- Primary: Automatic – via private communication circuits.
- Secondary: Automatic – via public switched telephone system.
• Transmission path monitoring: Not required.
• Signals to be transmitted to ARC: Separately identifiable. Include the following:
- Pre-alarm.
- Alarm.
- Fault.
- Device isolated.
- Zone isolated.
PRODUCTS
310 DETECTION DEVICES

• Device address setup: Automatic via CIE.
• Removal of devices: Must require a special tool. Must not affect the operation of alarm
equipment.
• Device bases: Maintain circuit continuity when device is removed.
370 MANUAL CALL POINTS

- Product reference: Submit proposals. Breakglass units used in fire alert systems
should have 'collapsible' re-useable breakglasses that can be reset without having to
change the breakglass plate.
• Operation: Type A.
• Frangible element: Non-resettable.
• Integral red visual indicator: Required.
• Environmental category: Weatherproof.
• Mounting: Semi-recessed.
• Time delay between activation of manual call point and the alarm signal (maximum): 3 s.
• Protective covers: Required.

380 OPTICAL BEAM SMOKE DETECTORS

• Thermal turbulence detection: Required.
• Contamination compensation: Required.
• Power supply: Internal.
400 POINT HEAT DETECTORS

• Classification: A1.
- Suffix: S fro plant and kitchen areas. .
• Type: Point.
410A POINT SMOKE DETECTORS FOR BS 6266 AREAS

• Detection method: Separate Optical and ionisation detectors interleaved on a maximum
5.5m radii .
410B POINT MULTI CRITERIA SMOKE DETECTORS

• Detection method: combined twin Optical / heat with optional carbon monoxide detection to
be utilised where appropriate.
420 ENHANCED FIRE RESISTING CABLING

• Type: In accordance with BS 5839-1. All fire cabling installed to the building shall be of the
'Enhanced standard'. Fire cables shall be of the 'soft skin' type; Mineral insulated copper
clad cable (MICC) shall not be installed as the building fire cabling.
• Sheath and accessory colour: Red.
435 SOUNDERS
• Manufacturer: Apollo.
• Type: Match existing.
• Sounder cut off time (maximum): 30 minutes.
• Ingress protection standard: Type A for Indoors & Type B for outdoors.
• Colour: Red.
• Directional output at 1 m (minimum): Variable dependant on application e.g bedhead or
courtyards - to comply with HTM Firecode..
• Integral beacon: Where appropriate.
• Mounting: Surface.
• Power supply: From loop.

450 VISUAL ALARM SIGNAL DEVICES

• Type: LED internally, Xenon beacons externally / plant areas.
• Flash rate per minute:
- Minimum: 30.
- Maximum: 130.
• Lens:
- Colour: Red.
• Enclosure ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP44 / IP65 as appropriate.
455 FULLY FUNCTIONAL REPEAT PANELS

• Features: Match CIE.
460 MAIN CONTROL AND INDICATING EQUIPMENT (CIE)

• Main display: 32 character alphanumeric colour display.
• Zone indication to BS 5839-1: Separate visual display unit.
• Installed capacity: Submit proposals.
- Monitored sounder circuits (minimum): assumed as loop powered devices.
• Printer: 80 column printer.
• Indications:
- Fault signals from points;
- Total loss of power supply; and
- Alarm counter.
• Controls:
- Coincidence detection;
- Delays to the activation of outputs;
- Disablement of addressable points; and
- Test condition facilities.
• Outputs:
- Output to fire alarm devices;
- Output to fire alarm routing equipment;
- Output to fire protection equipment;
- Output to fault warning equipment; and
- Standardised input and output interface.
• Input device: Alphanumeric keypad.
• Enclosure: System manufacturer's standard.
- Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: System manufacturer's standard.
- Finish: Submit proposals
- Mounting: Semi-recessed.
465 POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT

• Standby source: Rechargeable battery.
- Time after which sufficient capacity remains to power the fire alarms for at least 30
minutes: 72 h.
• Housing: Remote enclosure.
• Monitoring of power supplies: By the CIE.

470 AUTOMATIC DOOR RELEASE MECHANISMS

• Control type: Electromagnetic.
• Mounting type: Wall mounted.
• Operation: Automatic via CIE.
• Power: assumed as loop powered.
• Integral manual release button: Required.
475 MIMIC PANELS

• Type: Illuminated site layout panel.
- Material: Stainless steel.
• Enclosure ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP66.
• Functional requirements:
- Display: Zone indication and devices locations under fire conditions.
- Controls: Local control of functional display. No control of actual system functionality.
• Printer: Required.
480 REMOTE INDICATORS

• Lamp: High intensity LED.
- Colour: Red.
• Lens:
- Colour: Clear.
• Enclosure ingress protection rating to BS EN 60529: IP 44.
550A SHORT CIRCUIT ISOLATORS

• Power supply: Loop powered. Short Circuit isolators can be separate devices or installed
to detector bases dependant on equipment offered.
• Integral LED status indicator: Required.
560 ZONE DIAGRAMS

• Style: Paper print mounted in a glazed frame.
• Size: A1.
• Layout: Submit proposals.
- Fire authority: Obtain agreement.
565 ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTION EQUIPMENT

• Equipment: In accordance with section 11 of FIA Code of Practice for Design, Installation,
Commissioning & Maintenance of Aspirating Smoke Detector (ASD) Systems.
• Pipework: ABS.
• Sampling points: Flush.

EXECUTION
620 WORKING IN AREAS PROTECTED BY FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• Minimize false alarms: Inform staff of the presence of automatic fire detectors and of the
precautions to be adopted when working.
- Method: Submit proposals.
650 INSTALLING MAIN CONTROL AND INDICATING EQUIPMENT (CIE)

• Location: Fire service entrance.
• Power supply: Derive from a dedicated circuit from the main switchboard and connect to
CIE via unswitched fused connection units.
660A INSTALLING CABLING

• Standard: To BS 7671 and associated Guidance Notes.
• Cable route: Segregate from other cabling. Where installed in trunking, locate in a
dedicated fire cabling compartment.
- Type: Loop or radial circuits without spurs or tees
• Mechanical protection: required to cables mounted below 2.4m above finished floor level.
• Fastening cables:
- To building fabric: Fire rated Metal P-clips with red plastic coating.
- To cable supports: Fire rated Metal bands with red plastic coating.
• Cables passing through the building fabric: Sleeve, fire stop seal.
• Jointing: At equipment terminals.
• Cable terminals: Use ceramic terminal blocks.
• Maximum circuit resistance: Measure before concealment. Submit results.
670 INSTALLING POINT DETECTORS

• Protective cage: Required to devices within main plantrooms.
680 INSTALLING MANUAL CALL POINTS

• Location: Prominent position.
• Mounting height generally (above finished floor level): 1.3 m.
• Test key: Locate to allow easy test operation.
• Labelling: Identify the manual call point address.
- Lettering: Red.
700 INSTALLING SOUNDERS

• Circuit wiring: Generally addressable loop powered sounders to be employed.
• Protective cage: Required to devices within Main Plantrooms.
705 INSTALLING VISUAL ALARM SIGNAL DEVICES

• Location: Submit proposals
• Mounting height generally (above finished floor level): 2.1 m.
• Protective cage: Not required.
710 INSTALLING SHORT CIRCUIT ISOLATORS

• Location: Plant rooms and risers or individual within detector heads.
• Labelling: Identify the associated zones.
720 INSTALLING END OF LINE DEVICES

• Location: Note, loop powered addressable sounders expected.
• Labelling: Identify the presence of an end of line device, and describe its function.

725 INSTALLING REMOTE INDICATORS

• Concealed detection devices: Install individual LED indicators.
740 INSTALLING INTERFACES TO OTHER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

• Connection to equipment: Install interconnecting wiring between interface unit and
equipment controlled.
• Interface units: Label, describing their function.
750 INSTALLING ALL ZONE EVACUATION CONTROLS

• Location: Integral within CIE.
760 INSTALLING ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS

• Pipework:
- Joints: Solvent welded.
- Bends: Long radius.
- Labelling: Along the pipework and at each sampling point.
• Connection to sampling point: Rigid extended sampling pipe.
COMPLETION

• Commissioning: In accordance with BS 5839-1.
• System commissioning agent: Specialist Accredited Commissioning Engineer.
• System verification agent: Contractor.
911 SYSTEM INFORMATION

• Device list: Before commissioning submit proposals, including proposed device and zone
names.
• Zone diagram: Before commissioning submit proposals.
915 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS

• Standard: In accordance with FIA Code of Practice for Design, Installation, Commissioning
& Maintenance of Aspirating Smoke Detector (ASD) Systems.
920 DEVICE IDENTIFICATION AND TESTING

• Device identification: Label devices with a unique address corresponding to that used by
the CIE.
• Device testing: Verify the operation of each device. Submit a schedule of devices, including
the device test methods and results.
925 CABLE TESTING

• Insulation resistance: Submit results.
• Earth continuity: Submit results.
930 SYSTEM SOAK TESTING

• Soak test: Undertake when construction works are complete, but before handover.
- Period: 14 days.
- Re-test after remedial works.

935 STANDBY BATTERY TESTING

• Mains power supply: Isolate.
• Quiescent mode: Measure current supplied by standby source when fire detection and
alarm system is operating in the quiescent mode. Submit results.
• Alarm mode: Measure current supplied by standby source when fire detection and alarm
system is operating in the alarm mode. Submit results.
940 TESTING ACTUATION, INTEGRATION AND INTERFACING WITH ALARM AND

SECURITY SYSTEMS
• Connections with other systems and equipment: Verify and demonstrate operation of the
systems and equipment under fire and fault conditions.
945 MEASUREMENT OF SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS

• Sound pressure levels: Measure throughout the building.
• Test instrument:
- Standard: To BS EN 61672-1.
- Setting: Slow response, weighting A.
• Doors: Close before measuring sound pressure levels.
- Format: Electronic layout drawing showing location of measurements with results
947 MEASUREMENT OF MESSAGE INTELLIGIBILITY

• Locations: All.
• Message intelligibility: Measure during normal building operation. Submit results.
- Doors: Close before measuring intelligibility.
- Minimum speech transmission index (STI): Derive from test measurements: Submit
results
- Test Method: Submit proposals.
- Format: Electronic layout drawing showing location of measurements with results.
960 CERTIFICATION
• Format: In accordance with BS 5839-1 Annex G.
• Number of copies: 3+ electronic.
• Design certificate: Submit.
• Installation certificate: Submit.
• Commissioning certificate: Submit.
• Verification certificate: Submit.
965 DOCUMENTATION
• Operation and maintenance manual: Submit.
• Fire evacuation plan: Submit.
- Format: Electronic colour CAD layout.
970 LOG BOOKS

• Format: To BS 5839-1 Annex F.
• Number of copies: 1.
980 ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE

• Acceptance certificate: Prepare and submit.


- Frangible elements for manual call points: 10.
- Detectors: 10 of each type
• Printer ink and paper roll: Replace immediately before handover.
995 MAINTENANCE
- Duration: Until 24 months after completion.

W53
Assistance call systems

W53 Assistance call systems
GENERAL Requirements are for the provision of full complete fully operational assistance
call systems to those public access areas fitted with Disabled accessible fixtures and
fittings. The system shall be of the same manufacturer as that provided for the Nurse call
system though they shall be considered completely separate systems for the purposes of
this project. The Assistance call systems shall be of discrete nature with alarms raised and
reset locally to the space served. This shall generally be the disabled WCs within direct
public accessible areas. Such provisions shall not be considered those patient disabled
accessible rooms/areas. The contractor engage the services of the system specialist to
design, procure provide instal test commission certify and set to work these discrete
systems.
110 ASSISTANCE CALL SYSTEMIN PUBLIC AREA ACCESSIBLE TOILETS

• System manufacturer: Refer to schedule of Preferred Manufacturers and Suppliers.
• Operating voltage: 12 V d.c..
• Zones: Submit proposals.
• Call actuator: Press buttons (mid and Low level.
• Alarm indication: Local and Remote indication and at system main control/indication panel.
• Reset unit: Required.
• Power supply unit: Required.
• Circuit monitoring: In accordance with BS 5839-9.
• Accessories: Battery backup supply.
120 CABLING AND CONTAINMENT A dedicated full compete fully operational Containment
system shall be provided to serve the complete system requirements
• Cable type: LSZH singles as section V32.
• Containment: Cable conduit, trunking basket tray as Sections Y60 and Y63.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the assistance call system.
literature.

• Objectives: To provide low priority indication/record of activation of system.
• Systems to be integrated: Intruder detection and alarm systems as section W41, Fire
Alarm System as Section W50, BMS System as Y40 .

PRODUCTS
340 OVERDOOR INDICATORS

• Wall mounting: Semi recessed.
• Material: White plastics.
• Visual indicator: Red.
• Integral buzzer: Required.
360 ALARM INDICATION WITHIN ACCESSIBLE ACCOMMODATION

• Mounting: Within call and reset units.
• Visual indication: Red.
• Audible indication: Tone distinguishable from the fire alarm system.
370 RESET UNITS

• Mounting: Wall mounted.
• Integral visual and audible alarm: Required.
380A POWER SUPPLY UNITS Public area Accessible WCs.

• Integral replaceable fuse: Required.
• Neon power-on indicator: Required.
390 BATTERY BACKUP SUPPLY Public Area Accessible WCs

• Standby duration: 8 h.
• Charge indicator: Green light emitting diode.
• Battery enclosure: White plastics.
620A INSTALLING ASSISTANCE CALL SYSTEMS GENERALLY

• Standard: To BS 7671 and associated Guidance notes.

• Standards: In accordance with BS 5839-1, To BS 7671 and associated Guidance notes.
640 INSTALLING OVERDOOR INDICATORS

• Location: Outside of the accommodation.
• Position: Midway between door top and underside of ceiling.
650 INSTALLING REMOTE INDICATORS

• Location: Integral to indicator panel and on outer side of lobbied WCs.
670 INSTALLING RESET UNITS

• Location: Within reach of persons in a wheelchair and Within reach of persons using the
toilet.

670A INSTALLING CALL/ RESET UNITS

• Location: Within reach of persons in a wheelchair and Within reach of persons using the
toilet.
680 INSTALLING POWER SUPPLY UNITS

• Location: Contractor's choice voids (above Access hatches/provision.
• Final connection:
- Accessory type: Unswitched fused connection unit.
- Cable type: Fire Rated CWZ.
690 INSTALLING BATTERY BACK UP SUPPLIES

• Location: Next to the power supply unit.
COMPLETION
910A TESTING AND COMMISSIONING GENERALLY

• Standard: To BS 7671 and Associated Guidance Notes.
• Alarm signalling: Check operation.
915 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING DISABLED REFUGE CALL SYSTEMS

• Commissioning: In accordance with BS 5839-9.
920 DOCUMENTATION
• Test certificate for disabled refuge call system in accordance with BS 5839-9: Not
applicable.

W55
Nurse call systems

W55 Nurse call systems
GENERAL
110 NURSE CALL SYSTEM The Nursecall system shall be an Internet Protocols (IP) based
system providing full Ethernet connection providing up to 10Mbps of data at every bedhead
from an segregated structured IT cabling network.
The IP Nursecall system shall provide as a minium multicast streaming, including video
and IPTV with Layer 2 specification with IGMP v2 and IGMP
snooping. The system shall be capable of connecting with the Juniper wireless Ethernet
installed throughout the hospital wards to allow the connection of handheld tablet pc's as
part of the nursecall system for mobile nursing staff integration. Redundancy shall be built
into the system to allow auto configuration/reconfiguration capability to enable replacement
parts to be installed without system reprogramming.
The system shall operate as a full nurse call system providing the following features for
nurse call;
• Two way voice communication between patient handset and staff bases
• nursecall from patient handset
• nursecall from patient pull cords
• cardiac alert from bedhead
• over door indicator for nursecall
• over door indicator for cardiac alert
• out of bed indication alert (connected to wall mounted PIR's which also operate wall
mounted low level lighting during the hours of darkness
Visual and audible alarms;
All visual indications shall comply with Part M of th Building Regulations and BS8300.
Colours for alarm call, indication and reassurance lights are as follows;
Amber - Patient call and call indicator
Light grey Patient call reset switch and indication
Green - Staff presence indicator & switch
Amber - over door indicator (covers all calls)
Red - Emergency nurse call switch
Blue - Cardiac alarm switch
Black - Intruder attack / alarm switch
Red - Controlled drugs cupboard indicator
Yellow - Door entry call & indicator
Brown - Equipment fault indicator
The following services shall also be incorporated into the nursecall system as functionality
over and above nursecall requirements;
• Media services - IPTV (Freeview) TV and radio control (On / Off and channel selection)
and TV volume control
• Lighting Control - provide scene setting lighting control which the patient can control from
the bed. Lighting control should allow for the following modes of lighting; TV lighting where
lighting is set to allow the patient to watch TV comfortably. Reading lighting where the
lighting is set to allow the patient to read comfortably. Visitor Lighting where the patient
has visitors in the room. Lighting off. Where the patient switches the lights off. It should
be noted the nurse will have separate lighting controls which will over ride patient controls
to allow for medical lighting and observation lighting. Overide controls will be used to
provide full compliance to LG2.

• Blind control. The patient shall be able to control up and down as well as tilt controls for
the main external window blinds from the bed.
Voice over IP
Connectivity to the Building Management System (Trend)
Connectivity to 3rd Party Proprietary I/O Devices including, but not limited to; Fire Alarms,
Video intercomms at each ward entrance door , Security Systems including door access,
staff attack and CCTV
- Activation of Blue Route protocols. This shall incorporate but not limited to :
Activation of dedicated Blue Route Illumination from that point at which the
call has been made to the emergency response (crash) team.
Inhibiting/deactivation of access control of each controlled access door
from the source of call to the crash team positions
Prioritising lifts so as to send a lift car to the floor level at which the crash
team shall access vertical transportation to floor(s) at which the call was made. Doors shall
open on arrival.
• System manufacturer: Wandsworth IPiN or equal approved .
• Call initiation devices:
- Patient handsets: At each bed .
- Patient pull cords: At visitor / table space within each bedroom and within the en-
suites .
- Nurse emergency pull-switches: At each bed and In treatment rooms .
• Visual signals:
- Ward entrance indicators: Required.
- Direction indicators: Required.
- Reassurance indicators: Integral within patient handsets .
• Operating voltage to BS 7671: Extra low voltage.
• Equipment interconnection: Wired, Internet Protocol system .
• Power supply units: Required.
• Call indicator panels: Required.

• Cable type: LSF insulated cables, as section V32 and
Cat 6 cabling to match IT infrastructure.
• Containment: Cable basket, as section Y63.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the nurse call system in accordance with HTM 2015.
• Spare capacity: 10% of installed call initiation devices.
literature.
• Equipment electrical power: Provide electrical supplies to equipment requiring power.
220A MODE OF OPERATION

• Patient to nurse:
- Sequence of lamps: Operates in a steady mode until cancelled at the associated reset
unit.
• Nurse emergency pull-switches:
- Sequence of lamps: Operates in a flashing mode until the emergency switch is returned
to normal.
- Operation: Overrides any patient calls on the system, and stores them until the
emergency call is cancelled, Must not override other emergency calls on system or affect
any patient or emergency calls from other points on the system
Alarm in order of priority Time ON (Sec)

Time OFF(sec)
Period lamp ON/OFF
Cardiac Alarm 0.25 (dual tone)
0.25 (dual tone)
0.25 on; 0.25 off
Intruder staff attack variable
variable
0.25 on; 0.25 off
Staff emergency call 0.5 (dual tone)
0.5 (dual tone)
0.25 on; 0.25 off
Bathroom / WC call 1-3 Continuos
Patient call 1-9 Continuos
Controlled drugs cupboard 1-20
1 on; 20 off .
Nurse Emergency Voice/Televisual outlets

- Continuous audible/visual indication of call at each other call point of system within
department until emergency call switch is reset to normal..
- Cessation of call from source station only.
PRODUCTS

• Products: In accordance with HTM 2015.

320 PATIENT HANDSETS

• Housing:
- Material: High impact white plastics.
- Ingress protection: To BS EN 60529 IP 67.
• Permanently illuminated nurse call push: Coloured orange with tactile feel and marked with
the nurse symbol.
- Actuation: Electrical.
• Reassurance lamp: Amber lens.
• Reset: Integral in medical trunking bedhead unit, as section S29.
• Television control: Channel selection and volume control.
- Programme controls: Two push button sequential stepping of channel numbers and
Two push button control of volume.
• Bedlight control switch: On and off, marked with lamp symbol.
• Attachment clip: On cable.
• Cable: White cord with strain relief.
- Length: 2 m.
• Plug: Able to disengage from the socket when strain is applied to the cable.
- Mounting type: Headwall bedhead unit, as section S29 and Wall.
• Monitored call circuit: Initiated by a break in the cable or withdrawal of the plug.
• Parking bracket: Required.
330A PATIENT PULL CORDS

• Cord colour: Orange.
• Acorn: Orange coloured with nurse symbol.
• Switch action: Momentary.
• Accessories: Integral reassurance lamp with amber lens call, control facilities integrated as
detailed elsewhere in this section.
340 NURSE EMERGENCY PULL-SWITCHES

• Type: Pull-on/ push-off action.
• Colour: Red.
- Labelling on switch: "Emergency Pull".
• Mounting: Medical trunking bedhead unit, as section S29.
350 VISUAL SIGNALS

• Lamp: Twin LED.
- Colour: Red.
- Labelling: Unique call device identification code.
• Mounting plate material: Zinc plated steel.
- Finish: Match electrical accessories.
• Mounting type: Wall.
• Accessories: Integral sounder.

350A AUDIO/TELEVISUAL CALL SYSTEM Provide and install two way televisual system
interconnecting all nominated areas. System to form integral part of nurse call system.
Ensure integration of call, answer, push to reset and indication of availability of service
• Lamp: Twin LED.
- Colour: Red.
- Labelling: Unique call device identification code.
• Mounting plate material: Zinc plated steel.
- Finish: Match electrical accessories.
• Mounting type: Wall/theatres control panel.
• Accessories: Integral sounder (inhibited on call answered).
370 POWER SUPPLY UNITS

• Output power supply: Stabilised and overload protected.
• Integral standby power supply: Required.
380 CALL INDICATOR PANELS

• Display: LCD.
• Lamps: LED.
- Number: refer to layouts.
• Day/ night volume control switch: Required.
• Patient to nurse call tone: Fixed frequency. 1 s on, 9 s off, until all calls are cancelled.
• Nurse to nurse call tone: 0.5 s at 1000 Hz and 0.5 s at 500 Hz.
• Mute switch: Not required.
• Call transfer:
- Switch: Required.
- Selected lamp: Incorporated in switch.
- From other ward lamp: Required.
- Number of lamps: Refer to Layouts.
• Speech facility: Microphone.
- Type: Duplex.
- Call identification: LCD.
- Selection: Selector switch.
• Transfer of speech facility: Required.
- Identification: VDU.
EXECUTION
620 EXECUTION GENERALLY

• Execution: In accordance with HTM 2015.
630 INSTALLATION OF PATIENT HANDSETS

• Attachment: Flexible lightweight cable, and plug.

640 INSTALLATION OF PATIENT PULL CORDS

• Location: Ceiling mounted.
• Position within room:
- Within reach of person using the toilet;
- Within reach of person using the shower; and
- Within reach of person using the table & chair.
650 INSTALLATION OF NURSE EMERGENCY PULL-SWITCHES

• Location: Within 1 m of staff tending to patients.
660 INSTALLATION OF VISUAL SIGNALS

• Location: Overdoor.
• Position: 200 mm above door top.
670 INSTALLATION OF POWER SUPPLY UNITS

• Location: Centrally within the ward area.
• Position: Electrical cupboard.
680 INSTALLATION OF CALL INDICATOR PANELS

• Location: At all three staff bases in each ward (1 main and 2 repeater panels).
COMPLETION

• Testing and commissioning: In accordance with HTM 2015.
• Controls: Verify operation.
• Alarm signalling: Verify operation.
• Audible signal sound level output: Measure.
920 DOCUMENTATION

- Patient handsets: 3% of each type installed.
- Patient pull cords: 10 of each type installed.
- Lamps: 2 of each type.
- Dummy call device plugs: 50.
940 MAINTENANCE

W60
Lightning protection systems

W60 Lightning protection systems
GENERAL The requirements are for the provision of a full complete fully operational
lightning protection system to serve the complete requirements of the building. System
shall be of the Faraday cage type and fully in accordance with BS EN 62305. Engage the
services of a lightning protection systems specialist to develop the design and provide a
certificated system as per BS EN 62305
110 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION FOR INFORMATION GENERALLY

• Substructure: In-situ concrete piles.
• Superstructure: In-situ concrete frame.
• Roof structure: In-situ concrete frame.
• Roof coverings:
- Aluminium strip covering;
- Built-up felt roof covering;
- Metal profiled sheet decking;
- Single layer polymeric sheet roof covering; and
- Stainless steel strip covering.
120 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM GENERALLY.

• System manufacturer: Submit proposals Schedule of Preferred Suppliers and
Manufacturers.
- Registration: A member of the Association of Technical Lightning and Access
Specialists (ATLAS)..
• External LPS type: Attached to the structure.
• Internal LPS: Required.
• Protection against explosive or highly flammable contents: Required.
• Protection of electrical and electronic systems: Required.
• Air termination system: Air terminals and Copper tape.
• Down conductors: Use superstructure, connect to rebar in building construction. Test and
prove resistance of connections at every level prior to concrete pour..
- Lateral connections: At ground level.
• Earth termination system:
- Earth rods;
- Ring earth electrode; and
- Use substructure.
• Accessories:
- Connection components;
- Earth rod inspection pits;
- Metallic direct contact clips;
- Notices and labels; and
- Surge protective devices as section Y67.
• Completion:
- Electrical identification: As section V80.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the lightning protection system.
• Class of LPS to BS EN 62305-2: I.
• Coverage of LPS: External and Internal.
• Internal equipment to be protected: Electrical, IT, Communications, Controls, signalling,
processing systems, equipment, cabling and infrastructure.
literature.
PRODUCTS
340 COPPER TAPE Provide and install tape grid to roof level to meet system requirements for
compliance with BSEN 62305 and including the building characteristics and function as
primary design constraints.
• Manufacturer: System manufacturer .
• Size: 25 x 6 mm.
• Cover: Tinned.
- Colour: Not applicable.
350 COPPER SOLID CIRCULAR CONDUCTORS Copper circular conductors may be used
where appropriate for connections to rebar within insitu concrete.
• Size: Submit proposals.
• Cover: Bare.
- Colour: Not applicable.
370 EARTH RODS

• Standards: To BS EN 50164-2 and ENA Technical Specification 43-94 and in accordance
with BS 7430.
• Type: Threaded copperbond rods.
• Size:
- Diameter: 15 mm.
- Length: 1200 mm.
390 RING EARTH ELECTRODES.

• Material: Tinned copper tape .
• Tape size: 25 x 6 mm.
400 ANTI-VANDAL GUARDS For protection of test points and system joints as required
• Material: Galvanized steel.

410 CONNECTION COMPONENTS

• Lightning current withstand classification: Class H.
• Material: Copper.
415 EARTH ROD INSPECTION PITS

• Type: Concrete.
• Load rating (minimum): 3500 kg.
• Identification: Permanently identify with the wording "EARTH ROD".
420 METALLIC DIRECT CONTACT CLIPS

• Material: Copper and aluminium alloy.
430 NON-METALLIC DIRECT CONTACT CLIPS

• Material: Non-brittle, UV stabilized high grade polypropylene.
- Colour: Match tape.
440 NOTICES AND LABELS

• Material: Face engraved rigid plastics laminate.
• Colour:
- Lettering: Black.
• Typography:
• System notice wording: "THIS STRUCTURE IS PROVIDED WITH A LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM THAT IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS EN 62305-3 AND THE
BONDING TO OTHER SERVICES AND MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING SHOULD BE
MAINTAINED ACCORDINGLY."
EXECUTION
630 INSTALLING LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

• Substructure: When used as the earth terminal network measure its resistance to earth
during the construction period.
640 INSTALLING AIR TERMINALS

• Location: Submit proposals.

650 INSTALLING TAPES

• Location: Concealed within wall or slab cavity.
• Number of joints: Minimize.
• Contact surfaces: Clean. Coat with corrosion inhibitor.
• Bimetallic joints: Do not cross-contaminate.
• Conductors passing through roofs: Provide puddle flanges.
660 INSTALLING EARTH RODS

• Location: 800 mm from building.
• Rod separation: Space the rods apart by at least 1.25 times the depth of the longest rod.
• Rod alignment: Vertical.
• Couplings: Apply corrosion inhibiting paste to the threads and enclose so that rods meet at
centre of coupling.
• Earth rod heads: Position below ground within 100 mm of ground level.
• Internal earth rods: Provide waterproof seals.
690 INSTALLING EARTH ROD INSPECTION PITS

• Inspection pit lid: Install flush with the finished ground surface.
700 INSTALLING RING EARTH ELECTRODES

• Earth rods: Interconnect with ring earth electrode.
• Depth: 600 mm below ground.
• Jointing method: Bolts.
710 INSTALLING TEST JOINTS

• Location: Within earth rod inspection pit.
• Labelling: Provide a plate indicating the position, number and type of earth electrodes
above each test point.
715 BONDING
• Bond the following to the lightning protection system:
- Base of a down conductor to the main switchgear earthing terminal;
- Base of down conductor to base of vertical steelwork in lift shaft;
- Metal fire escape;
- Metal flue pipe;
- Shields of incoming services; and
- Vertical steelwork in lift shaft to structural steelwork of building at eaves and ground
levels.
• Bonding conductor sizes: To BS EN 62305-4.
• Locations of bonds: Submit proposals.
720 DISSIMILAR METALS

• Connecting dissimilar metals: Prevent electrolytic action.
740 INSTALLING ANTI-VANDAL GUARDS

• Location: Between finished ground level and 3 m high.
750 INSTALLING NOTICES AND LABELS

• Location: Within main switchroom.

COMPLETION

• Inspection and test: In accordance with BS EN 62305-3 and BS EN 62305-4.
• Log book: Required.
940 DOCUMENTATION
950 MAINTENANCE
• Maintenance: In accordance with BS EN 62305-3 and BS EN 62305-4..
• Duration: Undertake until 12 months after completion.

Y
General engineering services

Y60
Conduit & trunking

Y60 Conduit & trunking
To be read with Preliminaries, General conditions.
GENERAL
GENERAL Requirements are for the design provision coordination installation of full
complete fully operational accessible containment distribution systems to serve the
complete requirements of the project inclusive of specialist systems distribution
infrastructure. The contractor shall develop the primary secondary and final containment
systems to meet the setting out requirements of all electrical services and systems
(including specialist) as indicated on the layouts drawings and specifications. conduit and
Trunking systems shall be fully electrically and mechanically continuous throughout their
lengths and include proprietary earth continuity straps to maintain continuity across
separate sections.
110 CONDUIT AND TRUNKING GENERALLY

literature.
• Conduit and trunking sizes not stated: Submit proposals and calculations.
PRODUCTS
320 RIGID CONDUIT GENERALLY

• Standard: To BS EN 50086-2-1 or BS EN 61386-21.
• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of Preferred Suppliers and Manufacturers.
• Material: Galvanised Steel.
• Mechanical properties:
- Resistance to compression: Heavy.
- Resistance to impact: Heavy.
- Resistance to bending: Rigid.
- Tensile strength: Heavy.
- Suspended load capacity: Heavy.
• Temperature range:
- Lower temperature: -25°C.
- Upper temperature: 120°C.
• Electrical properties: With electrical continuity properties.
• Resistance against corrosion: To BS EN 61386-1, Class 4.
• Resistance against flame propagation: Required.
• Sizes (OD):
- 20 mm;
- 25 mm;
- 32 mm; and
- 50 mm.

330 PLIABLE CONDUIT For use only as part of induction loops systems
• Material: Non-metallic.
- Resistance to compression: Light.
- Resistance to impact: Light.
- Resistance to bending: Pliable.
- Tensile strength: Light.
- Suspended load capacity: Light.
• Resistance against corrosion: Submit proposals.
• Sizes (OD): 16 mm.
• Special features: Containment for induction loop cabling.
340 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT Proprietary associated with lighting and emergency lighting systems
• Manufacturer: Lighting and Emergency lighting controls systems specialists.
• Material: Metallic.
- Resistance to compression: Medium.
- Resistance to impact: Medium.
- Resistance to bending: Flexible.
- Tensile strength: Light and Medium.
- Suspended load capacity: Light.
• Sizes (OD):
- 16 mm;
- 25 mm; and
- 32 mm.
• Special features: Distribution of final circuitry electrical power and controls wiring to lighting
and emergency lighting. .

350 BURIED CONDUIT

• Standards: To BS EN 50086-2-4.
• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of preferred Suppliers and Manufacturers.
• Material: Metallic.
- Resistance to compression: Type 750
- Resistance to impact: Normal.
- Resistance to bending: Rigid.
• Resistance against chemical attack: With protection.
• Sizes (OD): 25 mm and 32 mm.
• Special features: None.
360 TRUNKING AND DUCTING

• Standards: To relevant parts of BS 50085.
• Material: Galvanised Steel.
• Protection against impact: 20 J.
• Temperature properties:
- Storage and transport temperature (minimum): -25°C.
- Installation and application temperature (minimum): +5°C.
- Application temperature (maximum): +120°C.
• Resistance to flame propagation: Non-flame propagating.
• Electrical properties: With electrical continuity characteristics and earth continuity straps,
brass nuts and bolts.
• Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: . Ducting IP65: Trunking IP20.
• Protection against corrosion: High protection outside and inside.
• Access method: With tools.
380 SURFACE TRUNKING

• Sizes:
- 50 x 50 mm;
- 100 x 50 mm;
- 100 x 100 mm; and
- 150 x 100 mm.
• Compartments:
- 1;
- 2; or
- 3 (as required for application optimisation and voltage ratings within.
• Accessories and fittings: Factory made of the same material type and finish as surface
trunking.
- Types: As required to ensure a full compete installation.

390 STEEL UNDERFLOOR DUCTING

• Protection against corrosion Class 3, stove enamel internally, sherardized externally.
• Sizes: 75 x 37.5 mm and 150 x 37.5 mm.
• Compartments: 2 or 3 (Dependant on services distributed and voltage ratings.
• Levelling devices: Screwed.
• Accessories and fittings: Factory made of the same material type and finish as steel
underfloor ducting.
- Types: Intumescent linear gap seal.
410 INSULATING TRUNKING

• Standard: To BS EN 50085-1 and BS EN 50085-2-1.
• Material: PVC-U.
• Colour: Manufacturers standard Submit Proposals.
• Mechanical classification: Heavy.
• Temperature classification: -25.
• Resistance against corrosion: Medium protection or High protection.
• Resistance against flame propagation: Non flame propagating.
• Sizes:
- Width:
- 50 mm;
- 100 mm; and
- 150 mm.
- Height: 50 mm.
• Compartments:
- 1;
- 2; or
- 3 (dependant on application and voltage ratings contained.
• Accessories and fittings: Factory made of the same material type and finish as insulated
cable trunking.
- Types: As required to form a complete fully operational system.
420 SERVICE OUTLETS

• Frame material: Galvanized steel.
- Finish Manufacturers standard, Submit proposals.
• Lid: Hinged.
- Material: Galvanized steel base with polyamide outer.
- Outer finish: Manufacturer's standard grey.
- Recess: To suit floor covering.
- Cable exits: For cable exit whilst lid closed provide lift up flap with grommet insert.
- Lockable: Not required.
• Compartments:
- Power: Two two-gang modules.
- Communications and signalling: Two two-gang modules.
• Segregation of cabling: Maintain with bridges and dividers.

430 RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SERVICE OUTLETS

• Shape: Rectangular.
440A SERVICE OUTLET POLES To match existing within Endoscope reprocessing in Main
ACU block (which forms part of this project). Survey required to ensure inclusion of type
fixing arrangements and distribution method.
• Type: Floor to ceiling.
• Manufacturer: To match existing.
- Product reference: To match existing.
• Material: To match existing.
• Profile: Square.
• Colour: To match existing.
• Outlet boxes: as identified on layouts.
- Arrangement: Double sided.
• Cover: Flush fitting.
- Lockable: Not required.
• Segregation of cabling: Maintain using bridges and dividers.
450 PROPRIETARY TRUNKING Dado trunking systems

• Material: Extruded aluminium and PVC-U.
• Finish and colour: White.
• Size: 150mm x 75mm.
• Compartments: Three.
• Screening: Earthed metal partitions.
• Accessories and fittings: Factory made of the same material type and finish as cable
trunking.
- Type:
- 90° internal bends.;
- 90° external bends.;
- 25 mm deep twin outlet boxes;
- 35 mm deep twin outlet boxes;
- End caps;
- Joint covers; and
- Tees.
• Special features: integral local isolator (proprietary).
460 METALLIC CONDUIT FITTINGS

• Standards: To BS 50086-1 and BS 50086-2 or BS EN 61386-1 and BS EN 61386-22.
• Manufacturer: Match conduit.
• Material: Malleable iron.
• Conduit boxes: Fit covers of same material and finish as boxes.
• Plugs: Hexagonal malleable iron.
• Locknuts: Hexagonal malleable iron.
470 INSULATING CONDUIT FITTINGS

• Standards: To BS 50086-1 and BS 50086-2 or BS EN 61386-1 and BS EN 61386-22.
• Manufacturer: Match conduit.
• Fittings: Heavy gauge, high impact rigid PVC-U fittings.
• Conduit boxes: Include brass earthing terminals.

475 INTUMESCENT LINEAR GAP SEALS

EXECUTION
610 INSTALLING CONDUIT AND TRUNKING

• Standard: To BS 7671and in accordance with IEE Guidance note 1.
• Cable trunking: Provide when multiple conduits running in parallel exceed: 3.
• Preparation: Cut square.
- Burrs and sharp edges: Make smooth.
• Cross-sectional area: Maintain throughout the conduit and trunking length.
• Arrangement: Position vertically and horizontally in line with equipment served, and parallel
with building lines.
• Conduit in walls: Avoid concealed horizontal runs.
• Distance from other services running parallel (minimum):
- Generally: 150 mm.
- Above radiators: 1000 mm.
- Steam services: 600 mm.
• Fire barriers: Provide to maintain integrity of fire compartments.
• Rewireable installations: Enable rewiring from accessible boxes or accessories only.
• Support: Independently fix and support conduit and trunking from building structure.
• Cleaning: Clean insides of conduit and trunking before installing cables.
• Cabling: Install when conduit and trunking enclosure is complete.
• Submittals: Submit manufacturer's technical information and drawings showing the
proposed routes of conduit and trunking and the location of service outlets.
620 PROTECTION OF METALLIC CONDUIT AND TRUNKING

• Joints and ends: Remove grease, oil, dirt and rust before applying protective paint. Paint
immediately following installation.
• Protective paint: Compatible with conduit and trunking finish.
- Type: Match factory finish.

630 INSTALLING CONDUIT GENERALLY

• Fixing: Fix securely. Fix boxes independently of conduit.
• Changes of direction: Conduit boxes or bends site formed by machine. Do not use elbows,
tees or inspection bends.
• Joints: Manufacturer's jointing fittings.
- Lengths of conduit: Maximize.
- Open ends: Plug.
- At movement joints in structure: Manufactured expansion coupling. Install adaptable
boxes on both sides of joint at a maximum distance of 300 mm.
• Connections to boxes, trunking, equipment and accessories: Screwed couplings with
rubber bushes at open ends.
• Conduit boxes: Install flush with finished surfaces. Provide extension rings if required.
- Fixing screws: Countersunk, or round-headed screws.
- Number of fixings (minimum): For conduit boxes use 2. Larger fittings use 4.
- Lids: Fasten with brass slot pan head screws.
• Rear outlet boxes: Locate where surface conduits pass through walls to external
equipment.
• Draw-in boxes:
- Spacing (maximum): 10 m.
- Number of bends between draw-in boxes (maximum): 2.
- Floors: Do not install draw-in boxes in floors.
• Suspended ceiling installations: Fasten outlet boxes to structure above ceiling.
640 INSTALLING METAL CONDUIT

• Fixings: Hospital saddle.
• Joints: Screwed.
• Threaded conduits: Tightly screw to ensure electrical continuity, with no thread showing.
• Conduit connections to boxes and items of equipment, other than those with threaded
entries: Earthing coupling with male brass bush and protective conductor.
650 INSTALLING INSULATING RIGID CONDUIT

• Fixings:
- Distance saddle;
- Saddle; or
- Spacer bar saddle.
• Joints: Solvent.
• Conduit connections to boxes and items of equipment: Threaded bushed entries.
660 INSTALLING PLIABLE AND FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

• Fixings: Saddle or Steel p-clip with PVC insert.
• Joints: Threaded.
• Connections to trunking: Female adaptors and externally screwed brass bushes.
• Connections to equipment: Threaded bush.
670 CONDUIT IN CONCRETE

• Fastening: Fasten conduit securely to reinforcement. Fix boxes to formwork to prevent
displacement of boxes.
• Concrete cover to conduit: 30 mm.
• Conduit in structural slabs: Submit drawings showing proposed route and location.

680 CONDUIT CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

• Surface mounted equipment:
- Concealed conduit: Conceal the final connection.
- Exposed conduit: Contain the final connection from the conduit box within flexible metal
conduit.
• Equipment subject to vibration: Flexible metal conduit terminating in swivel connectors.
- Length of conduit: Adequate for removal of equipment for maintenance.
• Connections to external equipment: PVC covered flexible metal conduit.
690 INSTALLING TRUNKING GENERALLY

• Supports: Purpose made brackets.
• Joints: Manufacturer's jointing fittings. Maintain rigidity of trunking across joint.
- Lengths of trunking: Maximize.
- Open ends: Blank using manufacturer's removable end caps.
- Metal edging: Protect with PVC edging strip.
- Electrical continuity: Maintain at each joint with a copper link fitted on the outside of the
trunking.
• Connections to conduit, boxes, equipment and accessories: Screwed couplings, adaptors,
connectors and glands, with rubber bushes at open ends.
• Connections to trunking covers: Minimize. Submit proposals for lid removal.
• Electrical continuity of covers: Electrically continuous with the trunking or provide protective
conductors.
• Access: Provide space around trunking to permit access for installing and maintaining
cables. Set out access with covers on a continuous face to allow cabling to be laid in
throughout its entire length.
• Trunking passing through building fabric openings: Provide fixed trunking covers. Extend
covers 50 mm from both sides of the opening.
• Cable retaining straps: Required except when trunking cover is on top.
710 INSTALLING STEEL UNDERFLOOR DUCTING

• Setting out: Submit proposals.
- Levelling: Pack voids below ducting. Adjust height of service outlets, junction/ access
boxes and ducting accessories to provide a flush floor finish.
• Rewireable installation: Install underfloor ducting so installation can be rewired without
disrupting the building fabric or finishes. Connect underfloor ducting to an accessible point
within the low voltage distribution system.
• Conduit connections: Install at accessible points only.
715 INSTALLING STEEL FLUSH FLOOR TRUNKING

• Levelling:. Adjust height of trunking (with lid fitted) to finished floor level. Pack voids below
trunking and access/ junction boxes. Leave lid fixed until screeding is completed.
• Rewireable installation: Install trunking so installation can be rewired without disrupting the
building fabric or finishes. Connect trunking to an accessible point within the low voltage
distribution system.
720 DRAINAGE OF CONDUIT AND TRUNKING

• Drainage outlets: Locate at lowest points in conduit and trunking installed externally, and
where condensation may occur.

740 CONDUIT AND TRUNKING ZONES

• Ceiling voids:
- Clear distance between underside of conduit and trunking and topside of ceiling
(minimum): 150 mm.
750 INSTALLING SERVICE OUTLETS GENERALLY

• Complete installation: Clean and stable. Free from bounce and vibration.
760 INSTALLING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SERVICE OUTLETS

• Position within floor tiles: Offset.
• Cable connections to raised access floor outlets: Provide flexible metal conduit.
• Spare compartments: Install blank plates.
770 SUPPORTS AND FIXINGS

• Suspension systems: Proprietary, comprising channel sections with return lips and
accessories.
- Finish and colour: Match conduit or trunking as appropriate.
• Supports and fixings: Select to prevent deterioration by electrolytic action.
• Supports and fixings in locations where moisture may occur: Corrosion resistant.
COMPLETION
910 CLEANING
• Electrical equipment: Clean immediately before handover.

• Electrical properties: Measure electrical continuity and insulating properties of conduit and
trunking. Submit results.
930 DOCUMENTATION
• Drawings: Submit, showing the location of conduit, trunking and service outlets.
- Dimensions: Include sufficient to locate components accurately.

Y63
Cable supports

Y63 Cable supports
Y63 Cable supports
PRODUCTS
310A SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF CABLE SUPPORTS

• Standards: To BS 7671 and in accordance with IEE Guidance notes 1 and as applicable.
literature.
• Sizes not stated: Submit proposals and calculations.
• Spare capacity: 20% installed cables.
320 CABLE BASKET FOR 400V SUB-MAIN CABLING.

• Manufacturer: Swift (Legrand) or equal approved.
• Material: Steel wire.
- Diameter: 5 mm.
• Coating material: Hot dip galvanized.
• Sizes:
- Width: various.
• Side height: 105 mm.
• Features:
- Segregation: Not required.
- Protective cover: Not required.
320A CABLE BASKETS FOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM WIRING.
• Material: Steel wire.
- Diameter: 4 mm.
• Sizes:
- Width: 100 / 150 mm.
• Side height: 30 mm.
• Features:
- Segregation: Cable dividers.

Y63 Cable supports
330 CABLE LADDERS for Sub mains and equipment directly fed from main switchboard
• Material: Metal.
• Electrical properties:
- Continuity characteristics: With electrical continuity.
• Conductivity characteristics: With electrical conductive system component.
• Temperature properties for transport, storage, installation and application:
• Minimum: 5°C.
• Maximum: +40°C.
- Cable ladder free base area: Class Y.
- Resistance to impact: Up to 50 J.
• Width: various.
• Features:
340 CABLE TRAYS for sub mains

• Material: Metal.
• Electrical properties:
- Continuity characteristics: With electrical continuity.
- Conductivity characteristics: With electrical conductive system component.
• Temperature properties for transport, storage, installation and application:
- Minimum: -5°C.
- Maximum: 30°C.
- Cable tray free base area: Class X.
- Resistance to impact: Up to 20 J.
• Width: various.
• Features:
- Flanged: Return.
350 CABLE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

• Components generally: Corrosion resistant where moisture may occur.
• Joints and expansion couplers: Use cable support manufacturer's products.
360 PROTECTIVE COVERS

• Type: Flanged.
- Profile: Flat.
370 CABLE SUPPORT BRACKETS

• Type: many.
• Finish: Match cable supports.

Y63 Cable supports
380 CABLE FASTENINGS

• Use and types:
- Submain cables<95 mm²: Polyethylene one piece overlapping single fixing clamps.
- Submain cables >95 mm²: Aluminium two piece twin fixing clamps.
- Trefoil grouped submain cables: Aluminium trefoil single or twin fixing clamps.
- Lighting final circuit cabling: Cable ties.
385 CABLE CLEATS

• Type:
- Aluminium trefoil single fixing clamps;
- Aluminium trefoil twin fixing clamps;
- Aluminium two piece single fixing claws;
- Aluminium two piece twin fixing clamps; and
- LSZH two piece twin fixing clamps.
390 CABLE TIES

• Type: Wrap around self-locking releasable.
- Material: Steel. Cable ties to be installed uncut. Nylon cable ties will not be accepted
as a final fixing method on this project. Fire cables will be installed to BS 8519:2010,
BS9999 and BS 5839..
395 CABLE BANDS

• Type: Perforated metal bands.
- Material: Steel.
- Protective covering: LSZH.

Y63 Cable supports
EXECUTION
610 INSTALLING CABLE SUPPORTS

• Standards: To BS 7671and in accordance with IEE Guidance note 1.
• Preparation:
- Burrs and sharp edges: Make smooth.
- Cutting: Minimize. Cut square along an unperforated line. Make good edges.
- Treatment of cut surface: Extend 25 mm beyond the cut. Match finish of cable
supports.
• Width: Maintain throughout the cable support length.
• Access: Provide space around cable supports to permit access for installing and
maintaining cables.
• Joints and expansion couplers: Locate between the bracket support and the quarter point.
- Lengths of cable supports: Maximize.
- Ends: Blank with end plates
• Holes in cable supports for the passage of cables: Grommet.
• Fire barriers: Provide where required to maintain fire performance of fabric.
• Support: Independently fix and support from building structure.
- Clearance from building fabric (minimum): 20 mm.
• Components: Avoid contact between dissimilar metals.
• Routing of cable supports: Submit drawings showing the proposed routes.
620 MULTIPLE CABLE RUNS

• Cable supports: Required when cables running in parallel exceed: 3.
630 INSTALLING CABLE TRAY AND CABLE LADDER

• Changes of size and direction: Manufacturer's accessories of the same material type,
pattern, finish and thickness as cable supports.
- Site-formed bends: Not permitted.
- Cable bends: Gusseted.
640 INSTALLING CABLE BASKET

• Joints:
- Cut: Adjacent cross basket wires.
- Earth conductors: Connect across joints.
• Accessories: Form on site and connect with basket manufacturer's coupling components.
650 INSTALLING PROTECTIVE COVERS

• Location: Cables requiring mechanical protection.
650A INSTALLING PROTECTIVE COVERS

• All HV Cables will have protective covers installed to containment
660 CABLE INSTALLATION

• Cabling: Install when cable supports are complete.
• Preparation: Clear cable path of debris.
• Cable pulling: Submit method statement.
• Fastening: Secure cables, do not indent sheaths.
- Spacing (maximum): 600 mm.

Y63 Cable supports
670 INSTALLING CABLE SUPPORTS ON ROOFS

• Location: Elevate above roof.
• Mounting: Load spreading supports.
680 INSTALLING BRACKETS FOR CABLE SUPPORTS

• Suspensions: Threaded rod fixed to channel with shake proof washers and hex nuts.
• Cable supports: Hold down with clamps and spring channel nuts.
690 CABLE SUPPORT ZONES

• Ceiling voids:
- Clear distance between underside of cable supports and brackets and topside of ceiling
(minimum): 150 mm.
COMPLETION

• Electrical properties: Measure electrical continuity and insulating properties of cable
supports. Submit results.

Y65
Electrical accessories

Y65 Electrical accessories
PRODUCTS

- Switches: To BS EN 60669-1.
320 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIESIN PLANT ROOMS

• Electrical accessories manufacturer: MK or equal approved.
- Product reference: Metalclad.
• Plate:
- Material: As Electrical accessory finishes schedule.
- Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
- Insert colour: Black.
• Earthing terminal: Required.
• Cable termination:
- Method: Screw.
- Arrangement: Manufacturer's standard.
320A ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES In office areas

• Electrical accessories manufacturer: MK.
- Product reference: Logic Plus.
• Plate:
- Finish: White.
- Insert colour: To Part M requirements.
- Method: Screw.
- Arrangement: To Part M requirements.
320B ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Beadhead

• Electrical accessories manufacturer: MK.
- Product reference: Logic Plus.
• Plate:
- Finish: White.
- Insert colour: To Part M requirements.
- Method: Screw.
- Arrangement: To Part M requirements.

340 LIGHT SWITCHES GENERALLY.
• Application: Internal.
• Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP 2X.
• Rating: 20 A.
• Actuating method:
- Extra wide rocker bar;
- Rotary switch;
- Secret key switch; and
- Standard rocker bar.
• Mounting: z,
- Direct enclosure mounted;
- Flush;
- Grid; and
- Surface (dependant on area served).
• Poles: Double pole.
350 DIMMER SWITCHES AND CONTROLS Generally as indicated to meet requirements of

lighting controls systems specialists
• Standards: To BS EN 60669-2-1 and BS EN 55015.
• Manufacturer: As electrical accessories manufacturer.
• Mounting:
- Direct enclosure mounted;
- Flush; and
- Grid.
• Type: Overload protection and Soft start .
• Rating: 1000 W.
• Suitable for the following loads: refer to layouts and schedules .
• Control: Momentary, retractive, scene setting.
360 FUSED CONNECTION UNITS For plant areas

• Manufacturer: MK.
- Product reference: Metal clad.
• Control: Switched.
• Indicator lamp: Not required.
• Fuse carrier access: Pull out.
• Flex outlet: Base or front entry dependant on application.
360A FUSED CONNECTION UNITS for public accessible areas and operational areas
- Product reference: Logic +.
• Indicator lamp: Not required.
• Fuse carrier access: Pull out.
• Flex outlet: Base or front entry dependant on application.

370 CABLE OUTLETS GENERALLY

• Flex outlet: Front entry.

380 STANDARD SOCKET OUTLETS GENERALLY

• Type: Single or Twin.
- Switch position: Part M compliant.
- Indicator lamp: Not required.
• Interlock: 3 pin equal pressure.
• Accessories: Dual earth terminals.
385 SPECIALIST SOCKET OUTLETS Final requirements to be identified by specialist(s)

• Standard: To BS EN 60309-1 and BS EN 60309-2.
• Type: Single.
- Indicator lamp: Required.
• Voltage rating: 200-250 V a.c..
• Frequency rating: 50 60 Hz.
• Pin configuration: 2 pole and earth.
400 INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS For use in Server and Hub Rooms
- Product reference: Commando.
• Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: IP 44.
• Material: Polycarbonate.
• Voltage rating: 200-250 V a.c..
• Current rating: 16A / 32 A.
• Pin configuration: 3 pole.
• Mounting: Panel mount.
• Controls: None.
400A INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS for use in plant areas / roof mounted for Building
Maintenance Unit
• Voltage rating: 100-130V a.c., 200-250 V a.c., 380 - 415V a.c. .
• Current rating: 16A / 32 A / 63A.
• Pin configuration: 3 pole for 110V and 230V Installations, 3 pole neutral and earth for 400V
installations.
• Mounting: Surface angle mount.
• Controls: Integral switch with interlock for 400V outlets.

405 INDUSTRIAL PLUGS for use in plant areas / roof mounted for Building Maintenance Unit
• Voltage rating: 100-130V a.c., 200-250 V a.c., 380 - 415V a.c..
• Current rating: 16A / 32 A / 63A.
• Pin configuration: 3 pole for 110V and 230V Installations, 3 pole neutral and earth for 400V
installations.
• Number to be supplied: 1 for every industrial socket outlet installed + 10 spares.
420 FAN ISOLATORS GENERALLY

• Rating: 10 A.
• Poles: Triple pole.
430 ROUND PIN SOCKET OUTLETS For specific non standard restrictive use
• Rating: 15 A.
440 SINGLE VOLTAGE SHAVER OUTLETS GENERALLY

• Output voltage: 230 V.
• Rating: 20 V·A.
• Control: Plug insertion.
• Identification: Engrave with the wording 'SHAVERS ONLY'.
450 SHAVER SUPPLY UNITS GENERALLY

• Output voltage: 115 V and 230 V.
• Rating: 20 V·A.
• Isolating transformer: Integral.

460 DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES Where installed

• Rating: 20 A - 45A.
• Indicator lamp: Required.
470 COOKER CONTROL UNITS Where installed

• Supply to cooker: 45 A.
• Switched socket outlet: 13 A to BS 1363-2.
• Indicator lamp: Required.
480 COOKER CONNECTION UNITS

• Individual terminal block capacity (minimum): 10 mm² stranded cable.
490 CEILING POWER SWITCHES GENERALLY

• Rating: 50 A.
• Neon indicator: Required.
• Flag indicator: Mechanical on/ off indication.
EXECUTION
610 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES


620A ARRANGEMENT
• Locations: as per room data sheets and to the requirements of Part M (refer to Cundall
drawing.
- Coordinate with other wall or ceiling mounted equipment. Submit proposals.
• Positioning: Accurate and square to vertical and horizontal axes.
• Alignment: Align adjacent accessories on the same vertical or horizontal axis.
• Fixing: Secure, plumb and level.
• Mounting heights (finished floor level to underside of accessory in compliance with Part M):
- Light switches: 900 -1100 mm.
- switches requiring precise movements: 750 -1200 mm
- switches requiring precise movements: 750 -1200 mm
- controls requiring close vision: 1200 -1400 mm
- Single voltage shaver outlets: 1200 mm.
- Shaver supply units: 1200 mm.
- Socket outlets: 400 - 1000 mm.
- Emergency pull cord coloured red, located as close to the wall as possible with 2 red
50mm bangles one set at 100mm and the other between 800-1000mm
- Fan isolators: Adjacent fan.
- Cooker control units: 200 mm above worktop.
- Cooker connection units: 600 mm.
• Separation distance between adjacent accessories: (minimum): 30 mm.
630 GRID SWITCH PLATES

• Spare modules: Provide blank inserts.
640 INSTALLING LIGHT SWITCHES

• Multigang switches: Connect so that there is a logical relationship with luminaire positions.
- Unused switch spaces: Fit with blanks.
- Segregation: Internally segregate each phase with phase barriers. Include warning
plates.
COMPLETION
910 FINAL FIX

• Accessory faceplates: Fit after completion of building painting.
920 SPARES
• Plugs: Supply 5% for each socket outlet type.

Y67
Transient overvoltage surge suppression devices

Y67 Transient overvoltage surge suppression devices
PRODUCTS
310 TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES FOR MAINS POWER

SUPPLIESFOR LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
• Standards: BS EN 61643-11 and IEEE C 62.41.
• Position within installation: At switchboards.
• Nominal operating voltage and frequency: 400 V at 50 Hz.
• Maximum operating voltage: 500 V .
• Phase arrangement: Three.
• Type to BS EN 61643-11: 3.
• Surge current (minimum) between any two conductors: 10 kA.
• Let-through voltage (maximum): 600 V.
• Thermal overload protection: Submit proposals.
• Mode of protection: Lines to earth, lines to neutral, neutral to earth.
• Protection status indicators:
- Audible warning;
- Full protection status;
- Reduced protection - replacement required; and
- No protection - failure of device.
• Remote indication of status (including loss of phase/ supply): Required.
• Effect on mains power supplies during normal operation:
- No corruption to normal mains supply.
- No break or shutdown of mains supply.
- No excessive earth leakage current.
• Enclosure: Separate.

310A TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES FOR MAINS POWER

SUPPLIESFOR SMALL POWER SYSTEM.
• Standards: BS EN 61643-11 and IEEE C 62.41.
• Position within installation: At switchboards.
• Nominal operating voltage and frequency: 400 V at 50 Hz.
• Phase arrangement: Three.
• Type to BS EN 61643-11: 3.
• Surge current (minimum) between any two conductors: 10 kA.
• Thermal overload protection: Submit proposals.
• Mode of protection: Lines to earth, lines to neutral, neutral to earth.
• Protection status indicators:
- Audible warning;
- Full protection status;
- Reduced protection - replacement required; and
- No protection - failure of device.
• Remote indication of status (including loss of phase/ supply): Required.
• Effect on mains power supplies during normal operation:
- No corruption to normal mains supply.
- No break or shutdown of mains supply.
- No excessive earth leakage current.
• Enclosure: Within distribution board or consumer unit, as section V31.
330 TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION FOR DATA AND TELECOM

SUPPLIES At each hub room and main server room.
• Standards: To BS EN 61643-21, ITU-T K20 and ITU-T K21.
• Position within installation: Submit proposals.
• Nominal operating voltage: 50 V.
• Bandwidth: 10 MHz.
• Surge current (minimum) per signal wire: 10 kA.
• Current rating (signal): 4 A.
• Thermal overload protection: Not required.
• Mode of protection: Lines to earth, lines to lines.
• Enclosure: Within BMS outstation.

330A TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION FOR CLOSED CIRCUIT

TELEVISION SYSTEMS At each control panel and distribution note .
• Standards: To BS EN 61643-21, ITU-T K20 and ITU-T K21.
• Position within installation: Submit proposals.
• Nominal operating voltage: 50 V.
• Bandwidth: 10 MHz.
• Surge current (minimum) per signal wire: 10 kA.
• Current rating (signal): 4 A.
• Thermal overload protection: Not required.
• Mode of protection: Lines to earth, lines to lines.
• Enclosure: Separate.
340 ENCLOSURES.GENERALLY
• Manufacturer: Refer to Schedule of Preferred Suppliers and Manufacturers of distribution
switchgear.
• Ingress protection to BS EN 60529: To BS EN 60529, IP66.
• Material: Manufacturer's standard.
- Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
350 CABLINGFOR LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

• Cable type: As Circuit schedule.
- Cable size: As Circuit schedule.
350A CABLINGFOR SMALL POWER SYSTEM

• Cable type: As Circuit schedule.
- Cable size: As Circuit schedule.
350B CABLINGFOR DATA AND TELECOMS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

• Cable type: Device manufacturer's standard.
- Cable size: Device manufacturer's standard.
350C CABLINGFOR CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

• Cable type: Device manufacturer's standard.
- Cable size: Device manufacturer's standard.
EXECUTION

• Standards:
- To BS 7671;
- DD CLC/TS 61643-12; and
- DD CLC/TS 61643-22.
• Equipment: Provide electrical supplies to equipment requiring power.
• Fixings: Non-corroding and compatible with the environment where they are installed.

630 INSTALLING TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

• Point of installation: Main switchboard.
• Transient overvoltage suppression devices: Interconnect.
- Cable length (maximum): 250 mm.
- Cable installation: Tightly bind connecting leads together.
• Fuse protection: Provide fuse protection to transient overvoltage surge suppression
devices.
• Isolation: Required .
•
COMPLETION
910 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING GENERALLY

915 LABELLING
• Electrical equipment: Label indicating its purpose.
• Safety signs: Install where voltages above ELV exist.
• Voltage warning notices: Label equipment when the voltage exceeds 230 V.
• Format: To BS 5499-5. Include warnings of the voltage present.

Ulster Hospital
Acute Services Block
Electrical Specification
Job No: 1005885
Doc No: -
Latest Revision: -
Date: Click here to enter doc revision date.

Choose an issuing office (double-click in footer to pick)
Document Revision History
Project name Template Documents Job Number
Specification Name Title 1 Templates
Revision Issue Date Purpose of issue / description of revision

Ref
Document Validation (latest issue)
Revision Issue Date Purpose of issue / description of revision / version
- [Issue Click here to enter text.

Date]
Prepared by Checked by Verified by
Initials
Signature

18th October 2012
This document includes:

Code Section Revision Dated
B06 Engineering services general description
S40 Petrol and diesel supply systems
S70 Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems
V10 High voltage connection
V33 Busbar trunking
V56 Central battery emergency lighting and signage
systems
Y63 Cable supports


Table of Contents
Title Page
B Complete buildings/ structures/ units 5
B06 Engineering services general description 7
S Piped supply systems 38
S40 Petrol and diesel supply systems 40
S70 Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems 46
V Electrical systems 52
V10 High voltage connection 54
V12 Generator systems 57
V20 High voltage distribution systems 69
V21 High voltage switchgear 73
V24 High voltage cabling 83
V30 Low voltage distribution systems 88
V31 Low voltage switchgear 92
V32 Low voltage cabling 105
V33 Busbar trunking 112
V36 Automatic power factor correction equipment 117
V37 Harmonic filtering equipment 121
V39 Electrical inspection and testing 125
V40 Small power systems 128
V44 Uninterruptible power supplies 132
V50 General lighting systems 141
V51 Automatic lighting controls 148
V56 Central battery emergency lighting and signage systems 153
V59 Luminaires and lamps 160
V60 External lighting systems 166
V80 Electrical identification 174
V81 Earthing and bonding systems 178
W Communications, security, safety and protection 185

systems
W16 Induction-loop systems 187
W20 Television and radio distribution systems 195
W30 Telecommunications systems 202
W31 Data distribution systems 210
W40 Access control systems 223
W41 Intruder detection and alarm systems 235
W44 Closed circuit television systems 244
W50 Fire detection and alarm systems 254
W53 Assistance call systems 267
W55 Nurse call systems 271
W60 Lightning protection systems 279
Y General engineering services 284
Y60 Conduit & trunking 286
Y63 Cable supports 296
Y65 Electrical accessories 302
Y67 Transient overvoltage surge suppression devices 309

B
Complete buildings/ structures/ units

B06
Engineering services general description

GENERAL
The purpose of these Employers Requirements is to provide a specification for:
- Electrical services associated with the build and fit out of a 31,000m² (approx.)
Acute Services Block at the Ulster Hospital, Dundonald, Belfast.
The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors will allow for coordination of services with the
mechanical and electrical specifications, as well as controls, vertical transportation systems
and public health specifications, drawings and schedules. The contractor will also allow
for Installation and specialist sub contract design and work within the constraints of the
Mechanical and Electrical Preliminaries and the Main Contract Preliminaries.
The Contractor is to provide the electrical services installation to the Acute Services Block
including office accommodation, staff rest areas, plant space, Clinical areas, Consulting
rooms, Accident & Emergency, CT Scanning Facilities, MRI Scanning, Fluoroscopy, X-Ray,
Ultrasound, Resus, Main Kitchen & Servery, reception, IT hubrooms, communal areas,
processing area external services and ambulance parking facilities.
All services will be designed for 24 hours, 7 days per week continuous operation. The
works undertaken in this set of Employers Requirements covers the design of electrical
and specialist services and systems, manufacture, works testing, supply and delivery to
site, erection, connection, site testing, commissioning adjusting and setting to work to form a
complete functioning package as defined by the drawings, this specification, preliminaries
documents and instructions from the Contract Administrator.
The works will comprise the whole of the labour, plant, and unless otherwise indicated, all
of the materials necessary to form the "complete, fully operational installation" including all
necessary, manufacture, works testing and such commissioning and testing as are
prescribed in subsequent sections of this document and as may otherwise be required to
give an effective working installation.
The Electrical Contractor will also be responsible for engaging all Utilities Providers and
all connections to the building for Electricity, Telecoms, Virgin Media and any other Utilities
deemed necessary to complete the project.
Careful consideration will be given by the Contractors to CDM regulations to ensure

maintainability meets best practise standards, meets manufacturer's specifications and
does not compromise the health and safety of those employed generally on site or the
maintenance personnel who will maintain installed systems and services.

This specification includes but is not limited to the following services and systems;
- incoming medium voltage supply,
- electrical LV distribution,
- all metering,
- installing to BREEAM Excellent standards,
- vertical and horizontal distribution of electrical services,
wiring systems,
- wiring accessories,
- supply provision installation and connection of emergency generators,
- Canteens and Kitchen power design,
- lighting,
- lighting energy control,
- lighting scene setting for patient and staff use,
- external lighting,
- Emergency lighting
- connection of medical equipment, (the contractor will allow for all final connections)
- IT cabling, termination and containment,
- electrical and specialist systems containment,
- fire detection,
- fire alarm,
- alarm monitoring via the fire alert system,
- UPS systems,
- IPS/UPS systems,
- Assistance call
- nurse call,
- Induction hearing loops,
- electrical connections to the plant and BMS system,
- electrical supplies & fire alarm system interfaces to Automatic Smoke Damper
systems
- electrical supplies & fire alarm system interfaces to Automatic Smoke Transfer
Grille systems
- trace heating,
- access control,
- building security,
- renewable energy systems,
- earthing and bonding including 'clean' and 'reference' earthing.
- MEiGAN
- lightning protection
- alterations to existing
- coordination with all members of the design team.
- Oil transfer system
The Electrical Contractors will be required to coordinate with the Mechanical Contractors to
provide power to mechanical plant and ensure all mechanical and electrical equipment is
installed in an organised, coordinated and effective manner to all spaces. Where clauses
are listed or noted that are not included within this specification refer to the appropriate
section of the Mechanical specification.
The requirements are the provision of fully complete fully operational systems. Include for all
necessary equipment, components, plant, accessories, cabling, containment, hardware,
software as appropriate to effect the requirements. Engage with the suppliers of the
equipment to verify the proposed systems and include for procurement of all system
components accordingly.
The systems proposed under these works will require integration with specialist services
and systems (including medical). The contractor will liaise and coordinate fully with

respect to provision and coordination of services to meet the defined requirements of these
specialist services and systems.
This specification will be read in conjunction with the Conditions of Tendering, Conditions
of Contract, all the Contract Drawings issued with it, and all architectural and structural
drawings associated with the project.
The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors will take cognisance of and design to the
ceiling access allowances provided by the Project Architects and adopted by the Project
Electrical and Mechanical Engineers. The Contractor will therefore ensure that all
installation works are coordinated with ceiling access locations and all contractor designed
work packages comply with the access strategy demonstrated in the detailed design
drawings issued as both 'Tender' and 'Contract' status issue by the Acute Services Block
Design Team.
Electrical and Mechanical Sub Contractor elements that require design & installation to be
termed as specialist shall include but not be limited to;
Systems that require design & installation to be termed as specialist include;

- Controls / Building Management System
- Fire alarm and detection system
- Lightning Protection system
- Medical Gases control system
- Lighting Control System
- Emergency Lighting Control system
- Door access Control
- Intruder Alert
- Nurse Call
- Lifts
- Vacuum Transfer System
- CCTV
- Generators
Sub Contract design- (design elements controlled by sub-contractors include)

Lightning protection
Anchors Thermal expansion joints to duct, pipe and containment systems
Bracketwork and supports to services systems
sub containment / final containment electrical back boxes and draw wires
Interconnections and interfaces to existing systems and the management, liaison
and purchase of services or equipment from suppliers not otherwise connected to this
project to complete interfacing works.
The contractor will allow for the provision of installation drawings and also allow for 3D Revit
modelling.
The installation will be completed in compliance with the HTM documentation as detailed
below, MEiGAN, the 17th Edition IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671:2008) and associated
guidance notes together with the Regulations laid down by the Supply Authority (NIE). The
Electrical Contractor will be required to execute all work under the Sub-Contract in strict
compliance the HTM documentation as detailed below, MEiGAN, the 17th Edition IEE
Wiring Regulations (BS 7671:2008) and associated guidance notes and any additional
requirements of the NIE.
Applicable HTMS to the project are inclusive of but not limited to:
- Health Technical Memorandum 01: Decontamination

- Health Technical Memorandum 01-01: The decontamination of reusable medical
devices
- Health Technical Memorandum 02: Medical gases
- Health Technical Memorandum 02-01: Medical gas pipeline systems
- Health Technical Memorandum 03: Heating and ventilation
o Ventilation, design, installation, testing and validation (Part A)
o Operational management and verification (Part B)
Health Technical Memorandum 04: Water systems

- Health Technical Memorandum 04-01: The control of Legionella, hygiene, _safe_ hot
water, cold water and drinking water systems
- Health Technical Memorandum 05: Firecode – fire safety in the NHS
- Health Technical Memorandum 05-01: Managing healthcare fire safety
- Health Technical Memorandum 05-02: Guidance to support functional provisions
for healthcare premises
- Health Technical Memorandum 05-03: Operational provisions
- Health Technical Memorandum 06: Electrical services
- Health Technical Memorandum 06-01: Electrical services supply and distribution
- Health Technical Memorandum 06-02: Electrical safety guidance for low voltage
systems
- Health Technical Memorandum 06-03: Electrical safety guidance for high voltage
systems
- Health Technical Memorandum 07: Environment and sustainability
- Health Technical Memorandum 07-01: Safe management of healthcare waste
- Health Technical Memorandum 07-02: EnCO2de – making energy work in
healthcare
- Health Technical Memorandum 07-03: Transport management and car parking:
best practise guidance
- Health Technical Memorandum 08: Specialist services
- Health Technical Memorandum 08-01: Acoustics
The Contract includes for the supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and
certification/ documentation of the complete Electrical Services associated with the
construction in accordance with the true intent of this specification and accompanying
drawings and to the satisfaction of the Employer and the Contract Administrator.
The electrical contractor, during tender period, will liaise with Main Contract tenderers to
ensure that all items of equipment and plant (requiring electrical services supplies,
infrastructure, containment, wiring etc.) identified in Architectural and Structural drawings,
details, and documents are included. This requirement shall include those items over and
above those indicated on the electrical services tender drawings and documents requiring
electrical services wiring, containment systems, testing, commissioning, setting to work,
demonstration, client training & instruction, maintenance , emergency call-out etc. It is a
requirement that these and all such items are identified by the electrical contractor and
allowed for in his tender submission as no additional costs will be subsequently entertained
for variations for any such items not included by the electrical contractor following award of
tender.
The contractor will include for amendment to existing services and systems as required to
ensure maintenance of services to areas which may partially (at outset) serve project and
non-project areas. Where such instances occur the contractor will alter the systems to
segregate project from non project areas and reinstate operational those sections serving
non-project areas. This will include lighting and small power services.

110 EXISTING SITE AND SERVICES

• Description: For details of the existing site arrangement and layouts refer to Main Contract
Preliminaries section A12.
The existing site services have been altered under a separate contract (Enabling Works) to
facilitate:
- the installation of new incoming services to the building;

- the construction of the building
- interconnection of the building to the existing site services distribution
infrastructures.
The incoming electrical supplies will be derived from allocated connection points to the
site infrastructure. The proposed works will require the provision and installation of the
connections to the necessary networks involved (HV Electricity, Voice/Data Com's, Fire
alarm, BMS, Telecommunications etc. together with any alterations of switchgear settings
as determined by the grading studies existing and that grading study to be carried out as
part of this project by the contractor. The contractor will note that the source services will be
derived from utility infrastructures which are distributed through the site.
It is a requirement in any event that the contractor undertake an underground services
survey to ensure that the existence of all underground and buried services are accounted
for and recorded to facilitate the construction and services works. . .
• Systems: Underground services survey, as section C12 and Building services survey, as
section C14 .

120 BUILDING WORKS

Description: Builder's Work in connection with the contract works such as cutting or drilling
holes, chases in walls, floors or ceilings for the passage of cables or conduits, will be
carried out by the Main Contractor, under the terms of the Contract. The Electrical Sub-
Contractor will be responsible for the correct marking out of all attendances and all other
cutting to be performed by the Main Contractor.
The electrical contractor will include for liaison with the Main contractor for the
purposes of integration and incorporation of all electrical services system distribution
infrastructure plant and equipment/outlets within the building and associated construction
elements as detailed below. The electrical contractor will include for detailing of all of his
requirements for builders works attendances to the main contractor. Building works: The
contractor will note requirements for detailing to the main contractor builders attendances
requirements for incorporation of electrical services in the following elements:
- Plinth systems
- Bund systems
- Trenching
- Ducting
- Formation of chases
All such details will be provided to the main contractor by the electrical contractor in the
form of Builders' work drawings for every interaction with the building fabric, elsewhere
showing fully dimensioned, all foundations, bases, holes, or any other builder's work
requirement. The electrical contractor will include for liaison with the Main contractor for
the purposes of integration and incorporation of all electrical services system distribution
infrastructure plant and equipment/outlets within the building and associated construction
elements as detailed below. The electrical contractor will include for detailing of all of his
requirements for builders works attendances to the main contractor.

To maintain full recessing and acoustic/constructional integrity of partitioning, recessed

electrical outlet back boxes should not be mounted directly back-to back. When setting out
in such instances electrical outlets back-boxes will be off-set by at least the full sectional
width of the partition to/within which they are affixed when such outlets are mounted either
side of a partition.
.
• Building works:
- Fixed access systems, as section L35;
- Fire stopping systems, as section P12;
- Buried engineering services systems, as section P30;
- Access and inspection chamber systems, as section P30; and - Bund system, as
section P33 .
150 MEDICAL GAS SUPPLY SYSTEMS

• Description: The Installation of Medical Gas is a specialist sub contractor design and install
portion of works. The electrical contractor will be expected to install the bedhead services
containment, trunking and vertical service columns (2 per bedroom) and to coordinate with
the medical gas installer and accommodate the medical gas installation within the bedhead
services.
Out with the bedhead services the electrical contractor will provide install, test,
commission full and complete small power installations as required to medical gas supply
equipment and controllers provided and installed by others. Coordinate the installation fully
and ensure all power supplies terminate to present outlets suitably at medical gas system
terminal outlets. Provide and install primary containment to distribute power and
controls/BMS cabling to medical gas outlets. Include for integration to BMS system to
ensure all critical alarms are individually reported and that all secondary alarms are
indicated via common alarm. Audible /visual alarms shall be installed
.
• Systems:
- Medical oxygen supply system, as section S20;
- Medical nitrous oxide supply system, as section S21;
- Medical compressed air supply system, as section S22;
- Medical vacuum system, as section S23; and
- Medical anaesthetic gas scavenging system, as section S25.

150A BEDHEAD SERVICES ENCLOSURE PANEL SYSTEM

• Description: The Bedhead services installation will include small power, data, nurse call,
patient entertainment and medical gas systems. The Electrical Contractor will install the
bedhead services containment to the Main Contractor installed IPS walling systems within
bedrooms and Recovery suites. The Contractor will coordinate fully with the Main
Contractor and Mechanical Contractor to install bedhead systems.
Bedhead Services will consist of two vertical column flush mounted bedhead panels
which will be a pre-fabricated Bedhead Services Enclosure Panel System fitted with
services as described in the Room Data Sheets, Room Loaded drawings and services
drawings including but not limited to; (54) Series Medical Gases, (60) Series Schematics
(62) Series Small Power and Data layouts and (64) Series Nurse Call Systems.
Manufacturer: CABLEFLOW INTERNATIONAL LTD, Windsor House, Abbey Barn Road,

High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire, HP11 1NN, UK, Tel.: +44(0)1494 52 88 11, Fax: +44(0)
1494 53 11 88, www.cableflow.com; OR SIMILAR APPROVED.
Product reference: Bedhead Panel System fitted with clip-fit laminate mdf decorative front
panels (spec TBA) of overall thickness 18mm, integrated light, equipment rail and
protectors.
Fixing: extruded anodised aluminium base frame of sections 50 x 35mm fixed to wall as
per Architect's room elevation & loaded plans.
Other requirements: Internal segregation and screening to allow the fitment, cabling,
maintenance and certification of a compliant system to ISO 11197:2009. Services trunking
modules to M&E specification, powder coated (colour TBA by Architect) with all exposed
anodised silver framework in AA25.
Supplied to site fully factory assembled, gas terminal unit assemblies and pipework as
Medical Gas specification, complete with the components as per RDS and Architect's
room/panel elevation drawings, with services feds from above via ceiling voids.
Fixing: height as Room elevations and Room Data Sheets.

Equipment: as Room elevations, loaded plan and Room Data Sheets
Accessories/ Other requirements: horizontally wall mounted with an appropriate quantity of
lightweight fixings and end caps, Heavy duty fixings in accordance with BS
EN ISO 19054:2009 can be supplied to suit appropriate wall construction if required.
Bedroom Bedhead services will include the following;

Electrical power outlets
Electrical MEIGaN power outlets where required by room data sheets and room loaded
drawings
UPS backed Electrical power outlets where required by room data sheets and room loaded
drawings
Patient-to-nurse call systems:
Staff-to-staff emergency call systems
Cardiac alarm systems: to alert emergency care team (Blue route)
Nurse presence systems
Patient-monitoring facilities for remote indication of alarms
Medical gas outlets
Data Outlets
Patient entertainment systems: including television, radio and headphone outlet
Medical equipment rails will be separate from the vertical flush mounted bedhead services
vertical columns

Recovery Suite bedhead services will include;

Electrical power outlets:
Electrical MEIGaN power outlets:where required by room data sheets and room loaded
drawings
UPS backed Electrical power outlets where required by room data sheets and room loaded
drawings
Patient-to-nurse call systems:
Staff-to-staff emergency call systems
Cardiac alarm systems: to alert emergency care team (Blue route)
Nurse presence systems
Medical gas outlets
Data Outlets
Medical equipment rails will be separate from the vertical flush mounted bedhead services
vertical columns
Recovery Suite bed spaces shall be provided with medical pendants as per room data
sheets and room loaded drawing requirements.
Visible bedhead services will be finished in a RAL colour confirmed by the Project
Architect. All surfaces will be smooth, easy wipe and without visible fixing screws and
comply with HFN30 infection control requirements. Services outlet plates shall have a
modular design ethos that allows for simple reconfiguration of services or the addition of
extra services to the bedhead as well as being quickly accessible for maintenance and
servicing.
All bedhead services shall be compliant with, but not limited to the following;
ES ISO 11197
HTM 08-03 Bedhead Services
HTM 06-01 Electrical Services
HTM 02-01 Medical gas pipeline systems
MEIGaN Regulators (where required - refer to room data sheets)
HFN 30 Infection Control in the built environment
HBN 57 (facilities for treatment to be allowed from both sides of the
bedhead)
BS EN 61000-4-2 Air discharge electrostatic discharge tests (+/- 4KV contact
discharge and +/- air discharge tests)
BS EN ISO 11197 EMC Requirements
The same manufacturer of bedhead services will be used throughout the entire Acute Services
Block installation providing the same standard of finish from the same range of equipment
throughout. The bedhead manufacturer and the Nurse call manufacturer are not required
to be supplied by the same provider, however the contractor will coordinate the two
suppliers for both systems to create an integrated bedhead system.
Assuming the bedhead services trunking is delivered to site with pre-installed gas
pipework, the Electrical Contractor will allow for all pipework jointing and testing within the
medical services trunking to join the pre-fabricated sections together, the Electrical
Contractor would then allow for access and coordination by the specialist medical gas
contractor to connect the medical trunking medical gas pipework to main medical gas
routes and or distribution manifolds.
If medical services trunkings are delivered to site without factory medical pipework
installations the Electrical Contractor shall install the trunking system and allow access and
coordination with the specialist medical gas installer to install medical gas pipework to the
containment system.

Provision will be made to prevent the bed or bed attachments damaging the bedhead
services equipment while the bed is being moved, raised or lowered (for example to
provide some means of buffering fixed to wall, bed or floor).
For a full description of colour codes refer to the Nurse call section of this specification;
standard colours for use on bedheads include;
Orange - patient to nurse calls (two way speech)
Red - emergency staff to staff calls
Blue - Cardiac calls
Small power
All bedhead small power will be clearly labelled with the sockets being engraved with the
relevant circuit reference. All circuits in the same room should be from the same phase although
note from the same power supply to improve redundancy in the system (refer to electrical circuit
charts and (62) series drawings). Socket-outlets and switches should not be installed within a
200 mm radius from the centre of a medical gas terminal unit. Where socket-outlets are
panel-mounted, they should allow for full plug insertion as required by BS 1363-2.
Structured Data wiring In addition to the comprehensive Wi-Fi network points connecting
every patient bedroom to the hospital network fixed data points shall be terminated to the
bedhead service connecting to the hospital IT network. Data points will be capable of
connecting to Electronic Patient Records (EPR) systems when appropriate equipment is
terminated to the RJ45 outlet(s). The data outlets will be capable of voice over IP
termination when appropriate equipment is connected to the bedhead data outlets .
• .
160 GAS SUPPLY SYSTEMS

• Description: For the purposes of this contract (electrical component), the electrical services
works will be to provide and install power to automatic shut off valves and fire alarm
system interfaces to incoming gas supplies to boilers and kitchen gas (where installed).
The Gas supply system itself will be provided under separate contract component
(mechanical services).
• Systems: Natural gas supply system, as section S32.
170 LIQUID FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEMS

• Description: The electrical component of this contract will include to provide and install a
full complete fully operational fuel supply system for the generator systems that will be
installed as part of the Generic Ward Block development in the first phase and then completed
during the Acute Services Contract. Procure, provide, supply, and install all new full complete
fully operational power control and signalling wiring and associated containment systems to the
stand-by generator fuel supply system of the Project. Test commission and certify systems
provided. Include for integration to BMS system to ensure all critical alarms are individually
reported and that all secondary alarms are indicated via common alarm. Audible /visual alarms
shall be installed .
• Systems: Diesel supply system, as section S40.
190 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Description: The electrical component of this contract will include to provide and install a
full complete fully operational suppressant fire fighting system to the transformer rooms and
also the main LV switchroom as part of the electrical sub contract works. Engage the services of
a system specialist to undertake the installation works associated with this system. Bottles to be
located within a dedicated space next to the transformer room and main switchroom with high
level pipework transferring the suppressant to point of use via the public corridor at high level
above the finished ceiling finishes. Procure, provide, supply, and install all new full complete
fully operational power control and signalling wiring and associated containment systems to the
suppressant fire fighting systems of the Project. Test commission and certify systems provided
.
• Systems: Gaseous fire-extinguishing system, as section S70.

240 HIGH VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

• Description:
The electrical contractor will procure provide supply install test and commission a new full
complete fully operational High Voltage (HV) system to the Project
The incoming voltage to the Acute Services Block from the existing Hospital site's medium
voltage ring will initially be rated at 6,600V. At a future date (timescale undetermined) the
ring will be converted to 11,000V. All equipment that is installed as part of this project
will have current ratings and fault level capability to operate on both 6.6 kV and 11kV
voltage levels without any modifications (with the exception of set points). The medium
voltage supplies will be installed to the building by cable that will be terminated via pre-
installed ductwork. The incoming cables will be terminated into two number Ring Main Units,
each being of a different manufacturer to ensure if one fails there will be sufficient capacity to
cover the building. The contractor will be responsible for installing the cables and jointing
at the ring termination points. The contractor will engage the services of a HV systems
authorised specialist to develop and certify the scheme. The supplies derived from the HV
ring will be terminated on the HV switchboard allocated to the building and forming part of
these works. The contractor will provide and install the alterations to the network to
facilitate the integration of the switchboard and the supply transformers of this building and
connection to the existing site infrastructure. From the HV switchboard the contractor will
install the HV connections to the transformers' primary connections. The systems will
include all appropriate battery chargers and emergency HV isolating devices and
associated interconnections to LV infrastructure as required to the direction of the
authorised person. The authorised person will review and agree the services strategies
including EPO.
All HV switching equipment installed as part of this project will include remote lockable
switching panels located outside the HV Switchroom which include illuminated status indicators
to demonstrate the status of each HV switching device (switching devices include Incoming
switches, Outgoing outgoing switches and bus couplers etc)
Procure, provide, supply, and install all new full complete fully operational power, control
and signalling wiring and associated containment systems to the HV distribution systems of
the Project. Test commission and certify systems provided .
• Systems: Incoming electricity supply, as section V10 and High voltage distribution system,
as section V20.

250 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

• Description: Low voltage systems will emanate from the secondary windings of the dual
wound 6,600V - 11,000V / 433V 2500 kVA transformers to serve the Acute Services Block.
The LV distribution systems will terminate as required to various items of plant and
equipment inclusive of but not limited to:
- Lighting & controls, Fire alarm & detection systems, security systems, nurse call
systems, hearing aid systems, general power provisions, data & IT systems,
- BMS and mechanical plant including air handling, pumping, heating & cooling,
humidification, vacuum systems, pneumatic systems
The contractor shall provide and install full and complete fully operational low voltage
services systems and installations to meet the complete requirements of the
project. Installations will include but not limited to protective devices, wiring (power,
control, signalling, communication) outlets, cabling, earthing, bonding, accessories,
containment etc. separately and independently serve the discrete systems of the project as
detailed elsewhere including specialist systems. Generally primary distribution to
specialists services and equipment are required though where a service or system is
procured by the electrical contractor then the electrical infrastructure for that service or
system will be provided by the electrical contractor.
Should there be a loss of the primary supply to the building the two generators will take up the
load of the building to ensure all electrical systems are fully operational. The generator
sequencing will allow both generators to run up to speed with the primary generator taking the
full load of the building with the other generator running on to cool and then switch off. The
generator supply within the ASB will also provide a tertiary supply to the CCC building to ensure
that the electrical supplies are backed-up, this will be changed over manually within the CCC
building by the use of castell keys.
• Systems:
- Proprietary generator system, as section V12;
- Low voltage distribution system, as section V30;
- Low voltage small power system, as section V40; and - Earthing and bonding
system, as section V81 .

250A LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS TO MEDICAL EQUIPMENT

• Description: The contractor will connect medical equipment installed on Level 2 to the
Low voltage distribution network. The final equipment selection will be made post tender,
during the tender process the electrical power to connect to medical equipment is assumed
as 'worst case' therefore the contractor must make allowances for the cable and protective
device listed within the tender documentation. The electrical contractor will provide and
install full and complete fully operational electrical services connections to the medical
equipment. Services will include (but not limited to) power supplies, cabling (power
control, signalling and communications, isolation, circuit protection, containment, earthing
and bonding .
The Electrical services to the fit-out space allocated for the Imaging equipment will
be entirely derived from the existing LV distribution infrastructure designed for this purpose and
will be located within dedicated spaces adjacent to this equipment.
Medical equipment will be deemed to include (but not limited to)
- Medical Pendants,
- Medical Operating lamps,
- Operating theatre control panels
- Operating suites MEiGAN systems installation requirements.
- Cath labs planar equipment,
- UPS infrastructure/switchgear
- Endoscope processing washers, drying cabinets, data transfer systems
- CD automated handling/distribution equipment
- Bed head services modules
- patient bedroom hoists
- Motorised blinds
The contractor will note that all imaging equipment will be provided and installed by
the specialist systems supplier including all wiring and services between components from
the system service cabinets. The Electrical contractor will include for isolating switch
supply termination up to and onto these system cabinets from the main switchboard. The
specialist will extend from those points to the actual cabinets themselves and beyond. It
will be necessary to provide and install separate CPCs to the sub-main supplies of not
less than CSA matching those of the individual phase conductors. The electrical contractor
will install full and complete isolated sub-main supply circuitry, integration of systems with
MEiGAN earthing and test facilities as applicable to various areas of the project,
supplementary and complementary electrical services (i.e. lighting, small power, fire alarm
etc) The electrical contractor will liaise fully with the system specialist to ensure services
provisions meet the required electrical safety & functional earthing considerations and suit
final coordinated room layouts.
The contractor will provide and install full and complete fully operational low voltage
services systems and installations to meet the complete requirements of the
project. Installations will include but not limited to protective devices, wiring (power,
control, signalling, communication) outlets, cabling, earthing, bonding, accessories,
containment etc. separately and independently serve the discrete systems of the project as
detailed elsewhere including specialist systems. Generally primary distribution to
specialists services and equipment are required though where a service or system is
procured by the electrical contractor then the electrical infrastructure for that service or
system will be provided by the electrical contractor.
The contractor will allow for all 'reference earths' deemed necessary by the medical
equipment suppliers to each room / zone that medical equipment is installed. Should there be a
loss of the primary supply to the building the two generators will take up the load of the building
to ensure all electrical systems are fully operational. The generator sequencing will allow both
generators to run up to speed with the primary generator taking the full load of the building with
the other generator running on to cool and then switch off. The generator supply within the
ASB will also provide a tertiary supply to the CCC building to ensure that the electrical supplies
are backed-up, this will be changed over manually within the CCC building by the use of castell
keys.
• Systems:
Proprietary generator system, as section V12;
- Low voltage small power system, as section V40; and
- Earthing and bonding
system, as section V81 .

250B COLD ROOM SYSTEMS

Description: The electrical contractor will coordinate with the Mechanical contractor and
provide appropriately sized power supplies to the contractor designed Medicines and
Vaccines Cold Rooms described in Section T71 of the Mechanical specification and
Section B11 of the Architect's specification. Note that the refrigeration systems to each
cold store will have two cooling circuits each in an N+1 arrangement therefore twin power
supplies to each cold store from different power sources are required to provide
redundancy to the system.
Each cold store will be provided with quantities of small power and data in compliance with
the Architect's specification and internal lighting to each cold store will provide 200lux at
finished floor level. All internal fixtures and fittings for each cold store will be part of the
cold store specialists design package. The electrical contractor will provide for BMS
connections and door access control to each cold store with emergency door release from
inside each cold store to be provided. Door safety controls will be capable of operating
without failure at a minimum of 30° C below the set point of the cold store close control
temperature set point .
Systems:
- Low voltage small power system, as section V40; and
- Earthing and bonding system, as section V81.

260 GENERAL AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Description: The Acute Sevices Block building has been designed to maximise the use of
day light where ever possible and will have day lighting sensing lighting controls wherever
practical. Light fitting selections has been chosen to promote low energy consumption,
therefore general lighting consists of LED lighting.
All internal lighting within medical areas will have a colour temperature of 4000K. The
lighting design and design ethos has been specifically developed to ensure the building
does not have an 'institutional' feel and represents a high quality aspirational lighting
scheme. The contractor will not deviate from the design intent by proposing luminaires
that do not match the type, efficiency, output, RA and design parameters of the lighting
selected by the design team. The designer has included a list of approved alternatives to
each luminaire identified in the luminaire schedule.
The luminaires within the Imaging areas will utilise luminaires which will provide adequate
lighting levels whilst ensuring that infection control is not jeopardised.
The general lighting will be served by a DALI lighting control system allowing for full control
of individual/groups of general luminaires from a variety of switching control points
including photocells presence detectors, nurse call hand-sets, 2 way and intermediate switching
dimming control etc.
The system will interface with fire alarm systems to ensure suitable levels are reinstated
(i.e. full output in the event of fire alerts being raised via the automatic fire detection and
alarm system(s)) For this purpose the lighting control system will be configured to suit the
compartmentation layout and function in accordance with the fire alarm cause and effect.
In the event of a fire alert in a ward the lighting throughout the particular ward where the
confirmed fire alert is initiated shall activate to full output irrespective of initial status at time
of alert (i.e. on/off/dimmed). Other wards abutting will be configured in these fire alert
conditions to raise their light levels only in main access routes on floor/through Ward.
Lighting in patient rooms will remain in their status current prior to fire alert (i.e.
on/off/dimmed). In the event of automatic/manual declaration of complete evacuation than
the lighting in all areas shall be switched on raised throughout to full output to facilitate
evacuation.
Throughout the building(s) emergency lighting systems to BS5266 will be provided and
installed as indicated on the drawings, schedules and within the specification
documentation. The emergency lighting system will comprise of decentralised central batteries
located throughout each level and utilise an inverter to ensure 240V to each of the emergency
luminaires located within the building. The system is fully addressable with monitoring loops
which monitor the phases of the electrical supply at the required distribution point. The system
uses LED luminaires to provide the emergency lighting requirements.
.
• Systems:
- General lighting system, as section V50;
- Automatic Lighting Controls as section, as section v51
- Central battery emergency lighting and signage system, as section V56
- Luminaires and Lamps, as section V59; and
- External lighting systems, as section V60.

260A HIGH FREQUENCY LIGHTING

• Description: BREEAM Requirements for Hea 4
The contractor will confirm within submission of luminaire selection for approvals and
before placement of orders that the fittings selected will meet the BREEAM stipulation of
HEA4 On completion.
260B INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL LIGHTING LEVELS

• Description: BREEAM Requirements for Hea 5 and Tra 4
Light fittings will be installed to provide maintained illuminance (lux) levels in accordance
with the CIBSE Code for Lighting 2006 in all internal areas of the building as well as
meeting the requirements of CIBSE Lighting Guide LG2: Hospitals and health care
buildings.
For areas where computer display screens are regularly used, the lighting scheme will be
designed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of CIBSE Lighting Guide
7 Sections 3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9.
The external lighting will be designed and installed to achieve illuminance levels in
accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6, 'The outdoor environment' for all external areas
within the construction zone (the site being developed for the Acute Services Block and the
external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works).
On completion, the contractor will provide a formal written declaration confirming that light
fittings have been installed in compliance with the relevant standards and that no changes
have occurred in the lighting specification used to demonstrate design stage compliance.
Where changes have occurred, a further declaration will be provided confirming that the
revised lighting specification is in compliance with the BREEAM criteria.

260C LIGHTING ZONES AND CONTROLS

• Description: BREEAM Requirements for Hea 6
The lighting scheme will be zoned to allow separate occupant control of the following
areas:
a. Wards / bedded areas: zoned lighting control for individual bed spaces and control for
staff over groups of bed spaces.
b. Treatment areas, dayrooms, waiting areas: zoning of seating and activity areas and
circulation space with controls accessible to staff
c. Office and circulation spaces
d. In office areas and consulting rooms, zones of no more than four workplaces
e. Workstations adjacent to windows or atria and other building areas separately zoned
and controlled
f. Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience rooms
g. Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas
h. Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating / dining areas
Light switches or controls for a particular zone of the building will be located accessibly to
individuals occupying that zone to enable them to operate the lighting in the space they
occupy. The controls shall be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone they control.
Within the ward areas of the hospital the lighting control will be automatically controlled and will
dim down at the required times to be advised by the client, the nurses will have control of the
lighting via a dimming switch located at the staff base area of the ward should they require to
adjust the lighting.
Within the ward rooms the lighting design has been designed to provide 300lux at the bed to
allow general examination this will be achieved by all lighting within the room being turned on.
Should there be a requirement to examine the patient in more detail then the use of a portable
examination lamp will be required. The patient will also have the ability to control the lighting
within the space by scrolling through a number of pre-programmed scenes by pushing the
relevant buttons on the patient handset.
On completion, the contractor will provide as-built drawings or specification to verify and
confirming that the lighting zones and the location and scope of the user-controls for the
lighting strategy are in compliance with the BREEAM requirements.

260D EXTERNAL LIGHTING

• Description: BREEAM Requirements for Ene 4
All external light fittings for the building, access ways and pathways will have a luminous
efficacy of at least 50 lamp lumen/circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour rendering index
(Ra) greater than or equal to 60 OR at least 60 lamp Lumen / circuit Watt when the lamp
has a colour rendering index (Ra) less than 60.
All external light fittings to car parking areas, associated roads and floodlighting will have
a luminous efficacy of at least 70 lamp lumen/circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour
rendering index (Ra) greater than or equal to 60 OR at least 80 lamp Lumen's / circuit
Watts when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra) less than 60.
All external light fittings for signs and uplighting will have a luminous efficacy of at least
60 lamp lumen's/circuit Watt when the lamp wattage is greater than or equal to 25W OR at
least 50 lamp lumen's/circuit Watt when the lamp wattage is less than 25W.
All external light fittings and roof plant light fittings will be controlled through a time switch
and / or daylight sensor, to prevent operation during daylight hours. Daylight sensor
override on a manually switched lighting circuit will be considered acceptable.
Any decorative lighting and floodlighting provided will be installed in accordance with the
compliance requirements outlined above.
On completion, the contractor will provide as-built site plans and elevations confirming the
location and purpose of all external lighting fittings. The contractor will also provide as-
built lighting specification or lighting designer's calculations confirming lamp lumen's/circuit
watt for each type of fitting as well as the colour rendering index Ra and the external
lighting control strategy. In addition, the contractor shall provide manufacturers' literature
confirming th technical specification for the installed external light fittings.
External lighting will be designed and installed to comply with the requirements of
'Secured by Design' and light levels will allow for facial recognition with the external
CCTV system.
260E EXTERNAL LIGHTING FOR CYCLING FACILITIES

• Description: BREEAM Requirements for Tra 3 and Tra 4
The external lighting for the cycling storage facilities shall be provided in accordance with
BS5489 Part 1 - Lighting of roads and amenity areas. External lighting to the cycling
facilities will be designed and installed to comply with the requirements of 'Secured by
Design' and light levels will allow for facial recognition with the external CCTV system.
On completion, the contractor will provide as-built drawings or specification confirming

that the lighting for the facility is provided in accordance with BS5489 Part 1.

260F EXTERNAL LIGHTING FOR REDUCTION OF NIGHT TIME LIGHT POLLUTION

• Description: BREEAM Requirements for Pol 7
The external lighting strategy will be designed and installed in compliance with Table 1
(and its accompanying notes) of the ILE Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light,
2005.
All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) will be automatically switched
off between 2300hrs and 0700hrs. This shall be achieved by providing a timer for all
external lighting set to the appropriate hours.
Where safety and security lighting will be provided and will be used between 2300hrs and
0700hrs, this part of the lighting system will comply with the lower levels of lighting
recommended during these hours in Table 1 of the ILE's Guidance notes, for example by
using an automatic switch to reduce the lighting levels at 2300 or earlier.
Where specified, any illuminated advertisements will be designed in compliance with ILE
Technical Report 5 – The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements.
On completion, the contractor will provide a marked-up copy of the as-built site plan
showing the areas of the building and site that will be externally lit and any nearby
properties. The contractor will provide a copy of the as-built external lighting design or
specification confirming the external lighting design in compliance with Table 1 of the ILE
Guidance notes, the controls for all external lighting and illuminated advertisements
designed in compliance with ILE Technical Report 5 (if relevant). In addition, the contractor
will provide indicative examples of where and how the strategy complies
with the requirements
260G PATIENT BATHROOM GENERAL AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

• Description: The en-suite bathroom to patient bedrooms will have their luminaires installed
during construction either at the factory or insitu. The bathrooms may be fully or partially
built as supplied ex-works.
If the bathrooms are built as 'pods' before being sent to site the pods will come with all
electrical circuits complete and installed to a roof mounted junction box ready for supply
230V cabling to be installed on-site by the contractor. If the bathrooms are supplied
partially built or 'flat packed' the electrical circuit wiring should be coiled up on the rear of
the bathroom walls ready for connecting to a high level junction box .
The contractor will include for procurement, provision, supply, delivery, installation,
testing, commissioning and setting to work of suitably rated full complete fully operational
power supply systems to meet the installation detail of the bathrooms whether fully built,
partially built/flatpacked or constructed completely on site. The contractor will fully
coordinate the installation connections of the electrical distribution infrastructure to suit the
bathroom termination points whether connection points are required for fully built or
partially built/flatpack options.
If the bathrooms are built on site the electrical contractor will provide all lighting, if the
bathrooms are factory built the lighting shall either be free issued by the main contractor to
the manufacturer or sourced by the manufacturer to specification compliant standards.
.
• Systems: General lighting system, as section V50 and Central battery emergency lighting
and signage system, as section V56.

270 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

• Description: The contractor will provide and install full complete fully operational induction
loop systems. Systems will include all necessary power supply circuitry loop cabling
amplifiers microphones containment cabling accessories etc. to form full and complete
systems to serve the complete requirement so all areas as indicated on the layouts and
architectural layouts and details including furniture and partitioning arrangements
The contractor will engage the services of an induction loop specialist to carry out system
configuration assessment to ensure the functional operation of the system to be installed to
the room construction and any constraints involved.
The specialist will be retained to test and commission and adjust the system during the
installation phase and at completion to ensure any necessary adjustments are addressed
and made during installation to eliminate any necessity for alterations at completion stage
to meet specified operational performance characteristics.
All systems configurations will be coordinated with building constructional details of the
area served including architectural structural etc. .
• Systems: Induction-loop system, as section W16.
280 TELECOMMUNICATION AND DATA SYSTEMS

• Description:
TELEVISION SYSTEM (IPTV)
The contractor will install an Internet Protocol (IP) distributed television system to the
Acute Services Block. The contractor will engage the services of a specialist designer
installer to design procure provide install test commission set to work and certify the
system. The contractor will ensure that the full range of equipment and accessories
necessary to provide a high quality signal reception at all outlet points from the television
distribution network is provided. The system will be provided with cabling with appropriate
levels of shielding to eliminate interference and transient surges from other installations
from corrupting the signal/data transmissions from the system. the electrical contractor
will provide and install full complete electrical services installations to facilitate the
television system. including but not limited to power supplies, cabling and containment
system routed within risers ceiling voids etc. to serve the specialists installation. The
contractor will liaise with and coordinate with the IT systems specialist installers to ensure
the integration of the IPTV system to the Data network space allocated. The televisions will be
procured by the client and issued to the contractor to install.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND DATA SYSTEMS
The electrical contractor will engage the services of a voice and data systems installation
contractor to provide and install a full complete fully operational system to effect the
complete requirements of the project to Clients requirements. The electrical contractor
will provide and install a full complete fully operational power supply, containment, outlet
and cabling installation to meet the requirements of the system throughout the project and
to interconnect to the site wide installation. The contractor will distribute the installation to
the points as indicated on the layouts. The contractor will note restriction on length of run
of final telecommunications/data cable connection of 90m with the patch panels being
strategically placed throughout the building in cleaners cupboards or within the electrical risers,
they will not be placed within the dedicated hub rooms as these are for the medical IT services
only.
.
• Systems:
- Television distribution system, as section W20;
- Telecommunication systems, as section W30; and
- Data distribution system, as section W31.

290 SECURITY SYSTEMS

• Description: Security systems will comply with the requirements of 'Secured by Design'.
Various security systems will be implemented within the generic ward block, all installed
security systems will connect to the Main Hospital Security Control room where
centralised control and monitoring equipment for each system will be installed. Security
systems will integrate with the existing installed site wide systems as detailed below;
• Access Control
Access control will operate with HID proximity cards, electromagnetic door locks, push to
release buttons, emergency release units, door controllers control panels. Access control
shall release doors on the 'Blue route' during a cardiac alert activation.
The Blue route will operate in the following way; When a Cardiac alert push button is
activated at a bedhead the nurse call system will create a cardiac alert response.
Appropriate alert lights will be activated within the ward indicating the bedroom where the
cardiac alert activation has been initiated. The Nurse call system will alert the Cardiac
Response of 'Crash' team of the event and the crash team presence will also be backed
up by staff controlled voice communications.
The Nursecall system will activate a series of blue lights external to the Ward where the
cardiac alert has been raised. These blue lights will indicate the 'blue route' and will
guide the Crash Team from their source point to the bedroom where the cardiac alert has
been initiated.
The crash team originate from Level 3 Cardiology. The crash team will use the staff lift at
Stair core 2 (North) to access all levels. All access doors on the blue route between the
Level 3 Crash team location in Cardiology and the bedroom where the activation has taken
place will unlock to allow the Crash Team easy access to the route. The staff lift will auto
-park at Level 3 and remain there until the Crash Team operate the lift. Any auto-doors on
the blue route shall open to allow easy access for the Crash Team.
The access controlled doors and auto doors will remain in the open state until the blue
Route alarm is reset. This will be a manual operation by a member of the Ward staff as
part of the Crash Team Cardiac procedure. As part of the Blue route map throughout the
Generic Ward Block & the Acute Services Block. The blue route is controlled by the Nurse-call
system and will unlock door access doors which are designated as being on the blue route
during a blue route cardiac event.
After the event / when rest door access doors will return to normal operation. Any auto
doors on the blue route should open until the blue route system is reset. The stair core two
staff lift will auto-park at Level 3 after every use whilst the blue route alert is active.
• Intruder detection
Intruder detection will utilise PIR sensors for the purposes of detection of movement, door
and window contacts to detect forced entry.
• CCTV
CCTV cameras to enable observation and recording of public and strategic areas/locations
around the site utilising IP topology ensuring all images are able to be viewed within the security
room this will require a fibre cable to connect to these areas.
The electrical contractor will provide and install full complete fully operational cabling
containment and distributions systems and infrastructure to deliver access control
provisions to points required by the specialist installers. Systems components provided for
this purpose will be suitable for application and subject to specialists recommendations.
The electrical contractor will liaise fully with the specialist to ensure suitability of
containment systems components

• Systems:
- Intruder detection and alarm systems, as section W41
- Closed Circuit Television Systems, as section W44
- Conduit and Trunking as section Y60
- Cable supports as section Y63.
290A SECURITY SYSTEMS

• Description: BREEAM Requirements for Man 8 Security
All systems and building features will be installed in accordance with the
recommendations of the Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) or Crime Prevention Design
Advisor's (CPDA) recommendations. The final building and site design will embody the
recommendations of the ALO / CPDA and will be built to conform to the principles of
Secured by Design . The contractor will engage with these bodies to develop and ensure
incorporation of their recommendations.
On completion of the project, the contractor will provide correspondence from the ALO /
CPDA confirming that the as-built development or design complies with their
recommendations and a copy of the development's 'Secured by Design' certificate.

300 DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS

• Description: The following systems will be installed to the Acute Services Block;
Fire Detection and Alarm system

The ward block fire detection and alarm system will be installed to meet the full
requirements of a type L1 system as defined in BS5839. The system will be integrated to
the site wide fire alarm system. The contractor will engage the services of a fire alarm
systems specialist to undertake the verification of the proposed layouts, design, procure
provide install all necessary equipment components, accessories devices controls and
software etc. to effect a fully integrated system. The contractor will note that the ceiling void
detection will not be required following a risk assessment by RPS & consultation of Castlereagh
Council. The system will be fully locally interfaced with ancillary services and systems including
but not limited to:
- BMS
- Security detection and alarm
- Access control
- Lighting
- IT
- Nurse call
- Theatre control panels
The electrical contractor will provide and install full and complete fully operational power
supply, cabling and containment systems to serve the full and complete requirements of
the fire alarm system.
Critical alarms will be alerted to the site main 24hour switchboard via the fire alarm
system. Critical alarms include but are not limited to ;
Cold Stores Temperature
Cold Stores power supply
Medical gas alarms
Fire suppression systems activation
Staff panic alarms
Assistance call system
An assistance call system will be installed primarily for assistance calls from accessible
facilities located in public areas . The electrical contractor will engage the services of a
systems specialist to undertake the installation works including testing commissioning and
certification. The electrical contractor will provide and install all necessary power supply,
cabling and containment to meet the requirements of the systems specialist
Nurse call system

The electrical contractor will engage the services of a nurse call system specialist to
validate and verify the proposed layouts, design develop, procure provide install test
commission set to work and certify a full complete fully operational nurse call system.
Water Leak Detection and Alarm System

The water leak detection system will be installed within the main LV switchroom below any
water or drainage system that is run within this room. There will be a requirement to install leak
The functional requirements of the system will include but not be limited to:
- Nurse call Patient to nurse

- Nurse call nurse to nurse
- Nurse call Emergency
- Nurse call cardiac team blue route
- Local room controls (lighting, motorised blinds, TV/radio)
- Audio visual (televisual) communications between areas such as operating suites, staff
rooms and staff bases
- Staff attack system
The electrical contractor will provide and install a full complete IP based system to effect
these requirements. The contractor will provide and install a full complete fully
operational power supply, cabling and containment system to effect the systems'
services requirements.
.
• Systems:
- Fire detection and alarm system, as section W50;
- Assistance call system, as section W53;
- Nurse call system, as section W55; and
- Water leak detection and alarm system, as section W58 .
300A ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO ASD SYSTEMS

Description: Electrical services to Automatic Smoke Damper (ASD) systems
ASDs and associated control panels shall be provided and installed as part of the
mechanical services contract.
They shall be located where ductwork passes through fire compartment walls and/or where
indicated on the drawings.
The ASD systems will comprise a number of smoke damper control panels allocated to
serve control and operational requirements of local groups of ASDs. Each of the ASD
Control Panels will be provided with direct wired power supplies through the electrical
contract. Each of the ASDs will also be provided with direct wired power supplies through
the electrical contract. The Control Panel of each ASD system will be provided with a fire
alarm interface. This interface will initiate a signal to the control panel which will in turn
signal the group of ASDs served to operate in accordance with the cause and effect
schedule. The mechanical contractor is responsible for providing the complete control
wiring and associated installation between the ASD control panels and the ASDs.
Local power supplies to the controls panels and dampers will be provided under the
electrical contract. The mechanical contractor is responsible for the final connection of the
panels and smoke dampers to these power supplies. All such works in this regard will be
in accordance with BS7671 17th Edition IEE regulations and associated Guidance Notes.
The installation details and methods to be adopted for this element of the works will
match that of the electrical services circuitry infrastructure .
Fire alarm interfaces shall be the primary controller of the ASDs under fire conditions. In
the event of a confirmed fire alert the fire alarm interfaces will be configured to close the
ASDs. Final connections between the ASDS, associated control panels and the power
supplies & fire alarm interfaces shall be carried out as part of the mechanical services
contract works.
The provision and installation, testing commissioning and certification of the final wiring
connections and associated containment installations to the ASDs shall be the
responsibility of and carried out by the mechanical services contractor.
The electrical services contractor will liaise with the fire alarm system specialist and the
mechanical contractor to ensure that the mutual commissioning requirements are fully
coordinated and integrated into the fire alarm cause and effect.
.

300B ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO ASTG SYSTEMS

Description: Electrical services to Automatic Smoke Transfer Grille (ASTG) systems
ASTGs will be provided and installed as part of the mechanical services contract.
They shall be located where ductwork passes through fire compartment walls and/or where
indicated on the drawings.
The ASTGs controllers will be provided with dedicated individual direct wired power
supplies through the electrical contract. Each of these ASTG controllers will also be
provided with a dedicated fire alarm system interface through the electrical contract. The
power supplies and fire alarm interfaces of each individual ASTG will be coordinated with
the associated controller. Where an ASTG is installed within a door, the mechanical
contractor will be responsible for the control wiring installation and associated containment
between the ASTG and its controller. In the event of a confirmed fire alert locally the fire
alarm interfaces will be configured to close the ASTGs
Local power supplies to the ASTGs and associated controllers will be provided under the
electrical contract. The mechanical contractor is responsible for the final connection of the
ASTGS and controllers to these power supplies. All such works in this regard will be in
accordance with BS7671 17th Edition IEE regulations and associated Guidance Notes.
The installation details and methods to be adopted for this element of the works will
Fire alarm interfaces will be the primary controller of the ASTGs under fire conditions. In
the event of a confirmed fire alert the fire alarm interfaces will be configured to close the
ASTGs. Final connections between the ASTGs, associated controllers and the power
supplies & fire alarm interfaces will be carried out as part of the mechanical services
contract works.
connections and associated containment installations to the ASTGs will be the
responsibility of and carried out by the mechanical services contractor.
mechanical contractor to ensure that the mutual commissioning requirements are fully
coordinated and integrated into the fire alarm cause and effect.
.

300C ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO SMOKE VENT SYSTEMS

Description: Electrical services to Smoke Vent systems
Smoke Vent systems will be provided and installed as part of the main building contract.
They will be located within stairwells and/or where indicated on the drawings.
The Smoke Vent Systems Control panels shall be provided with dedicated individual direct
wired power supplies through the electrical contract. Each of these control panels will
also be provided with a dedicated fire alarm system interface through the electrical
contract. The power supplies and fire alarm interfaces of each individual Smoke vent
control panel will be coordinated with system installer. The Smoke Vent system
contractor will be responsible for the control wiring installation and associated containment
between the Smoke vent system control panel and its field equipment and components. In
the event of a confirmed fire alert locally the fire alarm interfaces will be configured to
initiate action of the Smoke Vent system in accordance with the cause and effect schedule.
The Smoke Vent system contractor is responsible for the final connection of the smoke
vent systems control panels to these power supplies and fire alarm system interfaces. All
such works in this regard will be in accordance with BS7671 17th Edition IEE regulations
and associated Guidance Notes. The installation details and methods to be adopted for
this element of the works will match that of the electrical services circuitry infrastructure .
Fire alarm interfaces will be the secondary controller of the Smoke Vent Systems under
fire conditions. In the event of a confirmed fire alert the Smoke vent control panels will be
configured to operate in accordance with the fire strategy cause and effect schedule. Final
connections between the Smoke Vent Systems and the power supplies & fire alarm
interfaces will be carried out by means of fire resistant cabling to match the electrical
infrastructure wiring specification as part of the Smoke Vent System contract works.
connections and associated containment installations to the Smoke Vent Systems will be
the responsibility of and carried out by the Smoke Vent System specialist.
Smoke Vent system installer to ensure that the mutual commissioning requirements are
fully coordinated and integrated into the fire alarm cause and effect.
.

300D ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO NATURAL VENT SYSTEMS

• Description: Electrical services to Natural Vent systems
Natural Vent systems will be provided and installed as part of the main building contract.
They will be located within hot-links, walkways and/or where indicated on the drawings.
The Natural Vent Systems Control panels will be provided with dedicated individual
direct wired power supplies through the electrical contract. The power supplies of each
individual Natural Vent control panel will be coordinated with system installer. The Natural
Vent system contractor will be responsible for the control wiring installation and associated
containment between the Natural Vent system control panel and its field equipment and
components.
The Natural Vent system contractor is responsible for the final connection of the Natural
Vent systems control panels to these power supplies. All such works in this regard will be
in accordance with BS7671 17th Edition IEE regulations and associated Guidance Notes.
The installation details and methods to be adopted for this element of the works shall
Final connections between the Natural Vent Systems and the power supplies will be
carried out by means of cabling to match the electrical infrastructure wiring specification as
part of the Natural Vent System contract works.
connections and associated containment installations to the Natural Vent Systems will be
the responsibility of and carried out by the Natural Vent System specialist.
The electrical services contractor will liaise with the mechanical services contractor and
the Natural Vent system specialist to ensure that the mutual commissioning requirements
are fully coordinated and integrated into the building and systems commissioning
programme.
.
• Systems: .
310 PROTECTION SYSTEMS

• Description: LIGHTNING PROTECTION
The electrical contractor will provide and install a full and complete fully operational
lightning protection system in accordance with BSEN62305. The contractor will engage
the services of a lightning protection systems specialist to verify and validate the proposed
layouts, design procure provide install test commission and certify the full and complete
fully operational system. The systems specialist will provide and install systems surge
arrester to meet impulse transmission through the services installations as detailed on the
layouts. The lightning protection systems specialist will review all services and systems
layouts to ensure all necessary requirement in this regard are met. The system will be
based on the Faraday Cage principle. The specialist will review all geographical
constraints in the determination of the system requirements.
The electrical contractor will provide all necessary attendances on the systems specialist
to effect a full and complete fully operational system. The system specialist will review the
building plans, sections and constructional details to ensure all elements are suitably
integrated and protected. All roof top plant, infrastructure and extraneous metal work are
bonded to system
.
• Systems Lightning protection system, as section W60.

310A PROTECTION SYSTEMS

• Description: EARTHING AND BONDING
The electrical contractor will provide and install a full and complete fully operational
earthing and bonding installation in accordance with BS 7671 and associated Guidance
notes, BS7430, BSEN62305 and MEiGAN. The contractor will engage the services of a
MEiGAN systems specialist to verify and validate the proposed layouts, design procure
provide install test commission and certify the full and complete fully operational system.
The systems specialist will provide and install systems surge arrester to meet impulse
transmission through the services installations as detailed on the layouts. The earthing and
bonding systems specialist will review all services and systems layouts to ensure all
necessary requirements in this regard are met.
The electrical contractor will provide all necessary attendances on the systems specialist
to effect a full and complete fully operational system. The system specialist will review the
building plans, sections and constructional details to ensure all elements are suitably
integrated and protected. All roof top plant, infrastructure and extraneous metal work are
bonded to system.
The Contractor will install earth mats for LV network, MV network and LV Generators as
part of this project.
LV
Low voltage earthing will connect to the start point of each of the two dedicated building
transformers. A earth mat for LV earth shall be located below the Level 1 floor slab, this
earth will be sized to suit the potential fault current from the Low Voltage network and will
be installed and commissioned before the Level 1 slab is poured. The contractor will
record all test results and inform the Electrical Engineer of the impedance values to allow
the checking of electrical calculations. The Contractor will be responsible for carrying out
all protection studies based on the selected equipment to allow disconnection times and
discrimination levels to be set by the commissioning Engineer.
HV Earthing
The HV earthing system will be interconnected to the existing site wide HV earthing
arrangement. a dedicated HV earth mat will be provided and installed local to the HV
switchroom (refer to drawings). Interconnections will be made to the LV earth mat and the
utility/REC HV earth to ensure continuity under fault conditions. interconnections will be
made such as to enable isolation for testing and verification etc..
Generator earthing
A separate generator earthing mat will be provided and installed. The generator earthing
system will incorporate neutral earthing contactors to enable isolation of the generator
systems from the LV/HV earthing infrastructure.
.
• Systems Lightning protection system, as section W60
Earthing and Bonding as section V81
MEiGAN.

320 TRANSPORT SYSTEMS

• Description: The specification requirements for vertical transportation is detailed in the
accompanying separate lift specification. To accommodate the lift equipment the electrical
contractor will install all required electrical supplies to the lift shafts (top or bottom to be
coordinated with the lift supplier) including all necessary A & B power supply changeover
units for firefighting lifts. The electrical contractor will allow for attendance and liaison
with the lift supplier including as many meetings as required to finalise the installation
requirements. The electrical contractor will note requirements to integrate lifts with the fire
alarm systems and the IP based nurse call system for the activation of the cardiac call blue
route.
The contractor will provide and install all necessary power supply, cabling, containment
etc to facilitate the lift systems specialists requirements including incoming power,primary
interconnections to BMS, connections to nurse call and fire detection and alarm systems
infrastructure
.
• Systems: Lift system, as section X10.
330 CONTROL SYSTEMS

• Description: Please refer to the Mechanical Specification for an overview of the Building
Management Systems.
• Systems: Building monitoring and management systems, as section Y41.

340 SUB-METERING OF SUBSTANTIAL ENERGY USES

Description: BREEAM Requirements for ENE 2
Separate accessible energy sub-meters, labelled with the end energy consuming use, will
be provided for the following systems (where installed):
- Space heating
- Domestic Hot Water
- Humidification (each individual humidifier)
- Environmental Cooling
- Process cooling
- Fans (major)
- Lighting
- Small power (lighting and small power can be on the same sub-meter where supplies
are taken at each floor / department)
- Other major energy consuming items where present (kitchen plant, cold storage plant,
laboratory plant, transportation systems (e.g. lifts)).
- Separate metering shall be provided for plant of the following sizes:
(i) Any boiler installation comprising one or more boilers or CHP plant feeding a
common distribution circuit with a rated output of 50kW or more.
(ii) Chiller installations comprising one or more chillers units feeding a common
distribution circuit.
(iii) Any electric humidifiers with a rated output of 10kW or more
(iv) Motor control centres providing power to fans and pumps with a rated rated
output of 10kW or more.
(v) Any final electrical distribution boards with a rated output of 50kW or more.
The energy meters will be located on the main LV Switchgear which will allow for easy access
to facilitate regular monitoring and readings by the building staff and facilities manager.
suitable location are the plant room, main distribution room or control room.
All energy sub-meters will have a pulsed output to enable connection to the Building
Management System (BMS) for the monitoring of energy consumption.
The electrical contractor will include for provision and installation of electrical energy
metering facilities as indicated on the schematic layouts. The contractor will include for
modbus collation of energy meter readings within the associated switchboard. The
contractor will liaise with the BMS systems specialist to ensure integration of the
Modbus outputs to the BMS system. The contractor will confirm to the BMS specialist
the services of each and every individual metered supply.
350 TRAVEL INFORMATION POINT

Description: BREEAM Requirements for TRA 7
A power point and and network access point will be provided to facilitate the installation
and connection of an electronic 'real-time' public transport information system to enable
staff and building visitors to access up-to-date public transport information and plan their
journey. The system will be provided to the main entrance area with adequate signage
at its point of use and throughout appropriate areas of the development indicating its
purpose and location / existence.
On completion, the contractor will provide as-built drawings or specification confirming the
installation of a BREEAM compliant travel information point.

360 GLARE CONTROL HEA 3

Description: BREEAM Requirements for HEA 3
An occupant control shading system (blinds) will be provided on all windows, glazed
doors and rooflights in areas fitted with beds, desks or workstations. The blinds in each
space will be operated by means of individual handheld electronic controllers provided for
each space.

S
Piped supply systems

S40
Petrol and diesel supply systems

GENERAL The diesel supply system for the generator installation is defined in this section
of the specification. The provision, installation, testing, commissioning, certification, and
setting to work of the diesel supply system shall be undertaken by the generator system
specialist as part of the Electrical Contractors works.
120 DIESEL SUPPLY SYSTEM The requirements are for the provision and installation of a
complete fully operational effective diesel supply system to serve the individual generator
sets of the project. The diesel supply system will include fuel polishing equipment to
remove water, fungi and microbiotic organisms from the stored diesel delivery system.
Fuel polishing must be located at point of use for both generators to deal with the main
underground storage tanks and the day tanks which will be installed adjacent to the
generator sets. System shall include all necessary levels monitoring, shut-off controls,
BMS and fire alarm interfaces as necessary .
• Manufacturer: Generator systems specialist.
• Supply: Pumped.
• Service tanks: twin walled Carbon steel.
- Accessories:
- Contents gauges;
- Fill points;
- Sight glasses; and
- Overfill alarms and overfill prevention devices.
• Storage tanks: twin walled underground carbon steel.
- Accessories: Fill points and Overfill alarms and overfill prevention devices.
• Location of tank: Underground.
• Diesel heating methods: Trace heating.
• Pipelines: As section Y10.
- Accessories:
- De-aeration devices;
- Filters;
- Fuel meters; and
- Remote-acting fire safety valves.
• Diesel pump: Transfer pump, as section Y20.
• Outlets: Generator systems, as section V12.
• Controls: As section Y40.
• Completion:
- Plant and equipment identification: As section Y32
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210A DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the generators' diesel supply system.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, design, calculations and manufacturers'
literature.

PRODUCTS
310 SERVICE TANKS, CARBON STEELA day tank will be installed for each generator within
the generator room at Level 1 of the Generic Ward Block. The tanks shall be suitably
mounted and supported to afford gravity feed to the associated generator set. Layout shall
be provided to suit generator systems arrangements.
• Standard: To BS EN 12285-1, BS EN 12285-2 or BS EN 14015.
• Type: Double skin.
• Manufacturer: Generator supplier.
• Mounting: Horizontal.
• Tank class to BS EN 12285: .
• Tank capacity: Day tank must allow for a minimum of 8 hours continuous running at full load.
The day tank will be capable of being refilled from the main storage tank without the
generator shutting down. .
- External diameter of tank: Submit proposals..
- Overall length of tank: Submit proposals.
• Manhole diameter: 1000 mm.
• External coating: Epoxy or polyurethane.
• Fittings:
- Fill pipe;
- Vent pipe;
- Isolating valves; and
- Drain valve
330 STORAGE TANKS, CARBON STEEL The storage tanks shall afford 120 hours run-time
capacity (excluding day tank capacity) for the generators. The physical size of the tanks
proposed shall incorporate within the dimensions proposed the fuel consumption rates of
the proposed generator sets. The tanks shall be underground type
• Standard: To BS EN 12285-1, BS EN 12285-2 or BS EN 14015.
• Type: Double skin.
• Manufacturer: Generator Specialist.
• Mounting: Horizontal.
• Tank class to BS EN 12285: .
• Tank capacity: Capacity must allow for 120 hours continuous running at full load .
- External diameter of tank: Submit proposals.
- Overall length of tank: Submit proposals.
• Manhole diameter: 1000 mm.
• External coating: Polyurethane.
• Fittings:
- Fill pipe;
- Vent pipe;
- Isolating valves; and
- Drain valve
- Leak detection.
350 OUTFLOW HEATERS

• Standards: To BS 799-5 and in accordance with BS 5410-2.
• Heating method: Electric.

360 TANK HEATERS

• Type: Immersion .
• Heating method: Electric.
370 TRACE HEATING TO PIPELINES Provide and install a full complete fully operational and
effective installation including necessary services and associated connections
• Type: Electric cables.
• Manufacturer: Raychem or equal.
Product reference: Submit proposals.
380 ANTI-SYPHON VALVES Provide and install a full complete fully operational and effective
installation including necessary services and associated connections
Product reference: Submit proposals.
390 FILTERS Provide and install a full complete fully operational and effective installation
• Standard: To OFS E104.
• Manufacturer: System Manufacturer .
400 REMOTE-ACTING FIRE SAFETY VALVES Provide and install a full complete fully
operational and effective installation including necessary services and associated
connections
• Type: Electrical.
410 CONTENTS GAUGES Provide and install a full complete fully operational and effective
• Standards: To BS 799-5 and OFS E103.
• Type: Electronic.
420 FILL POINTS Provide and install a full complete fully operational and effective installation
including necessary monitoring, communications, controls, services and associated
connections
• Accessories: Cabinet and Cap and chain.
430 SIGHT GLASSES Provide and install a full complete fully operational and effective
installation
• Diameter: 25 mm.
• Connections: Flanged.

440 OVERFILL ALARMS AND OVERFILL PREVENTION DEVICES Provide and install a full
complete fully operational and effective installation including necessary monitoring,
communications, controls services and associated connections
• Standard: To OFS E105.
460A FUEL METERS Provide and install a full complete fully operational and effective
• Type of fuel: Diesel.
• Flow rate: To 4 x fuel consumption rates of generator sets (both together at full rated
Output).
• Connections: Flanged.
• Output: R232.
470 DE-AERATION DEVICES Provide and install a full complete fully operational and effective
installation including necessary services and associated connections.
EXECUTION
620 INSTALLATION OF TANKS

• Standards: To BS EN 12285-1, BS EN 12285-2 and in accordance with BS 5410-2.
• Above ground steel tanks: Support on plinths built on concrete foundations. Run plinths
across the shortest base dimension of the tank.
- Plinth width: Slightly wider than the tank.
• Above ground plastics tanks: Support on a firm level base. Provide restraining straps in
exposed conditions.
• Below ground tanks: Excavate.
• Fall: Arrange tank to slope slightly to drain off cock end.
630 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES

• Installation: In accordance with BS 5410-2 and OFTEC Technical Book 3.
• Buried pipelines: In accordance with OFTEC TI/134.
640 INSTALLATION OF METERING PUMPS

• Installation: In accordance with the Association for Petroleum and Explosives
Administration (APEA) Design, construction, modification, maintenance and
decommissioning of filling stations. 2nd edition 2005.
COMPLETION
910 DOCUMENTATION
920 COMMISSIONING
• Commissioning: In accordance with OFTEC Technical Books 2 and 5.

930 MAINTENANCE
- Duration: Until 12 months after Practical Completion .

S70
Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems

GENERAL
109B GENERAL
The requirements are to provide three off; complete fully operational and effective gaseous
fire-extinguishing/suppressant systems. The fire suppressant system to be utilised within
the Acute Services Block LV Switchroom and transformer rooms is Heptafluoropropane
HFC227ea or equal approved. The sub contract design and installation for the
suppression systems will be considered as part of the electrical installation contract.
The Electrical contractor will liaise with the mechanical contractor to coordinate an
exhaust ventilation system for the LV Switchroom and transformer rooms that will be capable of
ten air changes per hour. The electrical contractor will coordinate with the building contractor
to install pressure relief grillage to the free area (m²) defined by the specialist sub contract
designer. The Main Contractor will be responsible for providing the wall penetrations to
the sizes and locations stated by the specialist system designer
The suppressant systems will be connected to the building fire alarm system for status
monitoring but will not be controlled by the building fire alarm systems. Each suppressant
system will require its own control panel and fire detection activation which is separate,
distinct and not influenced by the building fire detection and alert system.
120A HALOCARBON GAS TOTAL FLOODING FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

• System manufacturer: BPS NI or approved equal.
• Extinguish ant type: HFC227ea.
• Source: High pressure storage cylinders.
• Outlets: Nozzles.
• Operation: Electrical actuation.
• Controls: Control panel and Electrical automatic control and delay devices.
• Accessories: Pressure gauges and pressure switches, input and output interfaces to fire
detection and alarm systems.
• Completion:
- Plant and equipment identification: As section Y32.

140A PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS
• Pipework up to and including 40mm shall be to BS EN 10225, galvanised, heavy quality

with wrought steel fittings to BS EN 1024.
Screwed joints to BS21 and BS EN 10226-1 and navy pattern unions.
• Pipework 50mm and over shall be to BS EN 10217-1, galvanised .
• Fittings for steel tubes:

Malleable: To BS 143 and BS 1256.
Navy unions
• Jointing materials for steel tubes:

Jointing compound: To BS 6956-5.
PTFE tape: To BS EN 751-3.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the gaseous fire-extinguishing system.
literature.
230A HALOCARBON GAS FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

• Standards:
- FM-200 (HFC 227) extinguish ant: To BS EN 15004-5.
PRODUCTS
310 HIGH PRESSURE STORAGE CYLINDERSFOR HALOCARBON GAS TOTAL

FLOODING FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
• Type: Seamless steel.
• Number: Submit proposals.
• Capacity: Submit proposals.
325 CONTAINER VALVE ASSEMBLIES AND THEIR ACTUATORS

326 HIGH AND LOW PRESSURE SELECTOR VALVES AND THEIR ACTUATORS
• Manufacturer: Submit System Manufacturer.
328 CHECK VALVES AND NON-RETURN VALVES


340 NOZZLES FOR HALOCARBONS AND INERT GAS FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

• Type: Overhead.
350 ELECTRICAL ACTUATIONFOR HALOCARBON GAS TOTAL FLOODING FIRE-

EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
• Actuator: In accordance with BS 7273-1.
• Type:
- As section W50;
- Point smoke detector; and
- Special fire detectors to BS EN 12094-9.
360 MECHANICAL ACTUATIONFOR HALOCARBON GAS TOTAL FLOODING FIRE-

• Actuator: In accordance with BS 7273-2.
• Type: Manual release.
370 CONTROL PANELSFOR HALOCARBON GAS TOTAL FLOODING FIRE-

• Type: 3 zone.
• Components on panel fascia:
- Buzzer silence;
- Fire-extinguishing system automatic mode - lamp;
- Fire-extinguishing system manual mode - lamp;
- Hold gas release - switch and lamp;
- Isolate gas release circuit - switch and lamp;
- Isolate remote signal - switch and lamp;
- Key operated security switch;
- Lamp test switch;
- Manual/ automatic mode - push switch;
- Manual release unit ;
- Power on lamp;
- System general fault - lamp and buzzer; and
- Test evacuate alarm switch.
380 ELECTRICAL AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND DELAY DEVICES

• Controls:
- Abort switch ;
- Automatic and manual/ manual only switch;
- Discharge prevention device;
- Hold switch
- Time delay facility
- Double knock interfacing to server room fire detection system.

400 MANUAL TRIGGERING AND STOP DEVICES

410 NON-ELECTRICAL DISABLE DEVICES

440 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

450 PRESSURE GAUGES AND PRESSURE SWITCHES

460 ODORIZING DEVICES

EXECUTION
620 INSTALLING STORAGE CYLINDERS

• Location: Storage cylinders shall be installed to the Level 1 Plantrooms in as close to the
hazards they protect (Server Room)
• Protection for severe climatic or mechanical exposure: Provide guards or enclosures.
• Sunlight: Protect from direct sunlight.
630 INSTALLING NOZZLES

• Location: Free of obstructions, air currents and draughts.
• Position: Install perpendicular to the hazard centred over the area protected by the nozzle,
or between 45° and 90° from the plane of the hazard surface.
640 INSTALLING CONTROL PANELS

• Location: Exit to the protected space.
• Mounting: Semi-recessed with collar.

COMPLETION
910A TESTING
• Notice (minimum): 14 days.
• Static pressure test:
- Open ended pipelines: Pneumatically test in a closed circuit for 10 minutes at 3 bar
(300 kPa). The pressure drop must not exceed 20% of the test pressure.
- Closed sections of pipelines: Hydrostatically test to 190 bar (19000 kPa) for high
pressure systems and 36 bar (3600 kPa) for low pressure systems, for a period of 2
minutes. After this period check that there is no leakage.
• Purging: On completion of testing, purge the systems. Remove moisture.
Purge system using:-
Nitrogen.
Or C.O.2.
This is to prove continuity of pipework and that the nozzles are clear.
Flimsy paper bags are to be attached to all nozzles during the purge
and removed upon completion of the purge.]
• Performance testing:
Application. Gas Suppression.
All performance testing will be witnessed by the Mechanical
Services Engineer and will consist of the following:
1. Localised smoke puff tests on selected detectors in all zones to
ensure all aspects of the electrical installation, plunger actuation
and fire damper operation react as required.
2. Localised smoke puff tests to ensure that the AHSSD operates
to the specified criteria.
Note. The gas bottles will be disconnected during all performance testing.
The Integrity of the Gas Protected Room consists of three elements.

1. Envelopment Design Review.
Include for providing a brief guidelines document, reviewing the room envelope
drawings and specifications, refining details and generally advising.
2. Envelope Construction Phase Review.
Include for two site visits, the first at an early stage to ensure that the
partition construction operatives are aware of the air tightness standards
that are required and the second visit towards the end of the envelope
construction process to visually inspect the envelope and issue a brief
report listing those areas of leakage that require upgrading.
3. Sealing and Testing of the Enclosure.
Include for carrying out a series of door fan tests to depressurise and
pressurise the room(s), identify leakage areas, then gradually seal the (each)
room until it is sufficiently tight to pass a final integrity test to NFPA 2001
room integrity procedures but with a minimum retention time of 15 minutes.
920 SETTING TO WORK

• Operation: Using nitrogen, or a suitable alternative, test that flow through pipelines and
nozzles is unobstructed.
• Thermal links: Check that control cable lines are free.
• Pneumatic heat actuation: Test using manometer. Capillary lines must be leak free.
930 DOCUMENTATION

940 OPERATING TOOLS

• Tools: Supply tools for operation and maintenance purposes.
- Quantity: 3 sets.
950 MAINTENANCE

V
Electrical systems

V10
High voltage connection

GENERAL
110 INCOMING ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

• Nature of current: Alternating.
• Phase: Three.
• Voltage: 6,600 V - to be upgraded to 11,000V;- timescale not determined at time of tender.
All equipment to be capable of operating at both voltages.
• Source: Electricity Distributor.
120 ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTOR

•Details: Northern Ireland Electricity. The ASB will be fed from the private HV Ring that currently
exist on the site.
130 ELECTRICITY SUPPLIER

• Details: NIE
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the high voltage connection in accordance with the
Electricity Distributor's guidelines.
• Proposals: Submit drawings showing equipment positions and routes, technical information
and calculations.
• Evidence of agreement with Electricity Distributor: Submit.
220 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS

• Anticipated maximum demand: 2MVA.
• Maximum prospective short-circuit current: 250MVA.
• Load voltage unbalance (maximum): In accordance with Engineering Recommendation
P29.
• Supply arrangement: Determine with NIE.
• Earthing and protection requirements: Utilise Local private earthing network and building
specific earth mats.
EXECUTION
620 ISOLATION OF SUPPLY

• Existing high voltage supply: Engage the Electricity Distributor and Electricity Supplier to
isolate and disconnect.
• Written evidence of isolation: Submit.
630 MANAGEMENT
• Establishing the supply: Manage and liaise with the Electricity Distributor and Electricity
Supplier to establish the incoming electricity supply.
• Evidence of liaison: Submit.

640 LOCATION
• Incoming point of supply: Coordinate the location and establish the spatial requirements for
the Electricity Distributor's equipment and metering.
• Location and colour coding of equipment: In accordance with NJUG 'Guidelines on the
positioning and colour coding of utilities' apparatus'.
650 CONNECTION TO THE INCOMING SUPPLY

• Consumer's installation: Connect to the incoming point of supply.
COMPLETION
920 DOCUMENTATION

V12
Generator systems

GENERAL The generator system shall comprise 2 no. generator sets integrated to LV
distribution infrastructure as detailed on the layouts and schematics.
Engage the services of a generator systems specialist to design provide install test
commission and certify a full complete operational and effective dual operation
(standby/prime mover) installation including all necessary direct and ancillary services and
associated connections. The specialist shall also provide that associated diesel supply
system as per requirements detailed under section S40
115 PROPRIETARY GENERATOR SYSTEM Provide and install a full complete fully
operational and effective installation including necessary services and associated
connections.
• System manufacturer: Refer to schedule of preferred manufacturers and suppliers.
• Components: Manufacturer's standard.
• Prime mover: Internal combustion engines.
• Fuel: Diesel supply systems, as section S40.
- Storage tanks:
- Day tank;
- Storage tank, as section S40; and
- Submit design and cost proposals.
• Governor: Required.
• Alternator: Required.
• Automatic voltage regulators: Required
• Exhaust and silencer: Custom to provide attenuation to 65dBA at 1000mm installed (not
free field) when systems are operating at 100% load..
• Control panel: Required
• Gas detection and alarm systems: As section W57
• Generator enclosure: Required to provide attenuation to 65dBA at 1000mm installed (not
free field) when systems are operating at 100% load..
• Louvres: As section L15.
• Earthing: As section V81.
• Signs and notices: As section N15.
• Ventilation: Mechanical supply ventilation system, as section U10 and Mechanical extract
ventilation system, as section U10.
• Vibration isolation mountings: Heavy duty Vibration isolation mountings, as section Y31.
• Accessories:
- Day tank;
- Drip tray;
- Emergency stop buttons;
- Load bank; and
- Safety guards and stone guards.

Binder1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Binder1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Binder1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What components are required for the generator system?

What components are required for the generator system?

What performance standards must the generator system meet?

What performance standards must the generator system meet?

V12 Generator systems

120 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

140 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE ANCILLARIES

220 PERFORMANCE OF GENERATOR SYSTEMS

225 PERFORMANCE OF INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

240 GENERATING SYSTEMS FOR SAFETY SERVICES

250 SERVICE CONDITIONS

260 SYSTEM MODE OF OPERATION

265 GENERATOR SYSTEMS OPERATING IN PARALLEL

270 FUEL AND OIL CONSUMPTION

280A CONNECTING GENERATORS TO THE PUBLIC SUPPLY NETWORK

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

310 GENERATOR SET

345 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

370 ALTERNATORS GENERALLY.

380 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATORS

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

- Low Coolant Level

- Audible: Common alarm with mute button.

470A DAY TANKS

480 DRIP TRAYS

485 EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

495 GENERATOR SET FACTORY INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

498 GENERATOR SET ACCEPTANCE TESTS

499 GENERATOR SET FUNCTIONAL TESTS

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

550A CUSTOM EXHAUSTS

• Type: Natural draught, .

560 FABRICATION PROPOSALS

620 INTERRUPTIONS TO EXISTING SUPPLIES

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

630 INSTALLING GENERATOR SYSTEMS

640A INSTALLING EXHAUSTS

650 INSTALLING CONTROL PANELS

655 INSTALLING EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS

670 INSTALLING DRIP TRAYS

910 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING GENERALLY

940 TESTING GENERATORS OPERATING IN PARALLEL

950 PADLOCKS AND KEYS

970 SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

V20 High voltage distribution systems

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions

GENERAL The contractor shall engage the services of a HV specialist authorised

110 HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GENERALLY.

150 PRE-DESIGN SURVEYS AND DATA COLLECTION OF EXISTING HIGH VOLTAGE

Ulster Hospital Redevelopment Acute Services Block

220 GRADING STUDY

230 DATA LOGGING OF EXISTING HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS